Contents
1 Introduction ………………………………………………………………… 1
1.1 About User Manuals ………………………………………………………… 1
1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual ……………………………… 1
1.3 Abbreviation ………………………………………………………………… 2
1.4 Disclaimer …………………………………………………………………… 2
1.5 For trademarks and registered trademarks ………………………………… 3
1.6 NETWORK RELATIONSHIP ………………………………………………… 4
1.7 Instructions for use …………………………………………………………… 4
2 Operation …………………………………………………………………… 8
2.1 Initial Setting ………………………………………………………………… 8
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera) …………………… 13
2.3 Viewing images from a PC …………………………………………………… 19
2.3.1 View camera images ……………………………………………………… 19
2.3.2 About live image pages …………………………………………………… 22
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals ……………………………… 41
2.4.1 Viewing images from mobile devices (smartphones, etc.) ………………… 41
2.4.2 View images from a tablet terminal ………………………………………… 53
2.5 Manually save images on the SD memory card ……………………………… 70
2.6 Operation when alarm is generated ………………………………………… 71
2.6.1 Alarm type ………………………………………………………………… 71
2.6.2 Operation when alarm is generated ………………………………………… 72
2.7 Display the log list …………………………………………………………… 73
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card ………………………………… 77
2.8.1 When playing JPEG images stored on the SD Memory Card ……………… 79
2.8.2 Play back the image of the stream stored on the SD Memory Card ……… 81
3 Setting ……………………………………………………………………… 86
3.1 Displaying the configuration panel from the PC ……………………………… 86
Contents
i
3.1.1 How to display ……………………………………………………………… 86
3.1.2 How to operate ……………………………………………………………… 87
3.1.3 Setting Panel Screen ……………………………………………………… 87
3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings …………………………………………… 89
3.3 [Stream] for setting images ………………………………………………… 90
3.4 [Image quality] for setting image quality …………………………………… 92
3.5 [Zoom] for setting EX zoom ………………………………………………… 94
3.6 [Audio] for setting sound …………………………………………………… 94
3.7 [Alarm] to set alarm ………………………………………………………… 95
3.8 [Detailed setting] for switching to advanced settings and setting related to the
displayed images ……………………………………………………………… 96
4 Advanced settings ………………………………………………………… 98
4.1 About network security ……………………………………………………… 98
4.1.1 Security function of the unit ………………………………………………… 98
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC ………………………… 99
4.2.1 How to display ……………………………………………………………… 99
4.2.2 How to operate ……………………………………………………………… 101
4.2.3 Camera Advanced Menu Screen …………………………………………… 102
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software ………… 105
4.3.1 [Software mng.] for installing, uninstalling, and upgrading function extension
software …………………………………………………………………… 105
4.3.2 [Operation sched.] for scheduling extended software ……………………… 111
4.3.3 [Control log] to check the [Control log] of the function extension software
………………………………………………………………………………… 113
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting …………………………………………… 114
4.4.1 [Easy installation] where easy installation is performed ………………… 114
4.4.2 [Internet] to set up an Internet-based disclosure system ………………… 117
4.4.3 [Event action] for setting events …………………………………………… 119
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine ……………………………………… 144
4.5.1 [Basic] to perform basic settings …………………………………………… 144
4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards ………………………… 151
4.5.3 [Alteration detection] for detecting tampering …………………………… 161
4.5.4 How to set up falsification detection ……………………………………… 163
4.5.5 [Overlay image] to set overlays …………………………………………… 163
Contents
ii
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files …………………………… 168
4.6.1 [Image] to set the imaging modes ………………………………………… 168
4.6.2 [Image] for setting JPEG images …………………………………………… 170
4.6.3 [Image] for setting up streams ……………………………………………… 174
4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality …………………………………… 184
4.6.5 [Audio] for setting sound …………………………………………………… 222
4.7 Set PTZ ……………………………………………………………………… 225
4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras …………………… 225
4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions ……………………………………………… 230
4.7.3 Set auto-tracking (Auto-tracking screen) ………………………………… 246
4.7.4 Set Auto Track Alarm (Auto Track Alarm screen) ………………………… 252
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm ……………………………………………………… 254
4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation ……………………………………………… 254
4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal …………………………………… 258
4.8.3 [Alarm] to change the aux name …………………………………………… 260
4.8.4 [Alarm] to set alarm linkage operation ……………………………………… 261
4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection ………………………………… 268
4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area ……………………………… 275
4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection ………………………………… 277
4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas ………………………… 280
4.8.9 [Audio detection] for setting sound detection ……………………………… 282
4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification …………………………………… 284
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication …………………………………………… 289
4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication …………………………… 290
4.9.2 [Host auth.] to configure host-authentication …………………………… 293
4.9.3 [System] to set preference streams ……………………………………… 294
4.9.4 [IEEE 802.1X] to configure IEEE 802.1X …………………………………… 295
4.9.5 [Data encryption] for setting up data encryption ………………………… 301
4.10 Networking configuration [Network] ……………………………………… 305
4.10.1 Networking [Network] ……………………………………………………… 306
4.10.2 [Advanced] for advanced networking settings …………………………… 311
4.10.3 Setting up HTTPS ………………………………………………………… 341
4.10.4 How to configure DDNS …………………………………………………… 341
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling …………………………………………………… 348
4.11.1 How to set the schedule ………………………………………………… 353
Contents
iii
4.11.2 How to Delete Schedule ………………………………………………… 356
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine …………………………………… 358
4.12.1 [System log] to check the system logs …………………………………… 358
4.12.2 [Upgrade] to upgrade the software ……………………………………… 359
4.12.3 [Status] for checking the status ………………………………………… 361
4.12.4 [Default reset] to initialize and restart the computer …………………… 364
4.12.5 [Data] to back up/restore configuration logs …………………………… 366
4.13 Viewing Our Support Website [Support] …………………………………… 367
5 Other ……………………………………………………………………… 369
5.1 System Log Display ………………………………………………………… 369
5.2 Trouble!? ……………………………………………………………………… 374
5.3 Directory structure of SD Memory Card …………………………………… 384
5.3.1 Directory configuration of the PTZ camera ………………………………… 384
5.3.2 Directory Configuration of Multi-directional Camera ……………………… 385
Contents
iv
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[used] in this document<Control number: Cxxxx>[1] is the number used to search
for the relevant information in our technical information website.
https://i-pro.com/global/en/surveillance/training-support/support/technical-
information
・Screen photographs are used according to the guidelines of Microsoft Corporation.
・This document describes the operation when using the Japanese version of
Google Chrome as a representative. For confirmation of the operation of the
corresponding Web browser, our Technical Information Web site<Control No.:
C0132>Please refer to.
1 Introduction
1.1 About User Manuals
This manual describes the operation and setting methods of the software that runs this machine.
The description of the camera screen and function used in this manual is not limited to a specific
model, but includes various cameras. Therefore, the description screen and camera screen may
differ depending on the model you use.
This manual explains how to operate and configure a camera using a web browser. For camera
settings, we recommend using the i-PRO setup tool (iCT). By using the i-PRO Setup Tool (iCT),
you can configure up to 1024 cameras simultaneously and you can efficiently configure the
cameras. For the i-PRO Configuration Tool, our Technical Information Website<Control No.
C0133>Please refer to.
1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
The corresponding models in this manual are described in the model column in the table below.
The functions restricted by this manual refer to the models that can be used with the following
symbols and terminology. Functions for which this symbol is not used are supported by all models.
1 Introduction
1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
1
Symbol Term Aircraft type
[PTZ] PTZ camera WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ、 WV-X86530-
Z2_PTZ
[MULTI] Multi-directional camera WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-
X86530-Z2_MULTI
WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-S85402-V2L
WV-U85402-V2L
[MULTI4] Multi-directional camera (4 eyes) WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI
[MULTI3] Multi-directional camera (3 eyes) WV-X86530-Z2_MULTI
[MULTI2] Multi-directional camera (2 eyes) WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-S85402-V2L
WV-U85402-V2L
[MULTI2S] Multi-directional camera (2-eye
S-series)
WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-S85402-V2L
[MULTI2U] Multi-directional camera (2-eye
U-series)
WV-U85402-V2L
[MULTI_PTZ] Multi-directional/PTZ integrated
camera
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ、 WV-X86530-
Z2_PTZ、
WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-
X86530-Z2_MULTI
1.3 Abbreviation
This document uses the following abbreviations.
The Japanese version of Microsoft Windows 10 is called Windows 10.
The Japanese version of Microsoft Windows 11 is called Windows 11.
The microSDXC/microSDHC/microSD memory card is called an SD card or SD memory card.
Universal Plug and Play is designated UPnP™ or UPnP.
1.4 Disclaimer
● The purpose of this product is to obtain images for monitoring specific areas. This product
alone is not intended to prevent crimes.
● In no event shall we be liable for the following:
1 Introduction
1.4 Disclaimer
2
① Any incidental, special or consequential damages or damages arising directly or indirectly
in connection with the Goods
② Inconvenience, damage or damage caused by improper or inadvertent use by the customer
or damage to the product
③ Any failure or fault which has occurred, whether or not caused by the customer's
disassembly, repair or modification of the Goods
④ Any inconvenience, damage, or damage incurred due to the inability to display images for
any reason or cause, including a failure or malfunction of the Product
⑤ Failure or inconvenience, damage, or damage caused by a system combined with a third
party device
⑥ Claims or claims for damages caused by infringement of privacy by an individual or
organization that has become the subject of a picture as a result of the use of surveillance
images and records made public for some reason (including use with the User Authentication
Off).
⑦ The stored information is lost for some reason (including when the Product is initialized
due to forgetting the authentication information such as user name and password)
1.5 For trademarks and registered trademarks
● Microsoft, Windows, Windows Media, Microsoft Edge, and ActiveX are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
● Intel, Intel Core is a trademark of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States
and/or other countries.
● Adobe, Acrobat Reader and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe.
● SDXC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
● iPad and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the United States and other
countries.
● Android and Google Chrome are trademarks of Google LLC.
● Firefox is a trademark of the Mozilla Foundation in the United States and other countries.
● QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE CORPORATION.
● Other company names and product names described in this manual are trademarks or
registered trademarks of each company.
1 Introduction
1.5 For trademarks and registered trademarks
3
1.6 NETWORK RELATIONSHIP
Since this equipment is connected to the network, it may be damaged as follows.
① Leakage or leakage of information via the machine
② Malicious operation of the Aircraft by a malicious third party
③ Interference or stoppage of the Aircraft by a malicious third party
In order to prevent such damage, take adequate network security measures including the following
measures under the responsibility of the customer.
● Use the machine on a secure network using firewalls, etc.
● Confirm that computer viruses and malicious programs are regularly checked and
exterminated when the computer is connected to the system.
● Use user authentication, set user names and passwords, and restrict users who can log in to
protect against unauthorized attacks.
● In order to prevent image data, authentication information (user name, password), alarm mail
information, DDNS server information, etc. from being leaked on the network, measures are
taken to restrict access by user authentication.
● Be sure to close all browsers after administrators have accessed the machine.
● The password of the administrator is changed periodically. In addition, authentication
information (user name, password) shall be appropriately stored so that it is not visible to
third parties.
● Do not install the equipment or cables in a place where they are easily destroyed.
1.7 Instructions for use
When using the machine via the Internet
In order to prevent unintended access by third parties,
● Keep the user authentication setting [On].
● Change the password for accessing the computer periodically. Refer to the following for how
to change.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
For long-term stable performance
Do not use the product in a place with high temperature and high humidity for a long time.
1 Introduction
1.7 Instructions for use
4
Degradation of parts shortens the life of the product.
Improve the heat dissipation in the installation area and prevent direct exposure to heat such as
heating.
If the power supply is turned off and on repeatedly, failure of the equipment may result.
Handle with care
Do not drop or apply strong shock or vibration. Failure to heed this warning may result in failure.
Do not touch the dome cover directly.
If dirty, image quality may deteriorate.
When an error is detected, restart automatically.
The computer automatically restarts when an error is detected for some reason. When restarting,
the operation cannot be performed for approximately 2 minutes as it was when the power was
turned on.
Operation status detection function
If abnormal operation is continued for 30 seconds or longer due to external noise or the like during
operation, the computer will restart automatically and return to normal operation. The restart
operation is the same as when the power is turned on. However, if the restart occurs frequently,
external noise may be generated frequently in the installation environment of this equipment.
Consult your dealer as soon as possible, as this may cause a malfunction.
Periodic distortion of the screen
If the camera is installed in a place where it vibrates in small increments (for example, close to a
vibrating device), the screen may periodically become distorted to extend and contract lengthwise.
This is a characteristic phenomenon that occurs when the CMOS sensor is used for the image
pickup device. It is caused by periodic movement of the screen and the timing of reading out the
image from the image sensor, and it is not an error in the camera. Reassess the installation
condition and ensure the stability of the camera body to alleviate the problem.
We shall not be liable for any loss of, or direct or indirect damage caused by, any compensation,
recording, or editing of the contents that could not be correctly recorded or edited due to a defect
in the machine or the microSD memory card. The same shall apply to the case of repair of the
Aircraft.
CMOS sensor
● If a portion of the screen is bright, such as spot light, the color filter inside the CMOS sensor
may deteriorate, resulting in discoloration. When the direction of fixed monitoring is
changed, spot light on the previous screen will change color and remain.
● When you shoot a fast-moving object, you may see the object bending diagonally across the
screen.
1 Introduction
1.7 Instructions for use
5
For maintenance
Turn off the power before starting operation. Doing so may result in injury.
Do not apply or use organic solvents such as benzene and thinner. The case may become
discolored. Follow the precautionary statement when using chemical foil.
● Do not loosen or remove the screws not specified in the operation manual.
● [PTZ camera]
After maintenance, the camera may have changed its orientation. Be sure to refresh the
position or restart the machine. For details, please refer to the following.
→4.12.4 [Default reset] to initialize and restart the computer
Cleaning the dome cover
If the dome cover is dirty, clean it with a lens cleaning paper (for cleaning cameras and eyeglasses).
Picture shaking correction function
Depending on the installation location, the shaking correction function may not be sufficiently
effective.
Consumables
In some models, consumables are included in parts.
Refer to the web guide for consumables.
Motor operation noise
Depending on the operation speed of the pan or tilt, the operation sound may become louder. If
you are concerned about the operation sound from the auto pan, you can improve it by lowering
the set speed of the auto pan.
About the AVC Patent Portfolio License
This product is licensed under the AVC Patent Portfolio License and is not licensed except for
your personal and non-commercial use of the following:
(1) Image information shall be recorded in accordance with the AVC standard (hereinafter
referred to as AVC video).
(2) Playing AVC videos recorded by consumers engaged in personal activities or AVC videos
obtained from licensed providers. See the MPEG LA, LLC home page (https://www.mpegla.
com/) for more information.
Position Refresh
[PTZ camera]
If the watch is used for a long time, the preset position may be misaligned. It is recommended to
set position refresh using the schedule function and periodically correct camera misalignment.
Please refer to the table below for the setting.
1 Introduction
1.7 Instructions for use
6
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
In the event the Aircraft is transferred or disposed of
The contents of the information recorded on the computer and the contents of the information
recorded on the storage media used with the computer may correspond to "personal information."
When handing over the unit to a third party for disposal, transfer, repair, etc., pay careful
attention to the handling. When discarding the storage media, it is recommended to physically
destroy the data after deleting it with a PC, etc.
Connection to the Internet
The Aircraft cannot be connected directly to communication lines (including public wireless LANs)
of telecommunications carriers (mobile carriers, fixed carriers, Internet providers, etc.). When
connecting the computer to the Internet, be sure to connect via a router.
Protection of personal information
Personal information shot using the system is subject to the Personal Information Protection Law.
Handle video information properly in accordance with the law.
※Refer to the "Guidelines for the Act on the Protection of Personal Information (General Rules)"
of the Personal Information Protection Committee for examples corresponding to personal
information.
HEVC (High Efficiency VideoCoding) Patent
This product is within the scope of one or more claims of the HEVC patent listed on patent
list.accessidvance.com.
About Routers
When connecting the computer to the Internet and using a router, use a broadband router with a
port forwarding function (NAT, IP Mask Calade). Please refer to the following for an overview of
the port forwarding function.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
Time Setting
It is necessary to set the time before starting operation. For the time setting, refer to the
following.
→2.1 Initial Setting
→2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
1 Introduction
1.7 Instructions for use
7
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
Administrator registration
The administrator registration screen is displayed when the camera is first accessed (or when the
camera is initialized).
Enter an administrator's user name and password to ensure that there are no mistakes. Use the
following login.
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
8
・
[User name (1 to 32 characters)]
Enter an administrator username.
・Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
・Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ￥
・
[Password (8 to 32 characters)]/[Retype password]
Enter the administrator's password.
・Number of characters that can be entered:8 to 32 characters
・Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
9
[Note:]
・Enter case-sensitive data.
・Use at least three of the following passwords: uppercase alphabetic characters,
lowercase alphabetic characters, numbers, and symbols.
・Configure the password so that it does not contain the user name.
[Important]
・If the set user name or password is lost, the camera must be initialized. When the
camera is formatted, all settings will be cleared. Keep the user name and password
out of the eyes of third parties. Refer to the Web Guide for the formatting
method.
・Change the password periodically.
・Do not use other cameras, devices, or other passwords.
After registering the user name and password of the administrator, the Language/Datetime
setting screen is displayed.
Language/Datetime Settings
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
10
Language/Datetime Settings
・
[Menu language]
Select the first language that appears when you access the camera from the list below.
[Auto]/[English]/[Japanese]/[Italian]/[French]/[German]/[Spanish]/[Chinese]/[Russian]/
[Portuguese]
[Auto] automatically selects the languages used by the browser. If your computer is not
compatible with the language, the English language is selected.
・
[Time display format]
Select the time display method from 24h/12h.
・
[Date/time display format]
Select the date display format. If [Date/time] is set to [13:10:00 on April 1, 2021], the display
formats are as follows.
・DD/MM/YYYY: 01/04/2021 13:10:00
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
11
[Important]
・If you need to set the time more accurately in system operation, use the NTP
server.
→4.10.2.3 Set up an NTP server
[Note:]
・If you want to set whether or not to display the date and time on the images, use
the [Basic] pages in the Advanced menu.
→4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
・MM/DD/YYYY: 04/01/2021 13:10:00
・DD/Mmm/YYYY: 01/Apr/2021 13:10:00
・YYYY/MM/DD: 2021/04/01 13:10:00
・Mmm/DD/YYYY: Apr/01/2021 13:10:00
・
[Date]
Click the button to set the camera date.
Click to get the date of the PC and display it.
・
[Time]
Click the button to enter the camera time.
Click to acquire the time of the PC and display it.
・
[Date/time position]
Select the position where the date and time are displayed on the image.
• [Upper left]: Displayed in the upper left corner of the window.
• [Lower left]: Displays in the lower left corner of the window.
• [Upper center]: Displayed in the center of the window.
• [Lower center]: Displays at the bottom center of the window.
• [Upper right]: Displayed in the upper right corner of the window.
• [Lower right]: Displays in the lower right corner of the window.
・
[Time zone]
Select the time zone for the camera area.
・
[Summer time(daylight saving)]
Use [In], [Out] and [Auto] to specify whether to use Daylight Saving Time. Set in the region
where Daylight Saving Time is used.
• [In] sets the time to Daylight Saving Time. [*] is displayed in the time display.
• [Out] cancels Daylight Saving Time.
• [Auto] switches to Daylight Saving Time according to the start date and time and end date
2 Operation
2.1 Initial Setting
12
settings (month, week, day of the week, and time).
・
[Start time & date] [End time & date]
When [Auto] is selected in [Summer time(daylight saving)] Setting, the start date and time of
Daylight Saving Time and the end date and time of Daylight Saving Time are set in Month,
Week, Day of Week, and Time.
Screen settings
・
[Character color]
Select the background color of the operation panels and advanced menus from the [Light]
[Dark].
→4 Advanced settings
・
[Operation panel layout]
Select the position of the control panel from [Right], [Left], and [Lower].
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
Administrator registration
The administrator registration screen is displayed when the camera is first accessed (or when the
camera is initialized).
Enter an administrator's user name and password to ensure that there are no mistakes. Use the
following login.
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
13
・
[Set to both cameras]
When the setting is performed with the checkbox checked, the [User name] and [Password]
entered into the PTZ camera are also set for the Multi-directional camera.
If you want to set up different administrator information for the PTZ camera and the
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
14
[Note:]
・Enter case-sensitive data.
・Use at least three of the following passwords: uppercase alphabetic characters,
lowercase alphabetic characters, numbers, and symbols.
・Configure the password so that it does not contain the user name.
・If you want the PTZ camera and the Multi-directional camera to work together by
screen clicking or alarm notification, set the same user name and password for
both cameras.
[Important]
・If the set user name or password is lost, the camera must be initialized. When the
camera is formatted, all settings will be cleared. Keep the user name and password
out of the eyes of third parties. Refer to the Operation Manual Web Guide for the
formatting method.
・Change the password periodically.
・Do not use other cameras, devices, or other passwords.
Multi-directional camera, uncheck the checkbox and enter [User name] and [Password].
・
[User name (1 to 32 characters)]
Enter an administrator username.
・Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
・Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ￥
・
[Password (8 to 32 characters)]/[Retype password]
Enter the administrator's password.
・Number of characters that can be entered:8 to 32 characters
・Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
After registering the user name and password of the administrator, the Language/Datetime
setting screen is displayed.
Language/Datetime Settings
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
15
Language/Datetime Settings
・
[Menu language]
Select the first language that appears when you access the camera from the list below.
[Auto]/[English]/[Japanese]/[Italian]/[French]/[German]/[Spanish]/[Chinese]/[Russian]/
[Portuguese]
[Auto] automatically selects the languages used by the browser. If your computer is not
compatible with the language, the English language is selected.
・
[Time display format]
Select the time display method from 24h/12h.
・
[Date/time display format]
Select the date display format. If [Date/time] is set to [13:10:00 on April 1, 2021], the display
formats are as follows.
・DD/MM/YYYY: 01/04/2021 13:10:00
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
16
[Important]
・If you need to set the time more accurately in system operation, use the NTP
server.
→4.10.2.3 Set up an NTP server
[Note:]
・If you want to set whether or not to display the date and time on the images, use
the [Basic] pages in the Advanced menu.
→4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
・MM/DD/YYYY: 04/01/2021 13:10:00
・DD/Mmm/YYYY: 01/Apr/2021 13:10:00
・YYYY/MM/DD: 2021/04/01 13:10:00
・Mmm/DD/YYYY: Apr/01/2021 13:10:00
・
[Date]
Click the button to set the camera date.
Click to get the date of the PC and display it.
・
[Time]
Click the button to enter the camera time.
Click to acquire the time of the PC and display it.
・
[Date/time position]
Select the position where the date and time are displayed on the image.
• [Upper left]: Displayed in the upper left corner of the window.
• [Lower left]: Displays in the lower left corner of the window.
• [Upper center]: Displayed in the center of the window.
• [Lower center]: Displays at the bottom center of the window.
• [Upper right]: Displayed in the upper right corner of the window.
• [Lower right]: Displays in the lower right corner of the window.
・
[Time zone]
Select the time zone for the camera area.
・
[Summer time(daylight saving)]
Use [In], [Out] and [Auto] to specify whether to use Daylight Saving Time. Set in the region
where Daylight Saving Time is used.
• [In] sets the time to Daylight Saving Time. [*] is displayed in the time display.
• [Out] cancels Daylight Saving Time.
• [Auto] switches to Daylight Saving Time according to the start date and time and end date
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
17
[Note:]
・[Tilt adjustment lever position] can also be set from the [Basic] tabs of the Live
Picture Settings pane. Please refer to the following for details.
→3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
settings (month, week, day of the week, and time).
・
[Start time & date] [End time & date]
When [Auto] is selected in [Summer time(daylight saving)] Setting, the start date and time of
Daylight Saving Time and the end date and time of Daylight Saving Time are set in Month,
Week, Day of Week, and Time.
Screen settings
・
[Character color]
Select the background color of the operation panels and advanced menus from the [Light]
[Dark].
→4 Advanced settings
・
[Operation panel layout]
Select the position of the control panel from [Right], [Left], and [Lower].
Set position
Select the [Tilt adjustment lever position] set when the cameras are installed.
2 Operation
2.2 Initial setting (Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera)
18
[Important]
・If the HTTP port number is changed from [80], enter [http://Camera IP
address:Port number] in the [Address] box.
e.g., if the port number is set to 8080: http://192.168.0.11:8080
・If your computer is in a local network, configure the proxy server ([Set]-[Network
and Internet]-[Proxy]) to avoid using the proxy server for the local address.
・When IPv6 is accessed, the stream image cannot be displayed on the live screen.
If you want to display the stream image on the live screen, please access it via
IPv4.
[Note:]
・Due to browser limitations, there is an upper limit on the number of browsers that
can display video simultaneously. If you try to display images in multiple browsers,
the images may not be displayed.
・[HTTPS] on the [Advanced] tab of the network page-for the [HTTPS]
configuration in [Connection], the animated support video pages of our technical
information website<Control No. P0002><Control No. P0003>Please refer to.
→4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
This section explains how to view camera images from a PC.
2.3.1 View camera images
1 Start the PC web browser.
2 Enter the IP addresses set in the IP Easy Configuration software in the [Address] boxes of
the web browser.
Example IPv4 address input:URL registered with the http://IPv4 address
http://192.168.0.10/
Example IPv6 address input:Http://[URL registered with IPv6 address]
Http://[2001:db8::10]/
<IPv4 access example>
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
19
[Note:]
・If [User auth.] is set to [Off], the Username and Password entry window will not
be displayed prior to the live page.
[Important]
・Change the password periodically.
・If you try to display multiple H.265 (or H.264) images on a single PC, depending
on the performance of the PC, the image may not be displayed.
[Note:]
・Users with simultaneous access to the computer are up to the total number of
users who receive H.265 (or H.264) images and those who receive JPEG images.
However, depending on the [Bandwidth control(bit rate)] [Bit Rate* per Client]
setting, the number of accessible users may be limited to [Max Users] or less. If
the number of accessible users exceeds [Maximum number of users], an access
excess message is displayed. When [Stream] [Transmission type] is set to
[Multicast], the second and subsequent users receiving H.265 (or H.264) images
are not counted as accesses.
・[Maximum number of users] depends on the model.
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ、 WV-X86530-Z2_PTZ、 WV-U85402-V2L
Up to 14 people
WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-X86530-Z2_MULTI、 WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-
S85402-V2L
3 Press the [Enter] key to display the user name and password entry screen.
4 Enter the user name and password, and click the [OK] button to display the live picture
page. For more information on live picture pages, please refer to the following.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
20
Up to 24 persons
・When [Stream transmission] is set to [On], the H.265 (or H.264) images are
displayed according to the [Stream encoding format] settings. When set to [Off],
JPEG images are displayed. JPEG images can be displayed even if [Stream
transmission] is set to [On]. However, in this case, the image update rate of the
JPEG image is limited as shown in the table below.
→4.6.3 [Image] for setting up streams
・The rate of image updating of JPEG images may be slow depending on the
network environment, PC performance, subject, and number of accesses.
Imaging mode Resolution Stream delivery
On Off
JPEG(1) JPEG(2) JPEG(1) JPEG(2)
60 fps mode/
30 fps mode/
15 fps mode
1920x1080 Up to 5 fps Up to 15 fps Up to 30 fps
(*)
Up to 15 fps if
(*) imaging
mode is 15 fps
Up to 30 fps
(*)
Up to 15 fps if
(*) imaging
mode is 15 fps
1280x720
640x360
320x180
2048x1536
1280x960
VGA
QVGA
50 fps mode/
25 fps mode/
12.5 fps mode
1920x1080 Up to 4.2 fps Up to 12.5 fps
Up to 25 fps(*)
Up to 12.5 fps
for the (*)
imaging mode
of 12.5 fps
Up to 25 fps(*)
Up to 12.5 fps
for the (*)
imaging mode
of 12.5 fps
1280x720
640x360
320x180
2048x1536
1280x960
VGA
QVGA
PTZ camera
Please refer to the following for the relationship between your model and symbols and terminology.
→1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
Multi-directional camera
Please refer to the following for the relationship between your model and symbols and terminology.
→1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
21
Imaging mode Resolution Stream delivery
On Off
JPEG(1) JPEG(2) JPEG(1) JPEG(2)
30 fps mode/
15 fps mode
3840x2160 Up to 1 fps -(no function) Up to 15 fps -(no function)
3072x1728
2688x1520 Up to 30 fps
(*)
Up to 15 fps if
(*) imaging
mode is 15 fps
2560x1440 Up to 2 fps
1920x1080 Up to 5 fps
1280x720
640x360
320x180
25 fps mode/
12.5 fps mode
3840x2160 Up to 1 fps -(no function) Up to 12.5 fps -(no function)
3072x1728
2688x1520
Up to 25 fps(*)
Up to 12.5 fps
for the (*)
imaging mode
of 12.5 fps
2560x1440 Up to 2.1 fps
1920x1080 Up to 4.2 fps
1280x720
640x360
320x180
[Note:]
・Buttons and settings displayed on the live image page can be changed depending
on the user's privileges. The user privileges are set in the [User mng.] [User
auth.].
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
2.3.2 About live image pages
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
22
2.3.2.1 Live Picture Pages for Multi-directional Cameras
①[Camera title]
The title of the camera entered in [Camera title] on the [Basic] tab is displayed.
②[SD Storage Status Display]
Displays the storage status on the SD Memory Card.
When saving starts, the SD save status indicator turns red. The LED turns OFF when saving
stops.
This is displayed when the [Save trigger] in the Setup menu is set to [Manual] or [Schedule].
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
23
[Note:]
・This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in Dual mode.
[Note:]
・This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in Dual mode.
・When 1 or 2 is selected, the size of the browser may be smaller than the actual
size, depending on the size of the browser when the Image capture size is
[1280x720] or larger, or when [Image capture mode] is Dual mode. When [Dual] is
selected, the size of the browser may be smaller than the actual size of the
browser in any Image capture size.
③[Camera to be displayed]
Select the camera to be displayed in the main area.
• [Dual]: Displays images of cameras 1 and 2 in two sections.
•1: Displays camera 1 images.
•2: Displays camera 2 images.
④[Stream Selection Display] button
You can toggle between displaying and hiding popup displays on the stream selection screen. In
the streaming selection window, you can set the [Live view] etc.
⑤[Select Streams]-[Live view] pull-down menu
The image to be displayed in the main area can be selected from the following.
[Dual]When selected: [Streams(2)]/ [JPEG]
When 1 or 2 is selected: [Stream(1)]/ [Stream(2)]/[JPEG]
The main area image is displayed according to the settings in streams (1) to (2) and JPEG.
You can also configure the [Initial display stream] of the [Stream] tabs to show the first streams
that appear when you are accessing the cameras.
→3.3 [Stream] for setting images
⑥[Select Streams]-[Refresh Rate] pull-down menu
This pull-down menu is displayed only when the JPEG image is displayed. Select how the JPEG
image is displayed.
[MJPEG]:Displays a JPEG image as a series (MJPEG: Motion JPEG).
[Refresh interval : 1s]/[Refresh interval : 3s]/[Refresh interval : 5s]/[Refresh interval :
10s]/[Refresh interval : 30s]/ [Refresh interval : 60s]:Updates JPEG images (still images) at
specified intervals.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
24
[Note:]
・The JPEG format (still image) update interval may not be updated at the specified
interval, depending on your network environment or PC.
・If [Dual] is selected in the [Live only] pull-down menu, [Refresh interval : 1s] and
[Refresh interval : 3s] cannot be selected.
[Note:]
・Displays the value set in the stream. The actual bit rate and frame rate vary
depending on your network environment and PC.
⑦[Select Streams]-[Layout] pull-down menu
This pull-down menu is displayed only when it is displayed in [Dual].
Select the display layout of the camera image to be displayed in the main area from the
left/right/up/down view.
⑧[Select stream]-[View Stream Information]
Displays the settings of the compression method, resolution, bit rate, frame rate, etc. of the live
image being displayed.
⑨[Support button]
Click the Support button to display our Technical Information website in a separate window.
Our technical information website includes technical information, FAQ (Frequently Asked
Questions), etc.
⑩[Full Screen Display Button]
A new window opens displaying the full screen image.
⑪[Grid display] buttons
You can switch the grid display ON/OFF that can be used to adjust the machine's position
when using the function extension software.
For the size of adjustments for each of the functional extensions we sell and provide, our
technical information website<Control No.: C0320>It is listed.
⑫[Snapshot button]
A snapshot (one still image) is acquired and the image is displayed in a separate window.
Right-click on the image to save the image using the web browser function.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
25
[Note:]
・If it takes more than a certain period of time to acquire a snapshot depending on
the network environment, the image may not be displayed.
・If the specified resolution of JPEG cannot be acquired, the JPEG image with the
available resolution is displayed. Therefore, if you snapshot a JPEG image and
refer to it on a PC, the image size may differ from the displayed image size.
[Note:]
・This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in Dual mode.
[Note:]
・Transmission voice can only be used when connected with HTTPS.
・If [Interactive(Half-duplex)] is set while one user is talking, the other user's
listening will be stopped and the earpiece button and the talk button will not be
operable. If set to [Interactive(Full-duplex)], other users will not be able to use
the call key.
・The maximum call duration per call is set on the [Audio] tabs of the video and
audio pages. The call stops after the set continuous call time. If you want to make
another call, click the call button.
・When the computer is restarted, the earpiece volume/voice volume changed by
⑬[Camera Control Panel View button]( )
The camera control panel can be displayed or hidden. The camera control panel can be set to
[Brightness], etc.
⑭[Camera Control Panel]-[Brightness]
It can be adjusted from 0 to 255.
Clicking the button brightens the image. Click the button
to darken the image. Click the button to return to the default settings. This cannot be set
when [Dual] is displayed.
⑮[Camera Control Panel]-[Transmission voice (from PC)]
This can only be set if [Audio transmission mode] is set to [Audio output] or [Interactive(Full-
duplex)] [Interactive(Half-duplex)] in the configuration menus.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
Buttons, By clicking on the buttons or by moving the volume cursors, you can adjust the
volume of the call by four levels: [Off], [Low], [Middle] and [High].
Click the talk button to turn on/off the talking voice (from PC).
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
26
the volume cursor will return to the earpiece volume/voice volume set in the
[Audio] tab of the image/voice page.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・On the screen, the volume cursor can be fine-tuned, but actually it is set to one
of four levels of volume.
[Note:]
・When [Audio volume control mode] is set to [Adjust Mic input] in the Setup
menu, the volume cursor is not displayed when using [Audio recording] or [Audio
detection].
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・When the computer is restarted, the earpiece volume changed by the volume
cursor returns to the earpiece volume set in the [Audio] tabs of the setting
menus.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・On the screen, the volume cursor can be fine-tuned, but actually it is set to one
of four levels of volume.
・If you open multiple camera browsers simultaneously on the same PC, you cannot
hear the sound of the camera browser opened later. Access and check one by one.
・If network communication is unstable, voice reception may be stopped. In this
case, restart voice reception by turning on and off the earpiece button.
⑯[Camera Control Panel-[Voice (on PC)]
This item can be set in the following settings.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
If • [Audio transmission mode] is set to [Mic input] or [Interactive(Full-duplex)] [Interactive
(Half-duplex)]
If • [Audio input encoding format] is set to [AAC-LC]
Buttons, You can adjust the earpiece volume in four steps: [Off], [Low], [Middle], and
[High] by clicking on buttons or by moving the volume cursor.
Click the Listen button to turn on/off the earpiece voice (heard on PC).
⑰[Camera Control Panel]-[AUX] Buttons
This setting is available only when [Terminal 3] of [Alarm] is set to [AUX output] in the
Advanced menu.
→4.4.3.2 Alarm: Sets terminal and operation detection (alarm setting screen)
[Open] buttons:The AUX terminal is open.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
27
[Note:]
・The names of [AUX], [Open], and [Close] can be changed.
→4.8.3 [Alarm] to change the aux name
[Note:]
・The alarm notification is not linked to the alarm notification operation such as
recording to the SD Memory Card or mail transfer. Check the respective
operation settings.
[Close] buttons:The AUX terminal will be closed.
⑱[Camera Control Panel]-[Playback of recording (Log disp.)]
Clicking [Start] displays the log list and plays back the images stored on the SD Memory Card.
Please refer to the following for details of the log list and how to play back the image.
→2.7 Display the log list
⑲[[Camera Control Panel]-[Record/Play (SD Memory Card)]
This can only be set when [Save trigger] is set to [Manual] on the [SD memory card] tabs.
You can manually save images to SD Memory Cards by clicking [Start]. To manually save
images on the SD Memory Card, refer to the following.
→2.5 Manually save images on the SD memory card
⑳[Set] buttons(
)
You can view or hide the setting panel.
→3 Setting
㉑[Alarm notification]
When an alarm is generated, it is displayed as a popup. Clicking the [X] button resets the
output terminal and the display disappears.
→2.6 Operation when alarm is generated
㉒[View Stream Information]
Displays the compression method, resolution, and frame rate of live video.
㉓[Main area]
Displays the camera image.
The current date and time are displayed according to the set [Time display format] and
[Date/time display format].
→4.5.1 [Basic] to perform basic settings
The set text is displayed on the screen. The number of lines is two.
When H.265 is displayed, when the bit rate is high, it may be displayed at the refresh interval.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
28
[Note:]
・Users with low access levels may temporarily change the display but do not affect
the operation of the camera.
・When the shooting scene changes significantly depending on the PC, tiring (a
phenomenon in which a part of the screen is misaligned) may occur due to
constraints in the OS drawing process.
・When the data encryption function is enabled, the image cannot be viewed on the
live screen. Use the corresponding equipment.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] The live image pages for each camera are displayed by accessing
the IP addresses set for the PTZ camera and the Multi-directional camera.
2.3.2.2 Live image pages for Multi-directional/PTZ integrated cameras
PTZ camera
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
29
Multi-directional camera
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
30
[Note:]
・If it takes more than a certain period of time to acquire a snapshot depending on
the network environment, the image may not be displayed.
・If the specified resolution of JPEG cannot be acquired, the JPEG image with the
available resolution is displayed.
Therefore, if you snapshot a JPEG image and refer to it on a PC, the image size
may differ from the displayed image size.
①[Camera Title] [Basic]
The title of the camera entered in [Camera title] on the tab is displayed.
②[SD Storage Status Display]
Displays the storage status on the SD Memory Card.
When saving starts, the SD save status indicator turns red. The LED turns OFF when saving
stops.
This is displayed when the [Save trigger] in the Setup menu is set to [Manual] or [Schedule].
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
③[View Stream Information]
Displays the compression method, resolution, and frame rate of live video.
④[Snapshot button]
A snapshot (one still image) is acquired and the image is displayed in a separate window.
Right-click on the image to save the image using the web browser function.
⑤[Stream Selection Display button]
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
31
You can toggle between displaying and hiding popup displays on the stream selection screen. In
the streaming selection window, you can set the [Live view] etc.
⑥[Before/after image comparison toggle button]
Click the icon to acquire and display the still image. You can compare the acquired still images
as images before changing the image quality setting.
[ ][1] Displays the downloaded still image and the latest image in the same size.
[ ][1]:The latest image is doubled in size between the downloaded still image and the latest
image.
[
][View]: Only the latest image is displayed.
⑦[Support button]
Click the Support button to display our Technical Information website in a separate window.
Our technical information website includes technical information, FAQ (Frequently Asked
Questions), etc.
⑧[Full Screen Display Button]
A new window opens displaying the full screen image.
⑨[Grid display] buttons
You can switch the grid display ON/OFF that can be used to adjust the machine's position
when using the function extension software.
For the size of adjustments for each of the functional extensions we sell and provide, our
technical information website<Control No.: C0320>It is listed.
⑩[Camera Control Panel View] button( )
The camera control panel can be displayed or hidden. The camera control panel can be set to
[Brightness], etc.
⑪[Set] buttons(
)
You can view or hide the setting panel.
→3 Setting
⑫[Select Streams]-[Live view] pull-down menu
The image to be displayed in the main area can be selected from the following.
PTZ camera
[Multi-directional + PTZ/[Stream(1)]/[Stream(2)]/[Stream(3)]/[Stream(4)]/JPEG(1)/JPEG(2)
Multi-directional camera
[Camera to be displayed]When [Quad] [Triple] is selected:[Multi-directional + PTZ]/[Stream
(2)]/JPEG
[Camera to be displayed]When 1, 2, 3, or 4 are selected:[Multi-directional + PTZ]/[Stream(1)]
/[Stream(2)]/JPEG
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
32
[Note:]
・When the resolution is [1280x720] or higher, the size of the browser screen may
be smaller than the actual size.
・[MULTI] This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in quad mode.
・[MULTI] When selecting 1, 2, 3, or 4, if the resolution is [1280x720] or higher or
[Image capture mode] is Quad-mode, the size of the browser screen may be
smaller than the actual size. When [Quad] [Triple] is selected, the size of the
browser screen may be smaller than the actual size at any resolution.
[Note:]
・The JPEG format (still image) update interval may not be updated at the specified
interval, depending on your network environment or PC.
・[MULTI] When [Quad] [Triple] is selected in the [Live view] pull-down menu,
[Refresh interval : 1s] and [Refresh interval : 3s] cannot be selected.
[Note:]
・Displays the value set in the stream. The actual bit rate and frame rate vary
depending on your network environment and PC.
The main area image is displayed according to the settings in the stream and JPEG.
You can also configure the [Initial display stream] of the [Image] tabs to show the first
streams that appear when you are accessing the cameras.
→3.3 [Stream] for setting images
⑬[Select Streams]-[Refresh Rate] pull-down menu
This pull-down menu is displayed only when the JPEG image is displayed. Select how the JPEG
image is displayed.
MJPEG:Displays a JPEG image as a series (MJPEG: Motion JPEG).
[Still image updates: 1 second]/[Refresh interval : 3s]/[Refresh interval : 5s]/[Refresh interval :
10s]/[Refresh interval : 30s]/ [Refresh interval : 60s]:Updates JPEG images (still images) at
specified intervals.
⑭[Select stream]-[View stream information]
Displays the settings of the compression method, resolution, bit rate, frame rate, etc. of the live
image being displayed.
⑮[Main area]
Displays the camera image.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
33
[Note:]
・Users with low access levels may temporarily change the display but do not affect
the operation of the camera.
・When the shooting scene changes significantly depending on the PC, tiring (a
phenomenon in which a part of the screen is misaligned) may occur due to
constraints in the OS drawing process.
・When the data encryption function is enabled, the image cannot be viewed on the
live screen. Use the corresponding equipment.
・When a high zoom factor image is displayed, the clicked position may not be the
center of the image.
・As the tilt angle approaches 90 degrees, the difference between the specified
position and the actual direction of movement will become larger, and the
specified image angle may not be achieved.
・If the mouse is dragged to move to an angle that exceeds the rotational range of
the camera, the camera moves to the position where it can be operated, and then
the zoom factor is automatically adjusted.
The current date and time are displayed according to the set [Time display format] and
[Date/time display format].
→4.5.1 [Basic] to perform basic settings
The set text is displayed on the screen. The number of lines is two.
When H.265 is displayed, when the bit rate is high, it may be displayed at the refresh interval.
⑯[PTZ-Panel]-[Zoom] Buttons
Adjust the zoom manually.
:Adjust the zoom factor in the [Wide angle] direction.
:Zoom (magnification) 1.0 times.
:Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
⑰[PTZ-panel]-[Focus]
Adjust the focus manually with the buttons.
[Auto]:Automatically adjust focus.
[Near]:Adjust the focus to the [Near].
[Far]:Adjust the focus to the [Far].
[Displays the auto focus frame]:When you draw a frame with the image [On], adjust the focus
(focus) to match the frame.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
34
[Note:]
・The following subjects cannot be focused with auto focus. Focus manually.
A subject that is bright or reflects strong light
-Subject over water droplets or dirty glass
Remote and nearby subjects mixed together
-Subjects (white walls, etc.) without contrast
A horizontal subject, such as a blind-an oblique subject-a dark subject
⑱[PTZ panel-[Control pad]
Left-click the pads and buttons to adjust the horizontal and vertical position of the image (pan
tilt).
The faster the camera operates, the faster the outside of the pad is clicked.
You can also drag and adjust the mouse. Zoom and focus by right-clicking.
Clicking on the upper half of the pad in the upper and lower directions will zoom in the
telephoto, and clicking on the lower half will zoom in the wide angle. Clicking on the left half in
the left and right directions will bring the focus (focus) close to you, and clicking on the right
half will bring it far away. You can also adjust the zoom by using the mouse wheel.
⑲[PTZ-panel]-[Auto mode]
Selecting Operation from the pull-down menu starts the selected operation.
When panning, tilting, zooming, or focusing is performed, or when the operation set in [Self
return] or [Camera action on alarm] starts, it is also terminated.
→4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
→4.8.4 [Alarm] to set alarm linkage operation
[Automatic Tracking]:When a pre-set object to be detected is detected, the object is
automatically tracked.
→4.7.3 Set auto-tracking (Auto-tracking screen)
[Auto Pan]:The start and end positions of the predetermined pan are automatically rotated. The
pivot operation continues even after the zoom and focus operations (when the [x1] button of the
[Zoom] button is clicked, the pivot operation stops).
→4.7.2.3 Set auto pan (Auto pan setting screen)
[Preset Sequence 1], [Preset sequence 2], [Preset sequence 3]:Move the pre-registered preset
positions in order from the lowest preset number.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
35
[Note:]
・If the content of [Self return] operates at the time set by [Self return time] during
the auto mode operation, the auto mode operation stops.
→4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
[Note:]
・If you want to move to the home position when the power is turned on, set
[HomePosition] to [Self return].
[Note:]
・If you want to perform the above operations when turning on the power, it is
convenient to use the self-return function.
・The self-return function works even when the setting menu is displayed.
・[Patrol] can be set only when patrols are set.
→4.7.2.4 Set patrol (Patrol function setting screen)
・[Preset sequence] can be set only when preset sequence is set.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
⑳[PTZ-panel]-[Preset No.]
Select the preset position from the pull-down menu and click the [Move] button to move the
camera's orientation to the preset position registered beforehand.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
[H] next to the number indicates the home position. Select [HomePosition] to move the
orientation of the camera to the home position.
→4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
If [Preset ID (0 – 9,A – Z)] is registered, the position name is displayed next to the number.
㉑[PTZ-panel]-[Cam. Function]
[Home position]
You can set the preset position as the home position. When the home position is set, [H] is
displayed next to the preset position number.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
[Self return]
When the time set by [Self return time] has elapsed after the manual operation is completed,
the camera can automatically return to the operation mode set by the camera.
[Self return time]
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
36
[Note:]
・The alarm notification is not linked to the alarm notification operation such as
recording to the SD Memory Card or mail transfer. Check the respective
operation settings.
[Note:]
・When [Audio volume control mode] is set to [Adjust Mic input] in the Setup
menu, the volume cursor is not displayed when using [Audio recording] or [Audio
detection].
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・When the computer is restarted, the earpiece volume changed by the volume
cursor returns to the earpiece volume set in the [Audio] tabs of the setting
menus.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・On the screen, the volume cursor can be fine-tuned, but actually it is set to one
of four levels of volume.
・If you open multiple camera browsers simultaneously on the same PC, you cannot
After the manual operation is completed, select the time before returning to the operation set
by [Self return].
㉒[Alarm notification]
When an alarm is generated, it is displayed as a popup. Clicking the [X] button resets the
output terminal and the display disappears.
→2.6 Operation when alarm is generated
㉓[Camera Control Panel]-[Brightness]
It can be adjusted from 0 to 255.
Clicking the button brightens the image. Click the button
to darken the image.
Click the button to return to the default settings.
㉔[Camera Control Panel]-[Mic input volume (Camera to PC)]
This item can be set in the following settings.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
If • [Audio transmission mode] is set to [Mic input] or [Interactive(Full-duplex)] [Interactive
(Half-duplex)]
If • [Audio input encoding format] is set to [AAC-LC]
Buttons, Click the button or move the volume cursor to adjust the earpiece volume in four
steps: Off/weak/medium/strong.
Click the Listen button to turn on/off the earpiece voice (heard on PC).
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
37
hear the sound of the camera browser opened later. Access and check one by one.
・If network communication is unstable, voice reception may be stopped. In this
case, restart voice reception by turning on and off the earpiece button.
[Note:]
・Transmission voice can only be used when connected with HTTPS.
・If [Interactive(Half-duplex)] is set while one user is talking, the other user's
listening will be stopped and the earpiece button and the talk button will not be
operable. If set to [Interactive(Full-duplex)], other users will not be able to use
the call key.
・The maximum call duration per call is set on the [Audio] tabs of the video and
audio pages. The call stops after the set continuous call time. If you want to make
another call, click the call button.
・When the computer is restarted, the earpiece volume/voice volume changed by
the volume cursor will return to the earpiece volume/voice volume set in the
[Audio] tab of the image/voice page.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
・On the screen, the volume cursor can be fine-tuned, but actually it is set to one
of four levels of volume.
㉕[Camera Control Panel]-[Audio output volume (PC to Camera)]
This can only be set if [Audio transmission mode] is set to [Audio output] or [Interactive(Full-
duplex)] [Interactive(Half-duplex)] in the configuration menus.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
Buttons, By clicking on the buttons or by moving the volume cursors, you can adjust the
volume of the call by four levels: [Off], [Low], [Middle] and [High].
Click the talk button to turn on/off the talking voice (from PC).
㉖[Camera Control Panel]-[AUX] Buttons
This setting is available only when [Terminal 3] of [Alarm] is set to [AUX output] in the
Advanced menu.
→4.4.3.2 Alarm: Sets terminal and operation detection (alarm setting screen)
[Open] buttons:The AUX terminal is open.
[Close] buttons:The AUX terminal will be closed.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
38
[Note:]
・The names of [AUX], [Open], and [Close] can be changed.
→4.8.3 [Alarm] to change the aux name
[Note:]
・This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in quad mode.
㉗[SD Memory Cards]-[Rec. on SD]
This can only be set when [Save trigger] is set to [Manual] on the [SD memory card] tabs.
You can manually save images to SD Memory Cards by clicking [Start]. To manually save
images on the SD Memory Card, refer to the following.
→2.5 Manually save images on the SD memory card
㉘[SD Memory Cards]-[Log/Play]
Clicking [Start] displays the log list and plays back the images stored on the SD Memory Card.
Please refer to the following for details of the log list and how to play back the image.
→2.7 Display the log list
㉙[Camera to be displayed]
Select the camera to be displayed in the main area.
• [Quad]: Displays images of cameras 1, 2, 3, and 4 in quadrants.
• [Triple]: Displays images of cameras 1, 2, and 3 in triplicate.
•1: Displays camera 1 images.
•2: Displays camera 2 images.
•3: Displays images of camera 3.
•4: Displays camera 4 images.
㉚[Select Streams]-[Layout] pull-down menu
This pull-down menu is displayed when [Camera to be displayed] is displayed in [Quad] [Triple]
or when [Multi-directional + PTZ] is selected in [Live view].
Select the display layout of the camera image to be displayed in the main area from the
following.
When [Camera to be displayed] [Quad] [Triple] is selected: [Quadruple]/ [360 deg.]/ [270
deg.]
When [View live image][Multi-directional + PTZ] is selected: [Up/Down]/[Left/Right]
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
39
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] If [Left/Right] is selected in [Layout], the displayed Multi-
directional camera window will be [4 split].
・[MULTI_PTZ] If [Up/Down] is selected in [Layout], the displayed Multi-
directional camera will be [360 deg.] or [270 deg.].
・[MULTI_PTZ] If the Multi-directional camera [Image capture mode] is set to
[Quad Mode], [Up/Down] cannot be selected in [Layout]. If the Multi-directional
camera [Image capture mode] is changed to [Quad Mode] while [Layout] is
selected as [Up/Down], [Layout] is changed to [Left/Right].
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] When selecting a stream, the image of the PTZ camera displays the
stream (3) and the Multi-directional camera displays the stream (2).
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] The PTZ operation is available from the PTZ panel [PTZ] on the
PTZ camera.
㉛[Select Streams]-[Refresh Rate] pull-down menu
This pull-down menu is displayed when [Multi-directional + PTZ] is selected in [Live view].
Toggle the JPEG and stream display methods.
MJPEG:Displays a JPEG image as a series (MJPEG: Motion JPEG).
[Still image updates: 1 second]/[Refresh interval : 3s]/[Refresh interval : 5s]/[Refresh interval :
10s]/[Refresh interval : 30s]/ [Refresh interval : 60s]:Updates JPEG images (still images) at
specified intervals.
[Stream]:Displays the image in stream format.
㉜[PTZ-panel]-[PTZ]
The link to the PTZ camera is displayed with the name of the PTZ camera. When this name is
clicked, the live picture of the PTZ camera is displayed.
2 Operation
2.3 Viewing images from a PC
40
[Important]
・If the Authentication dialog appears, enter your username and password. To
ensure security, change the password periodically.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
[Note:]
・In order to view images of your computer from a mobile terminal, it is necessary
to set up a network to connect to the Internet in advance.
→4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
2.4.1 Viewing images from mobile devices (smartphones, etc.)
Connect a portable terminal to your computer and display images (MJPEG and JPEG formats) of
your computer. The latest image is automatically updated.
The following models are supported. As of April 2022
-iPad, iPhone (iOS 8 or later)
-Android™ terminal
2.4.1.1 Viewing images of a Multi-directional camera from a portable terminal (smartphone,
etc.)
1 [http://IP address/cam] by mobile phone
*1
Or [Host name/cam registered at http://DDNS
server]
*2
Enter the data and press the Enter button to display the image of the computer.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
41
[Note:]
・The operation buttons displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal may not be
displayed depending on the user privileges and function permission settings of the
user to access. If you want to view the operations buttons, you need to set the
①[Live image]
Displays the area camera image.
②[Operation button area]
When the function is selected in the function selection area, the button to operate the function
is displayed.
③[Function selection area]
Displays and selects functions that can be operated, and the operation buttons are displayed in
the operation button area.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
42
user privileges and function permissions ([User mng.] [User auth.]).
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
2 Click the button of the function you want to operate.
①[Camera switchover]
When the button is pressed, the button to select the camera is displayed on the screen.
Select the camera from the displayed button to change the displayed camera.
Images of cameras 1 and 2 are displayed at the resolution set in [JPEG] in the [Image] tabs.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
43
②[Aux control]
Press the button to display the button to operate the AUX output.
、 The button enables you to control the AUX output terminal.
This message is displayed only when [Terminal 3] is set to [AUX output] in the operation
setting menu.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
44
[Note:]
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port
number/cam]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If you are using the DDNS
function, [http://Host name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/cam]
*2
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
Https://IP address: port number/cam or the host name registered with the
https://DDNS server: port number/cam
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
45
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
・Audio cannot be received from a portable terminal.
・Some mobile terminals may not be able to display images when the image size is
large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of [JPEG] is close to
low quality.
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet. Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset
in the same LAN with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
2.4.1.2 Viewing images of a Multi-directional/PTZ camera from a portable terminal
(smartphone, etc.)
PTZ camera
1 [http://IP address/cam] by mobile phone
*1
Or [Host name/cam registered at http://DDNS
server]
*2
Enter the data and press the Enter button to display the image of the computer.
①[Live image]
Displays the area camera image.
②[Operation button area]
When the function is selected in the function selection area, the button to operate the function
is displayed.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
46
[Note:]
・The operation buttons displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal may not be
displayed depending on the user privileges and function permission settings of the
user to access. If you want to view the operations buttons, you need to set the
user privileges and function permissions ([User mng.] [User auth.]).
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
③[Zoom operation area]
Displays the zoom button.
④[Function selection area]
Displays and selects functions that can be operated, and the operation buttons are displayed in
the operation button area.
2 Click the button of the function you want to operate.
①[Pan/Tilt]
Press the button to display the button to operate the pan/tilt. 、 、 、 Press the
buttons to pan/tilt in each direction.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
47
②[Preset]
Press the button to display the button for selecting the preset position. By selecting the
preset number from the displayed button, the camera image is displayed in the direction of the
preset registered camera.
Only position numbers 1 to 4 are displayed for preset positions.
Only registered preset positions are displayed, and unregistered preset positions are not
displayed.
③[Resolution switchover]
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
48
Press the button to display the screen for selecting the resolution.
The resolution is switched by selecting the resolution from the displayed buttons.
The resolution set in the [JPEG(1)] [JPEG(2)] of the [JPEG] in the [Image] tab is displayed.
④[Aux control]
Press the button to display the button to operate the AUX output.
、 The button enables you to control the AUX output terminal.
This message is displayed only when [Terminal 3] is set to [AUX output] in the operation
setting menu.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
49
⑤[Focus Display]
Press the button to display the button to perform the focus operation.
、 、 The button allows focusing of the camera image.
⑥[Zoom display]
、 、 You can zoom the camera image with the buttons.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
50
[Note:]
・The screen size displayed on the mobile phone can be changed by accessing the
following.
-Large screen size: http://IP address/cam/dl
Display medium: http://IP address/cam/dm
-display small: http://IP address/cam/ds
・The resolution displayed by [Resolution] changes, but the size of the images does
not change.
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port
number/cam]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If you are using the DDNS
function, [http://Host name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/cam]
*2
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
Https://IP address: port number/cam or the host name registered with the
https://DDNS server: port number/cam
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
・Audio cannot be received or sent from a mobile terminal.
・Some mobile terminals may not be able to display images when the image size is
large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of [JPEG] is close to
low quality.
→4.6.2 [Image] for setting JPEG images
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet.
Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset in the same LAN
with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
Multi-directional camera
1 [http://IP address/cam] by mobile phone
*1
Or [Host name/cam registered at http://DDNS
server]
*2
Enter the data and press the Enter button to display the image of the computer.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
51
[Note:]
・The operation buttons displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal may not be
displayed depending on the user privileges and function permission settings of the
user to access. If you want to view the operations buttons, you need to set the
user privileges and function permissions ([User mng.] [User auth.]).
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port
number/cam]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If you are using the DDNS
function, [http://Host name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/cam]
*2
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
Https://IP address: port number/cam or the host name registered with the
https://DDNS server: port number/cam
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
①[Live image]
Displays the area camera image.
②[Camera switchingArea]
The button for selecting the camera to be displayed in the live image is displayed.
Select the camera from the displayed button to change the displayed camera.
Images of cameras 1, 2, 3 and 4 are displayed at the resolution set in [JPEG] in the [Image]
tabs.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
52
・Some mobile terminals may not be able to display images when the image size is
large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of [JPEG] is close to
low quality.
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet. Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset
in the same LAN with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
[Important]
・If the Authentication dialog appears, enter your username and password. To
ensure security, change the password periodically.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
[Note:]
・To view images on your computer from a tablet terminal, it is necessary to set up
a network to connect to the Internet in advance.
→4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
・Depending on the model, the same screen as the PC may be displayed. In this
case, enter either [http://IP address/live/tab.html] or [http://DDNS
server/live/tab.html] to connect.
2.4.2 View images from a tablet terminal
Connect the tablet terminal to the computer and display images (MJPEG and JPEG formats) of the
computer. The latest image is automatically updated. The following models are supported. As of
April 2022
-iPad, iPhone (iOS 8 or later)
-Android terminal
2.4.2.1 Viewing Multi-directional Camera Images from a Tablet Terminal
1 [http://IP address] on the tablet terminal
*1
Or [host name/ registered in the http://DDNS
server]
*2
The image of the computer is displayed when you enter it and connect it to the
computer.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
53
①[Setup menu.] buttons*3
Indicates the setup menu.
②[[Switch Display Camera] pull down menu
The camera image displayed in the area ⑤ can be selected.
[Camera 1 to Camera 2:Images of camera 1 and 2 are displayed at the same time. Displayed
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
54
[Note:]
・The blinking of the alarm notification button is not linked to the alarm notification
operation such as recording to the SD Memory Card or mail transfer. Check the
setting of each operation.
[Note:]
・Set [Super Dynamic] to [Off] when the following phenomena are observed
depending on the lighting condition.
-when flickering or color changes occur
-when noise is generated in the bright area of the screen
according to the settings in [⑦ Layout Setup pull-down Menu].
[Camera 1:Image of camera 1 is displayed as a single image.
[Camera 2:Image of camera 2 is displayed as a single image.
③[Camera title]
The title of the camera entered in [Camera title] on the [Basic] tab is displayed.
→3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
④[Alarm Notification] button*4
The lamp blinks when an alarm is generated. Click the button to disappear.
⑤[Main area]
Live displays the camera image.
⑥[Capacity display]
The remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory Card are displayed.
⑦[Layout Settings] pull-down menu
Select "[Left/right display]" or "[Up/down display]" as the layout of images to be displayed in
the area ⑤. The Layout Setting pull-down menu is displayed when [Camera 1-Camera 2] is
selected in the Display Camera Switching pull-down menu.
[Left/right display]: Images of cameras 1 and 2 are displayed in left-right alignment.
[Up/down display]: Images of cameras 1 and 2 are displayed in the upper and lower positions.
⑧[Super dynamic setting]
You can set [On] or [Off] to activate the super dynamic function. You can set for each preset
position. See [What is Super Dynamic] for details on super dynamic.
[On]:The Super Dynamic function is activated.
[Off]:Stops the superdynamic function.
⑨[Light control mode] pull-down menu
Select the mode to control the light intensity from the following.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
55
[Note:]
・The zoom (magnification) switches between the optical zoom and EX optical
zoom.
[Important]
・With the mask area, privacy zone, operation detection area, undesired detection
area, and VIQS area set, setting the EX optical zoom will shift the position.
Therefore, set the EX optical zoom and then set each area.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
→4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
→4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas
→4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
[Note:]
・One-click on the [Near] or [Far] buttons may appear to have no change in focus
due to trace adjustments. If you want to move the focus position large, press and
hold the button for a long time.
[Flickless (50 Hz)/[Flickless (60 Hz)]:Flicker is automatically corrected with a fluorescent
lamp. 50 Hz/60 Hz will be used differently in different regions.
ELC:The electronic shutter is used to control the light intensity.
⑩[Manual zoom adjustment]
Adjust the zoom manually.
[-]: Adjust the zoom factor to 1.0 times in the [Wide angle] direction.
[x1]: Zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
[+]: Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telephone] direction.
⑪[Manual focus adjustment]
Adjust the focus manually.
[Near]: Adjust the focus to the [Near].
[Reset] returns focus (focus) to its default settings.
[Far]: Adjust the focus to the [Far].
⑫[Auto focus]
When [Execute] is clicked, the auto focus function is activated to automatically adjust the focus
to the subject in the center of the picture.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
56
[Important]
・If auto focus is executed while the slow shutter is running (e.g. at night) with the
[Maximum shutter] set to a longer time than [1/30s maximum] (2/30s maximum],
[4/30s maximum], [6/30s maximum], [10/30s maximum], or [16/30s maximum]),
it may take a lot of time to complete auto focus.
・The focus may not be adjusted automatically in the following locations or subject.
In this case, adjust the focus manually.
Be a big move
Large variation in illumination
-Low illumination-Extremely bright or reflected light
Over the window
-where the dome cover is prone to contamination
White walls are less dark.
Flicker fiercely
・When the image is switched from color to black and white in the near infrared
region, the focus may shift due to the optical characteristics. If [Focusing at Day
& Night switching] is set to [Auto] or [Preset], the camera can focus automatically
(it does not support the lighting change after the focus operation is completed).
[Note:]
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port number/]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If the DDNS function is used, [http://Host
name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/]
*3
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
[https://IP address:port number/] or [host name registered on the https://
DDNS server: port number/]
⑬[Brightness adjustment] buttons
Adjust the brightness. The [Brightness adjustment] buttons are not displayed when [Camera 1
to Camera 2] is selected in the Show Camera switching pull-down menu.
Press the [Light (+)] button to brighten the image.
Press the [Dark (-)] button to darken the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default brightness.
⑭[Close] buttons
Hides the Setup menu.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
57
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
・Sound cannot be received from a tablet terminal.
・Depending on the tablet terminal, the image may not be displayed when the size o
f
the image is large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of
[JPEG] is close to low quality.
・You may not be able to access some tablets and contract plans.
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet.
Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset in the same LAN
with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
*3It is available only for users whose access levels are set to [1. Administrator].
*4When [User auth.] is set to [On], only users with access levels set to [1. Administrator] or [2.
Camera control] can work.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
2.4.2.2 Viewing images of the Multi-directional/PTZ camera from the tablet terminal
PTZ camera
1 [http://IP address] on the tablet terminal
*1
Or [host name/ registered in the http://DDNS
server]
*2
The image of the computer is displayed when you enter it and connect it to the
computer.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
58
①[Setup menu.] buttons*3
Indicates the setup menu.
②[Camera title]
The title of the camera entered in [Camera title] on the [Basic] tab is displayed.
→3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
③[Alarm Notification] button*4
The lamp blinks when an alarm is generated. Click the button to disappear.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
59
[Note:]
・The alarm notification button blinks in conjunction with the alarm notification
operation such as mail transfer. Check the operation setting.
[Note:]
・Set [Super Dynamic] to [Off] when the following phenomena are observed
depending on the lighting condition.
-when flickering or color changes occur
-when noise is generated in the bright area of the screen
・If [Light control mode] is set to [Fix shutter], [Super Dynamic] cannot be set to
[On].
・When [Stabilizer] is set to [On], the superdynamic setting is [Off].
④[SD Storage Status Display]
Displays the storage status on the SD Memory Card. When saving starts, the SD save status
indicator turns red. The LED turns OFF when saving stops.
This is displayed when the [Save trigger] in the Setup menu is set to [Manual] or [Schedule].
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
⑤[Main area]
Live displays the camera image.
⑥[Capacity display]
The remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory Card are displayed.
⑦[Super dynamic setting]
You can set [On] or [Off] to activate the super dynamic function. You can set for each preset
position. This cannot be set when [Image capture mode] is in [60 fps mode] or [50 fps mode].
See [What is Super Dynamic] for details on super dynamic.
[On]:The Super Dynamic function is activated.
[Off]:Stops the superdynamic function.
⑧[Light control mode] pull-down menu
Select the mode to control the light intensity from the following.
[Outdoor shooting:The brightness (illumination) controls the light intensity by combining the
electronic shutter and automatic aperture. This setting is used when shooting bright subjects
such as outdoors. Be careful not to flicker under fluorescent lights, etc.
[Flickless (50 Hz)/[Flickless (60 Hz)]:Flicker is automatically corrected with a fluorescent
lamp. 50 Hz/60 Hz will be used differently in different regions.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
60
[Note:]
・If you increase the shutter speed (～1/10,000), you will be less prone to blur
even when the subject moves faster.
・Increasing the shutter speed decreases the sensitivity.
・If [Super Dynamic] is set to [On], [Fix shutter] cannot be set. To configure [Fix
shutter], set [Super Dynamic] to [Off].
・[Indoor scene(60Hz)] cannot be set when [Image capture mode] is in 25fps, 50fps,
or 12.5fps modes.
[Important]
・When registering a preset position using a tablet, pay attention to the following.
If updating of the image on the tablet is slow, it is recommended that you register
the preset while viewing the image on the confirmation monitor.
-If you resize the screen with tablet operation, you may not be able to change the
[Fixed shutter:
If [Image capture mode] is in 30 fps or 15 fps mode:
[1/30 fixed], [3/120 fixed], [2/100 fixed], [2/120 fixed], [1/100 fixed], [1/120 fixed], [1/250
fixed], [1/500 fixed], [1/1000 fixed], [1/2000 fixed], [1/4000 fixed], or [1/10000 fixed]
If [Image capture mode] is in 25 fps or 12.5 fps mode:
[1/25 fixed]/[3/100 fixed]/[2/100 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000
fixed]/[1/2000 fixed]/[1/4000 fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
When [Image capture mode] is 60 fps:
[1/60 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/120 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000 fixed]/[1/2000
fixed]/[1/4000 fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
If [Image capture mode] is in 50fps mode:
[1/50 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000 fixed]/[1/2000 fixed]/[1/4000
fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
⑨[Preset position setting]
Set the preset position.
Before registering the preset, move the camera in the direction you want to register.
To change the orientation of the camera, enable [Swipe operation permission] and select the
image position to be centered on the image angle. The camera's orientation moves to a position
centered on the clicked position.
If you want to zoom in, enable [Swipe operation permission] and select the zoom area in the
picture.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
61
orientation or zoom in on the screen.
If you cannot adjust the orientation of the camera with the tablet operation, refer
to the following to move the camera orientation in the direction you want to
register.
→2.4.1 Viewing images from mobile devices (smartphones, etc.)
[Important]
・If you set [Preset ID], be sure to press [Register].
[Note:]
・When set to [On], the position name is displayed where you set the position in
[Camera title position] on the [Basic] tab.
[Important]
・If you set [Preset ID (0 – 9,A – Z)], be sure to press [Register].
[Note:]
・The position name entered is displayed next to the preset position number in the
pull-down. If [Preset ID] is set to [On], it can also be displayed on the images.
Preset No.
Set the position number to be registered.
Preset ID
Use [On] and [Off] to set whether the position name is displayed. You can set for each preset
position.
[On]:Displays the position name.
[Off]:The position name is not displayed.
Preset ID (0-9,A-Z)
Enter the name to be displayed on the image. You can set for each preset position.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 40 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (single-byte), A-Z (single-byte, uppercase, lowercase), double-byte,
single-byte symbol ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
62
[Note:]
・When presetting a subject whose depth does not change, a subject whose
contrast is low, or a subject with high brightness such as a spotlight, etc., set
[Off] and register the preset position after setting the focus.
[Note:]
・The preset position set to [Off] does not move to that position during the preset
sequence, but instead moves to the next preset position.
・Depending on the stop time setting, the watch may move to the next preset
position during auto focus operation.
・If the preset sequence function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be
consumed and the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For
consumables, refer to the Web Guide.
⑩[Auto focus]
Use [Auto] and [Off] to set whether auto focus is performed after the preset is moved. You can
set for each preset position.
[Auto]:Auto focus is performed after the preset is moved.
[Off]:Auto focus is not performed after moving the preset.
[Stopping time]
During the preset sequence operation, select the time to reflect the image of each preset
position (the time when the camera stops rotating) from the following.
[5s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [25s]/ [30s]
⑪[Zoom]
Adjust the zoom manually.
[-]:Adjust the zoom factor to 1.0 times in the [Wide Angle] direction.
[x1]: Zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
[+]:Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
⑫[Focus]
Adjust the focus manually.
[Auto]:Automatically adjust focus.
[Near]:Adjust the focus to the [Near].
[Far]:Adjust the focus to the [Far].
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
63
[Note:]
・The following subjects cannot be focused with auto focus. Focus manually.
Bright or intense light reflecting subjects
-Subject over water droplets or dirty glass
Remote and nearby subjects mixed together
-Subjects (white walls, etc.) without contrast
--horizontal subject such as a blind
Oblique subject
Dark subject
[Note:]
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port number/]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If the DDNS function is used, [http://Host
name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/]
*3
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
[https://IP address:port number/] or [host name registered on the https://
DDNS server: port number/]
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
・Depending on the tablet terminal, the image may not be displayed when the size o
f
the image is large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of
[JPEG] is close to low quality.
→4.6.2 [Image] for setting JPEG images
・You may not be able to access some tablets and contract plans.
⑬[Brightness adjustment] buttons
Adjust the brightness.
Press the [Light (+)] button to brighten the image.
Press the [Dark (-)] button to darken the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default brightness.
⑭[Close] buttons
Hides the Setup menu.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
64
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet.
Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset in the same LAN
with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
*3It is available only for users whose access levels are set to [1. Administrator].
*4When [User auth.] is set to [On], only users with access levels set to [1. Administrator] or [2.
Camera control] can work.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
Multi-directional camera
1 [http://IP address] on the tablet terminal
*1
Or [host name/ registered in the http://DDNS
server]
*2
The image of the computer is displayed when you enter it and connect it to the
computer.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
65
[Note:]
・The blinking of the alarm notification button is not linked to the alarm notification
operation such as recording to the SD Memory Card or mail transfer. Check the
setting of each operation.
①[Setup menu.] buttons*3
Indicates the setup menu.
②[[Switch Display Camera] pull down menu
The camera image displayed in the area ⑤ can be selected.
[Camera 1 to Camera 4:Images of camera 1, 2, 3 and 4 are displayed at the same time.
Displayed according to the settings in [⑦ Layout Setup pull-down Menu].
[Camera 1 to Camera 3Images of camera 1, 2 and 3 are displayed at the same time. Displayed
according to the settings in [⑦ Layout Setup pull-down Menu].
[Camera 1:Image of camera 1 is displayed as a single image.
[Camera 2:Image of camera 2 is displayed as a single image.
[Camera 3:Image of camera 3 is displayed as a single image.
[Camera 4:The image of camera 4 is displayed as a single image.
③[Camera title]
The title of the camera entered in [Camera title] on the [Basic] tab is displayed.
→3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
④[Alarm Notification] button*4
The lamp blinks when an alarm is generated. Click the button to disappear.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
66
[Note:]
・Set [Super Dynamic] to [Off] when the following phenomena are observed
depending on the lighting condition.
-when flickering or color changes occur
-when noise is generated in the bright area of the screen
⑤[Main area]
Live displays the camera image.
⑥[Capacity display]
The remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory Card are displayed.
⑦[Layout Settings] pull-down menu
Select from [4 split], [360 deg.] and [270 deg.] for the layout of the images to be displayed in
the area ⑤. The Layout Setting pull-down menu is displayed when [Camera 1] to [Camera 4]
and [Camera 1] to [Camera 3] are selected from the Display Camera Switching pull-down menu.
[360-degree shooting:Images of camera 1, 2, 3, and 4 are displayed side by side. Select this
when you want to place camera 4 horizontally, such as when you want to take a wide range of
pictures.
[270-degree shooting:Images of camera 1, 2, and 3 are displayed side by side. Select this when
you want to shoot a wide area.
[Divide into four pieces:Images of cameras 1, 2, 3, and 4 are displayed in quadrants.
⑧[Super dynamic setting]
You can set [On] or [Off] to activate the super dynamic function. You can set for each preset
position. See [What is Super Dynamic] for details on super dynamic.
[On]:The Super Dynamic function is activated.
[Off]:Stops the superdynamic function.
⑨[Light control mode] pull-down menu
Select the mode to control the light intensity from the following.
[Flickeress (50 Hz)/[flickeress (60 Hz)]:Flicker is automatically corrected with a fluorescent
lamp. 50 Hz/60 Hz will be used differently in different regions.
ELC:The electronic shutter is used to control the light intensity.
⑩[Manual zoom adjustment]
Adjust the zoom manually.
[-]: Adjust the zoom factor to 1.0 times in the [Wide angle] direction.
[x1]: Zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
[+]: Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telephone] direction.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
67
[Note:]
・The zoom (magnification) switches between the optical zoom and EX optical
zoom.
[Important]
・With the mask area, privacy zone, operation detection area, undesired detection
area, and VIQS area set, setting the EX optical zoom will shift the position.
Therefore, set the EX optical zoom and then set each area.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
→4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
→4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas
→4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
[Note:]
・One-click on the [Near] or [Far] buttons may appear to have no change in focus
due to trace adjustments. If you want to move the focus position large, press and
hold the button for a long time.
[Important]
・If auto focus is executed while the slow shutter is running (e.g. at night) with the
[Maximum shutter] set to a longer time than [1/30s maximum] (2/30s maximum],
[4/30s maximum], [6/30s maximum], [10/30s maximum], or [16/30s maximum]),
it may take a lot of time to complete auto focus.
・The focus may not be adjusted automatically in the following locations or subject.
In this case, adjust the focus manually.
Be a big move
⑪[Manual focus adjustment]
Adjust the focus manually.
[Near]: Adjust the focus to the [Near].
[Reset] returns focus (focus) to its default settings.
[Far]: Adjust the focus to the [Far].
⑫[Auto focus]
When [Execute] is clicked, the auto focus function is activated to automatically adjust the focus
to the subject in the center of the picture.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
68
Large variation in illumination
-Low illumination-Extremely bright or reflected light
Over the window
-where the dome cover is prone to contamination
White walls are less dark.
Flicker fiercely
・When the image is switched from color to black and white in the near infrared
region, the focus may shift due to the optical characteristics. If [Focusing at Day
& Night switching] is set to [Auto] or [Preset], the camera can focus automatically
(it does not support the lighting change after the focus operation is completed).
[Note:]
・If the HTTP port number is changed from 80, [http://IP address:port number/]
*1
Enter the port number of the machine. If the DDNS function is used, [http://Host
name registered on the DDNS server: Port number/]
*3
Please enter.
・If you are configuring [HTTPS] in [HTTPS]-[Connection] on the [Advanced] tab
of the Network Page, enter the following.
[https://IP address:port number/] or [host name registered on the https://
DDNS server: port number/]
・When the Authentication dialog appears, enter the administrator's or general
user's username and password. Depending on the mobile phone, the password
may need to be entered each time the screen is switched.
・Sound cannot be received from a tablet terminal.
・Depending on the tablet terminal, the image may not be displayed when the size o
f
the image is large. This may be displayed when the [Image quality setting] of
[JPEG] is close to low quality.
・You may not be able to access some tablets and contract plans.
⑬[Brightness adjustment] buttons
Adjust the brightness. [Brightness adjustment] buttons are not displayed when [Camera 1] to
[Camera 4] and [Camera 1] to [Camera 3] are selected from the [Display Camera Selection]
pull-down menu.
Press the [Light (+)] button to brighten the image.
Press the [Dark (-)] button to darken the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default brightness.
⑭[Close] buttons
Hides the Setup menu.
2 Operation
2.4 Viewing images from mobile/tablet terminals
69
*1The IP address is the global IP address on the WAN side of the router that can be accessed
from the Internet.
Note, however, that this is the local IP address when accessing the handset in the same LAN
with a mobile terminal supporting wireless connection.
*2Only for accessing the computer via the Internet.
*3It is available only for users whose access levels are set to [1. Administrator].
*4When [User auth.] is set to [On], only users with access levels set to [1. Administrator] or [2.
Camera control] can work.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Recording format] can be set only for streams.
・[MULTI] Manually saves all camera movies at the same time.
2.5 Manually save images on the SD memory card
You can manually save the image on the live image page to the SD Memory Card.
This function is available only when [Save trigger] is set to [Manual] by clicking the [SD memory
card] tab on the Basic page of the Advanced Menu.
In the [Recording format] of the Advanced menus, you can select either JPEG or Stream to save.
If JPEG is selected in [Recording format], a still image is saved. If JPEG is selected, a movie is
saved.
1 Live image pages are displayed.
→2.3.1 View camera images
2 Click [Camera control] to view the [Camera control] panels.
3 [SD memory card]-starts saving to the SD Memory Card by clicking [Start] on the [Rec. on
SD]. The SD save status indicator turns red during storage.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
The saved intervals are set on the [SD memory card] tabs of the basic pages.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
4 To stop storing images on the SD Memory Card, press the [Stop] buttons for [SD memory
card]-[Rec. on SD]. The SD save status indicator turns OFF when saving is stopped.
5 Close the Camera Control Panel by clicking [Camera control].
2 Operation
2.5 Manually save images on the SD memory card
70
[Note:]
・Images saved on the SD Memory Card can be downloaded from the Log List
screen to the PC by clicking the [Start] button on the [Log/Play] button on the
Live screen.
The download function allows saving to the PC.
→2.8.1 When playing JPEG images stored on the SD Memory Card
→2.8.2 Play back the image of the stream stored on the SD Memory Card
The destination for storing image data is the fixed directory in the SD Memory
Card.
→5.3 Directory structure of SD Memory Card
・If you click the [Stop] button and then immediately click the [Start] button, the
image may not be saved. If so, click [Start] again.
・To use this function correctly, format the SD Memory Card on your computer
before using the SD Memory Card.
2.6 Operation when alarm is generated
When the following alarms are generated, the machine performs an alarm operation according to
the setting (camera operation associated with alarm generation).
2.6.1 Alarm type
[Terminal alarm]:When an alarm device such as a sensor is connected to the alarm input terminal,
an alarm is activated when the connected alarm device operates.
[VMD alarm]:When a change (movement) is detected in the image in the set operation detection
area, an alarm is activated.
* Operation detection: VMD (Video Motion Detector) = Motion detection, Motion detector
function
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm]:The alarm is activated when the subject is changed by
covering the camera with a cloth or a lid, or changing the camera direction significantly.
[Command alarm]:When a unique alarm notification is received from the connected device via the
network, an alarm is activated.
[Audio detection alarm]:An alarm is activated when the set sound detection threshold is exceeded.
Alarm Notification from Function Extension Software:When the function extension software with
2 Operation
2.6 Operation when alarm is generated
71
an alarm function is installed, an alarm is activated when an alarm is generated by the function
extension software.
2.6.2 Operation when alarm is generated
Displaying alarm notification on live image page
When an alarm is generated, the alarm notification is displayed on the [Live] page.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
Notify the device connected to the output terminal of the alarm
When an alarm is activated, a signal can be output from the output terminal to sound an alarm,
etc. The outputs are set on the [Alarm] tabs of the alarm pages.
→4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
Save images on the SD Memory Card
When an alarm is activated, images (JPEG/H.265/H.264) are saved on the SD Memory Card. To
save images on the SD Memory Card, use the [SD memory card] tab on the basic page and the
[Alarm] tab on the alarm page.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Notify the alarm by e-mail
When an alarm is generated, an e-mail notifying that an alarm has occurred (alarm notification) is
sent to the previously registered e-mail address. You register up to four mail messages to send
alarms. You can also attach a still image to send an alarm mail. Alarm mail is set on the [Alarm] tab
of the alarm page and on the [Advanced] tab of the network page.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
→4.10.2.1 Set mail sending
Notifies that an alarm has occurred at the specified address (unique alarm notification)
This function is useful when using devices manufactured by us (network disk recorder, etc.). When
[TCP alarm notification] is set to [On], the computer can be notified that it is in the alarm
condition. You can set your own alarms by using the [Notification] tabs on the alarm pages.
→4.8.10.1 Set unique alarm notification
Notifying that an alarm has occurred on the specified HTTP server (HTTP alarm notification)
When an alarm is generated, the alarm is sent to the pre-registered HTTP server. You can
register up to five notified HTTP servers. You can also set the URL you want to send to the
HTTP server. The HTTP alarm is set on the [Notification] tab of the alarm page.
→4.8.10.2 Set the HTTP alarm notification
2 Operation
2.6 Operation when alarm is generated
72
2.7 Display the log list
The following history is displayed in the list.
Alarm Log:The alarm date and time, recording period, and alarm cause can be checked.
Manual/Schedule Storage Log:You can check the log and recording period when saved manually
or in schedule settings.
1 Live image pages are displayed.
2 Press the [View Camera Control Panel] button to display the camera control panel.
3 SD Memory Card-When the [Start] button of the [Log/Play] is clicked, the Log List window
is displayed in a separate window.
2 Operation
2.7 Display the log list
73
[Important]
・The log list display screen cannot be accessed by multiple users simultaneously.
① Recording period
Displays the period of recording saved on the SD Memory Card.
② Recording stream
Select the recording stream in which you want to view the log.
[Camera 1]:For Camera 1, the logs recorded by [Recording stream] are displayed.
2 Operation
2.7 Display the log list
74
[Note:]
・[MULTI] Only the Multi-directional camera can select the recording stream.
・[MULTI] Recorded images in the Quad/Dual mode include images from all
cameras, so any camera can be searched.
[Camera 2]:For Camera 2, the logs recorded by [Recording stream] are displayed.
[Camera 3]:The logs recorded by [Recording stream] are displayed for Camera 3.
[Camera 4]:For Camera 4, the logs recorded by [Recording stream] are displayed.
③ Event
Select the type of log that is displayed in the log list.
[All]:Displays all logs.
[Select]:Only the logs of the selected type are displayed.
– [Alarm Log:Displays the log when an alarm is generated.
– [Manual/Schedule Save Log:Displays the log for manual saving and schedule saving.
④ Recording time
Specify the duration of the log to be displayed in the log list.
[From]:Sets the start point of the period to be displayed in the log.
–[First recording:The first log saved on the SD Memory Card is displayed.
–[Today:Displays today's logs.
–[Yesterday:Displays logs from yesterday to today.
–[Last 7 days:Displays logs from 6 days ago to the present day.
–[Last 30 days:Displays logs from 29 days ago to today.
–Date/time:Displayed from the date and time log entered in the date and time specification
box.
To:When [First recording] and [Date/time] are set in [Start], set the end of the time period
to be displayed in the log.
–Last recording:Displays the last log saved on the SD Memory Card.
–Date/time:The date and time log entered in the Date and Time Setting box is displayed.
⑤ Search button
[Event] searches for logs according to the condition specified by [Recording time]. The
search results are displayed in the log list.
⑥ Log list
The log search results are displayed. [Time] allows playback of recorded data by clicking
[Record Period].
(top) button:Displays the first log.
2 Operation
2.7 Display the log list
75
[Note:]
・If [Time display format] is set to [24h], the alarm date and time is displayed in
24-hour format.
・The timing of logging is as follows.
–[Alarm Log:The date and time of the alarm is logged.
–[Manual/Schedule Save Log:The date and time when saving to the SD Memory
Card was started by manual or schedule setting is recorded as a log. To save
continuously, logs are logged at hourly intervals (12 o'clock, 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock,
etc.) when [Recording format] is JPEG. Also, when [Recording format] is
streamed, logs are logged every hour from the beginning of recording.
[Note:]
・The difference between the recording end time and the recording start time is
rounded to the nearest 0.1 second. Therefore, when only one JPEG image is
recorded, the recording time is displayed as 00:00:00.
(Previous page) button:Displays the log list for the previous page.
(Next page) button:Displays the log list for the following pages.
(Last) button:Displays the last log.
[Time & data]:Displays the date and time the log was recorded.
[Duration]:Displays the length of time data was saved on the SD Memory Card.
[Event]:Displays the cause of the log.
-MN/SC: Logs by Manual Save and Schedule Save
-TRM1: Alarm caused by alarm input to terminal 1
-TRM2: Alarm caused by alarm input to terminal 2
-TRM3: Alarm caused by alarm input to terminal 3
-VMD: Alarm due to operation detection alarm
SCD: Alarm due to undesired detection alarm
-COM: Command Alarm
-AT: Alarm due to automatic tracking alarm
-INT: Intrusion alarm by AI-VMD
-LOI: Alarm on AI-VMD
2 Operation
2.7 Display the log list
76
[Note:]
・The factors displayed differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Important]
・If the SD Memory Card contains a lot of recorded data, it may take several hours
to complete deletion. In such a case, format it. However, all images are deleted by
formatting.
・During deletion, saving by alarm, manual saving, and schedule saving are not
available.
・Do not turn off the power to the computer until deletion is complete.
If the computer power is turned off during operation, data may remain on the SD
Memory Card. In this case, again on the log list screen where the deletion
operation was performed
Click the button.
[Note:]
・You can download up to 50,000 logs per SD Memory Card. If the number exceeds
50,000, it is overwritten from the old log. If the total number of log lists is large, it
may take longer to download.
-DIR: Direction alarm with AI-VMD
-CLD: Line cross alarm with AI-VMD
[SD memory card]:Displays the remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory
Card.
[Delete] button:Deletes the log list for all pages. When searched, the retrieved "b"
Deletes the list only. The image associated with the deleted log list is also deleted.
[Download] button:You can download the total number of logs in the displayed list to the
PC.
[Close] button: Closes the Log List screen.
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
Click Time in the Log List window to switch the live image page to the Playback page. The display
format varies depending on the [Recording format] of the SD Memory Card.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
77
[Important]
・The image updating speed may be slow during playback or downloading of the
image.
・If the number of images stored on the SD Memory Card is large, it may take a
long time before the images are displayed on the playback page.
・When the aspect ratio is [4:3], the image is displayed in VGA size on the
playback page regardless of the resolution of the image stored on the SD Memory
Card. When the aspect ratio is [16:9], the image is displayed in [640x360] on
playback pages regardless of the resolution of the image stored on the SD Memory
Card. Therefore, the playback page may look rough.
・During recording to the SD Memory Card, the playback updating speed may be
slow. • When playing back images recorded in H.265, the recording bit rate may
be displayed at refresh intervals if it is high.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] Multiple cameras cannot be played simultaneously except in Quad/Dual
mode. Playback depends on the camera.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
78
[Note:]
・Enter the number of the image to be displayed and press Enter on the keyboard.
The image with the specified number is displayed on the screen.
2.8.1 When playing JPEG images stored on the SD Memory Card
If the SD Memory Card contains an image associated with the date and time of clicking, the first
image is displayed.
① Number of images
The total number of images saved at the time of clicking and the number of images being
displayed are displayed.
[Fast Reverse Playback] button
Each time the button is clicked, the playback speed is switched.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
79
[Note:]
・Press and hold the button to count the number of images.
When the button is released, the countdown of the image number stops and the
image of the number when the button is released is displayed.
During high-speed reverse play Buttons, Click the button to return to the normal playback
speed.
[reverse playback] button
Play back to the previous image.
[Play] button
Play back images in sequence.
[high-speed playback] button
Each time the button is clicked, the playback speed is switched.
During high-speed playback
Buttons, Click the button to return to the normal playback speed.
[top] button
Displays the first image.
[reverse frame advance] button
Click the button during playback to display the previous image and pause it.
Click Pause to display the previous image each time you click the button.
[Pause] button
Click during playback to pause playback.
Click during pause to resume playback.
[Exit] button
Exit the playback and return to the live image page.
[frame advance] button
Click the button during playback to display the following image and pause it.
Click Pause to display the following image for each click of the button.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
80
[Note:]
・Press and hold the button to count the number of images. Releasing the button
stops counting up the image number and displays the image of the number when
the button is released.
[Note:]
・During download, the playback screen cannot be operated. Operation should be
completed after downloading.
・If [Cancel] is clicked during download, the download will be cancelled. The video
data downloaded prior to clicking [Cancel] is saved to the computer.
・Since video data is stored in about 60 MB of files, multiple files are downloaded for
data larger than 60 MB.
・H.264 movies saved on a PC can be played back using Windows Media® Player.
Provided, however, that we do not warrant the operation of these software.
・Depending on the status of the SD Memory Card or Windows Media Player,
H.264 movies may not be played.
・For H.265 video playback, our technical information website<Control No. C0303
>Please refer to.
[Important]
・Depending on your network environment, downloading of movies may fail. If
playback is in progress, it may be possible to download it by performing it again
after stopping playback.
・Depending on the network environment and the camera status, you may not be
able to perform each operation continuously on this screen.
[Last] button
Shows last image.
[download] button
The selected image is downloaded to the PC.
Check the browser settings used for the destination directory of the PC.
Click the button to display the download window. Click OK in the download window.
2.8.2 Play back the image of the stream stored on the SD Memory Card
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
81
[Note:]
・Move the slider bar to the I-picture at the position where you move it. For this
reason, if streams with [GOP control] set to [Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s
keyframe)] are recorded, the movable position will be 60 seconds apart.
①Slider bar
You can press the slider bar and play it from any position. Operation is available only before
start of playback, during pause, and after completion of playback.
[Pause] button
Click during playback to pause playback.
[Play] button
Play recorded data.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
82
[Note:]
・When audio data is recorded, the recorded data is also played, but the image and
sound are not synchronized. Therefore, there may be a slight deviation between
the image and sound. During recording to the SD Memory Card, audio playback
may be interrupted or sound quality may deteriorate.
・When playing back recorded data, the image updating speed of live movies or
playback may be slow.
・If the [Audio transmission mode] in the [Audio] tab of the video/audio pages is
[Off] or [Interactive(Half-duplex)], the recorded data will not be played.
[Note:]
・The maximum speed of high-speed playback depends on the setting of [Stream
recording]-[Max bit rate] on the SD Memory Card.
・During high-speed playback, the recorded data is not played.
・During high-speed playback, the display may be slowed or the display time may be
skipped depending on the setting of [Stream recording]-[Max bit rate].
[Note:]
・If streams with [GOP control] set to [Advanced (Fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe)]
are recorded, the playback position may be returned for more than 5 seconds
depending on the length of time the I picture is recorded.
[Note:]
・When the streams set to [Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe)] in [GOP
control] are recorded, the playback position may be returned depending on the
length of time the I picture is recorded.
[high-speed playback] button
Each time the button is clicked, the playback speed is switched.
During high-speed playback Click the button to return to the normal playback speed.
[5-second return] button
Each time the button is clicked, the returned recorded data is played back 5 seconds before.
[5-second feed] button
Each time the button is clicked, it advances to the next 5 seconds and plays back the recorded
data.
[Exit] button
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
83
[Note:]
・The content displayed on the [Event] depends on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・During download, the playback screen cannot be operated. Operation should be
completed after downloading.
・If [Cancel] is clicked during download, the download will be cancelled. The video
data downloaded prior to clicking [Cancel] is saved to the computer.
・Since video data is stored in about 60 MB of files, multiple files are downloaded for
data larger than 60 MB.
・H.264 movies saved on a PC can be played back using Windows Media® Player.
Provided, however, that we do not warrant the operation of these software.
,
Exit the playback and return to the live image page.
[Time & data]
Displays the date and time the log was recorded.
[Duration]
Displays the time when the data is saved on the SD Memory Card.
[Event]
Displays the cause of the log.
-MN/SC: logs saved manually and saved in schedule
-TRM1: Alarm due to alarm input to terminal 1
-TRM2: Alarm caused by alarm input to terminal 2
-TRM3: Alarm caused by alarm input to terminal 3
-VMD: Alarm due to operation detection alarm
SCD: Alarm due to undesired detection alarm
-COM: Command Alarm
-AT: Alarm due to automatic tracking alarm
-INT: Intrusion alarm by AI-VMD
-LOI: Alarm on AI-VMD
[download] button
The selected recorded data is downloaded to the PC.
Check the browser settings used for the destination directory of the PC.
Click the button to display the download window. Click OK in the download window.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
84
・Depending on the status of the SD Memory Card or Windows Media Player,
H.264 movies may not be played.
・For H.265 video playback, our technical information website<Control No. C0303
>Please refer to.
2 Operation
2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
85
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Important]
・Configuration panels can only be operated by users with [1. Administrator] access
levels. For details on how to set the access level, refer to the following.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
3 Setting
This chapter explains the items that can be set from the camera's live image.
You can set general items for each function in live pictures.
For items that cannot be set from live pictures, set them from the Advanced menu.
For how to display live pictures, refer to the following.
→2.3 Viewing images from a PC
For details on how to set each item from the Advanced menu, refer to the following.
→4 Advanced settings
3.1 Displaying the configuration panel from the PC
The main settings of the camera are made on the Setup panel.
3.1.1 How to display
1 Live image pages are displayed.
→2.3.1 View camera images
2 On live image pages Click the button to display the setting panel.
Press again to hide it. For more information on this panel, please refer to the following.
→3.1.3 Setting Panel Screen
3 Setting
3.1 Displaying the configuration panel from the PC
86
[Note:]
・Some items cannot be set depending on the main area display.
[Important]
・If there are several buttons in the [Set], [Register], and [Execute] pages, click
the [Set], [Register], and [Execute] buttons for each item.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
3.1.2 How to operate
1 Click on each tab in the Settings panel.
2 Enter each item on the setting page.
If the desired item is not displayed,
Click or press the scroll bar to display the items you want to
set.
3 Once the entry is complete, click to confirm the entry if [Set] is available. Otherwise, it is
confirmed when the set value is selected.
3.1.3 Setting Panel Screen
PTZ camera
3 Setting
3.1 Displaying the configuration panel from the PC
87
Multi-directional camera
① [Basic] tabs
[Basic] displays the tabs. On the [Basic] tab, you can set the camera titles and display
characters.
→3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
② [Stream] tabs
[Stream] displays the tabs. On the [Stream] tabs, you can set up imaging modes, JPEGs,
streams, etc.
→3.3 [Stream] for setting images
③ [Image quality] tabs
[Image quality] displays the tabs. In the [Image quality] tabs, you can set the image quality.
→3.4 [Image quality] for setting image quality
④ [Zoom] tabs
[Zoom] displays the tabs. On the [Zoom] tab, you can set zooming and other settings.
→3.5 [Zoom] for setting EX zoom
→1.1 [Zoom] for set zoom/focus
⑤ [Audio] tabs
[Audio] displays the tabs. The [Audio] tabs configure audio-related settings.
→3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
⑥ [Alarm] tabs
[Alarm] displays the tabs. The [Alarm] tabs configure the alarm settings.
→3.7 [Alarm] to set alarm
⑦ [Detailed setting] tabs
[Detailed setting] displays the tabs. On the [Detailed setting] tabs, you can migrate to
advanced settings and set up control panels.
3 Setting
3.1 Displaying the configuration panel from the PC
88
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Image rotation] by cameras [date and time]&Set in [Characters on
Screen].
→3.8 [Detailed setting] for switching to advanced settings and setting related to the
displayed images
3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
The [Basic] tabs set the camera titles and display settings. See the [Basic] tabs on the Advanced
Basic Page for a detailed explanation of the settings and notes for settings.
→4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
[Basic]
Set basic items such as camera title.
・
[Camera title]
Enter the name of the computer. The entered name is displayed in the camera title.
Date and time&Characters on screen
Specify the display position and size of the character string to be displayed on the screen.
・
[Camera]
Select from [Camera 1] to [Camera 4] to individually set the following items for the selected
camera.
・[Image rotation]
・[Camera title on screen display]
・[Camera title on screen(Line 1)]
・[Camera title on screen(Line 2)]
・[Camera title position]
・Date and time&In-screen text display format
・[Character size]
3 Setting
3.2 [Basic] to perform basic settings
89
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera] can be selected only for a Multi-directional camera.
・[MULTI] Only a 2-eye Multi-directional camera can be selected for [Image
rotation].
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・ [Image rotation]
ON/OFF is used to set whether to rotate the image.
・ [Camera title on screen display]
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether the strings are displayed on the images.
When set to [On], the character strings entered in [Camera title on screen] are displayed
at the position selected in [Position].
・ [Camera title on screen(Line 1)] /[Camera title on screen(Line 2)]
Enter a character string to be displayed in the image.
・ [Camera title position]
Select the position where the character string is displayed in the image.
・ [Time/date and camera title on screen - display format]
Sets the display format to either [Permeation] or [Opaque].
・ [Character size]
Select the date and time displayed in the image and the character size of the character
string.
[Installation position]
・
[Tilt adjustment lever position]
Select the [Tilt adjustment lever position] set when the cameras are installed.
3.3 [Stream] for setting images
The [Stream] tabs configure settings for JPEG, H.265, and H.264 images.
For a detailed explanation of the settings and notes for setting, refer to the [Image] tabs on the
image/audio pages in the detailed settings.
→4.6.1 [Image] to set the imaging modes
3 Setting
3.3 [Stream] for setting images
90
[Common]
Set the common items for JPEG and stream.
・
[Image capture mode]
Select the image to be displayed on the live image, etc.
・
[Initial display stream]
Select the image to be displayed on the live image page.
[Stream]
Select the number of the stream and set the [Stream transmission].
・
[Stream transmission]
On/Off sets whether to deliver H.265 (or H.264) images.
・
[Stream encoding format]
Select the compression method for the stream to be delivered.
・
[Image capture size]
Select the resolution of the H.265 (or H.264) image.
・
[Image quality]
Select the quality of the H.265 (or H.264) image.
・
[Transmission priority]
Set the stream delivery mode.
・
[Frame rate*]
Sets the frame rate.
・
[Max bit rate (per client) *]
Select the H.265 (or H.264) bit rate for one client.
・
[Auto VIQS]
Images are distributed so that the quality of images in moving places is high and the amount of
data in other places is low.
・
[Smart VIQS]
Images are distributed so that the amount of data decreases while maintaining high image
quality in areas with objects (head, people, cars and motorcycles) and low/medium/medium
image quality in other areas.
・
[Smart P-picture control]
To reduce the amount of data, control the generation of data (macroblock) as little as possible
except where there is an object (head, person, car, or motorcycle).
・
[GOP control]
The GOP control reduces the amount of data.
3 Setting
3.3 [Stream] for setting images
91
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
・[MULTI] This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in quad/dual
mode.
・[MULTI] For [Common(Cam. 1-2)], [Super Dynamic], [Light control mode],
[White balance], and [Intelligent Auto] can be set only for items that have not
been developed in detail. To perform other advanced settings, select each camera.
[JPEG]
Configure the JPEG [Image capture size] [Image quality] [Transmission interval].
・
[Image capture size]
When displaying JPEG images, select the resolution of the images to be displayed.
・
[Image quality]
Set the quality of JPEG images at each resolution.
・
[Refresh interval(JPEG)]
Select the rate at which the JPEG image is updated from the following.
3.4 [Image quality] for setting image quality
On the [Image quality] tabs, you set image quality.
For a detailed explanation of the settings and notes for setting, refer to the [Image quality] tabs on
the image/audio pages in the detailed settings.
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
[Image quality]
You can set various image quality adjustments such as brightness and sharpness level.
・
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set the image quality.
・[Common(Cam. 1-2)]: Sets the same settings for the cameras.
・[Camera 1]: Sets camera 1 image quality.
・[Camera 2]: Sets camera 2 image quality.
・[Camera 3]: Sets the image quality of camera 3.
・[Camera 4]: Sets camera 4 image quality.
・
[Brightness]
Adjust the brightness.
3 Setting
3.4 [Image quality] for setting image quality
92
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to brighten the image.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to darken the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default brightness.
・
[Sharpness level]
Adjust the sharpness level (contour correction).
Moving the slider bar in the direction of [+] results in a sharp contour, and moving the slider
bar in the direction of [-] results in a soft contour.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
・
[Maximum gain]
Adjust the maximum gain. When the subject's illumination becomes dark, the gain automatically
increases and the screen brightens.
Increasing the gain may increase the noise.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to increase the maximum gain.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to reduce the maximum gain.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
・
[Digital noise reduction]
The digital noise reduction function automatically reduces noise at low illumination levels.
Move the slider bar in the direction of [+] to increase the effect of noise reduction. There may
be a lot of afterimages.
Moving the slider bar in the direction of [-] reduces the noise reduction effect. There are fewer
aftereffects.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
・
[Super Dynamic]
On/Off is used to specify whether or not the super dynamic function can be activated.
・
[Light control mode]
Select the mode to control the light intensity.
・
[Maximum shutter]
The maximum exposure time adjusts the maximum storage time of the sensor.
・
[D&N]
Select the mode for switching between black and white images and color images.
・
[Intelligent Auto]
Set ON/OFF whether the intelligent auto function is enabled or not.
3 Setting
3.4 [Image quality] for setting image quality
93
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
3.5 [Zoom] for setting EX zoom
On the [Zoom] tab, you set the angle of view of the image displayed during zooming.
For a detailed explanation of the settings and notes for setting, refer to the [Image quality] tabs on
the image/audio pages in the detailed settings.
→4.6.4.3 Adjust the angle of view with the EX zoom
[Zoom]
Set the field of field of field.
・
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set EX zoom.
・
[Extra zoom]
X1: Zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
Adjust the zoom factor to 1.0 times in the [Wide Angle] direction.
: Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
The [Audio] tabs configure audio-related settings.
For a detailed explanation of the settings and notes for setting, refer to the [Audio] tabs on the
image/audio pages in the detailed settings.
→4.6.5 [Audio] for setting sound
[Audio]
Sets sound and volume items.
3 Setting
3.6 [Audio] for setting sound
94
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・
[Mic input volume]
Set the volume of sound input to the computer. This setting is reflected in the volume of sound
(listening) on the computer and the volume at [Audio recording].
・
[Audio transmission mode]
Set the communication mode for sending/receiving voice data between the computer and the
PC.
・
[Audio input encoding format]
Select the compression method for the earpiece sound.
・
[Audio volume control mode]
Select how to use the volume cursor of the earpiece button on the live picture page.
3.7 [Alarm] to set alarm
The [Alarm] tabs configure the alarm settings.
See the [Alarm] tabs on the alarm pages for detailed explanations of setting values and notes for
setting values.
→3.7 [Alarm] to set alarm
[Alarm]
Set terminal operation and alarm items.
・
[Terminal 1]
Set the operation of terminal 1.
・
[Terminal 2]
Set the operation of terminal 2.
・
[Terminal 3]
Set the operation of terminal 3.
・
[VMD alarm]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to perform operation detection.
When set to [On], the entire area is specified in the operation detection area. To specify an
arbitrary action detection area, set it on the [VMD area] tab of the alarm page of the advanced
3 Setting
3.7 [Alarm] to set alarm
95
setting.
→4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection
The [VMD area] tabs on the advanced alarm pages are accessible from live picture links.
・
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to perform undesired detection.
When set to [On], the entire area is specified in the disturbance detection area. To specify an
optional disturbance detection area, use the [SCD area] tabs on the alarm pages in Advanced
Settings.
→4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
The [SCD area] tabs on the advanced alarm pages are accessible from live picture links.
・
[Audio detection alarm]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to perform sound detection.
When set to [On], all AI sounds are enabled. To configure the details of sound detection, use
the [Audio detection] tabs on the alarm pages in Advanced Settings.
→4.8.9 [Audio detection] for setting sound detection
The [Audio detection] tabs on the advanced alarm pages are accessible from live picture links.
・
[Alarm deactivation time]
Sets the time when the alarm is detected and the detection operation is not executed. For
example, if you set up an e-mail notification to a mobile terminal or a tablet terminal using an
alarm, this setting prevents you from sending too much e-mail.
3.8 [Detailed setting] for switching to advanced settings and
setting related to the displayed images
Function extension software
・
[Ext. software] buttons
Displays the menu for managing the function extension software and setting the schedule.
→4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
Network
・
[Network] buttons
The Network Settings menu is displayed.
→4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
3 Setting
3.8 [Detailed setting] for switching to advanced settings and setting related to the displayed images
96
Maintenance
・
[Maintenance] buttons
This displays menus for checking the system log, software version upgrade, status check, and
initialization of the computer settings.
→4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
Camera details
・
[Advanced settings page] buttons
The Advanced menu is displayed.
→4 Advanced settings
Screen setting
・
[Color]
Select the background color of the operation panels and advanced menus from the [Light]
[Dark].
→2.3.2 About live image pages
→4 Advanced settings
・
[Operation panel layout]
Select the position of the control panel from [Right], [Left], and [Lower].
→2.3.2 About live image pages
3 Setting
3.8 [Detailed setting] for switching to advanced settings and setting related to the displayed images
97
4 Advanced settings
4.1 About network security
4.1.1 Security function of the unit
This machine is equipped with the following security functions.
① Restricting access by user/host authentication
Setting [On] in User Authentication/Host Authentication can restrict the users accessing
the cameras.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
→4.9.2 [Host auth.] to configure host-authentication
② Access restrictions due to HTTP port changes
You can prevent unauthorized access, such as port scanning, by changing the HTTP port
number.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
③ Encryption of Access by HTTPS Function
By using the HTTPS function, you can encrypt the access to the camera and increase the
security of communication.
→4.10.2.5 Set up HTTPS
④ Falsification detection
By using the falsification detection function, you can detect falsification of data recorded on
the SD card.
→4.5.3 [Alteration detection] for detecting tampering
→4.5.4 How to set up falsification detection
⑤ SRTP communication
By using SRTP communication, the streaming data of the video data is encrypted in SSL, thus
preventing peeps in the ID/PW.
→4.10.2.9 Configure SRTP
⑥ IEEE 802.1X Network Access Control
IEEE 802.1X Network Access Controls prevent unauthorized access and eavesdropping by
4 Advanced settings
4.1 About network security
98
[Important]
・Image data, authentication information (user name, password), alarm mail
information, DDNS server information, etc. may be leaked on the network. Take
measures such as restricting access by user authentication or encrypting access
by HTTPS.
・After the administrator has accessed the computer, be sure to close all browsers
to enhance security.
・Change the password of the administrator periodically to enhance security.
・When using the SNMP feature in SNMPv1/v2, do not configure community names
that you can easily guess. (e.g., public)
If you use a community name that you can guess easily, your computer's status
may be leaked on the network or used as a stepping stone for unauthorized access
to other devices.
[Note:]
・If you fail user authentication (authentication error) eight or more times in 30
seconds from a PC with the same IP address, you will not be able to access the
machine for a while.
[Important]
・Only users with [1. Administrator] access levels are allowed to access the Setup
menus. For details on how to set the access level, refer to the following.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
connecting a malicious PC to a free switching hub port in a LAN.
→4.9.4 [IEEE 802.1X] to configure IEEE 802.1X
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
The camera can be set in the Setup menu.
4.2.1 How to display
1 Live image pages are displayed.
→2.3.1 View camera images
2 Displays the setting panel.
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
99
3 Click the [Detailed setting] tabs.
4 Clicking [Advanced settings page] on the [Camera detailed setting] displays the Advanced
menu.
For more information on this menu, please refer to the following.
→4.2.3 Camera Advanced Menu Screen
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
100
[Important]
・If there are several buttons in the [Set], [Register], and [Execute] pages, click
the [Set], [Register], and [Execute] buttons for each item.
4.2.2 How to operate
①Menu button
②Configuration page
1 Click the menu button on the left side of the screen to display the setting page.
If the page consists of more than one tab, click on each tab.
2 Enter each item on the setting page.
3 Once the entry is complete, confirm the entry by clicking [Set].
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
101
<example>
When you have finished setting the items in field A, click [Set] (A-1) below field A.
If you do not press the [Set] button (A-1) at the bottom of field A, the setting will not be
confirmed.
As above, when you have finished setting the items in Box B, click [Set] (B-1) below Box B.
4.2.3 Camera Advanced Menu Screen
PTZ camera
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
102
① [Setup] buttons
Indicates the setup menu.
② [Live] buttons
Live image pages are displayed.
③ [Ext. software] buttons
You can manage the function extension software and set schedules. When the function
extension software is installed, a link to the screen is displayed.
→4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
④ [Easy Setup] buttons
Displays the easy setting page. On the easy setting page, the event operation such as
Internet disclosure setting, alarm setting and alarm linkage operation are set.
→4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
⑤ [Basic] buttons
Displays the basic page. Basic pages set basic settings such as date and time, camera title,
and information about the SD Memory Card.
→4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
⑥ [Image/Audio] buttons
Video/audio pages are displayed. Image/Audio pages configure camera settings such as
image quality and resolution for JPEG/H.265/H.264 images.
→4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
⑦ [PTZ] buttons
Displays the PTZ page. On the PTZ page, settings are made for the home position and
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
103
camera operations such as self-return.
→4.7 Set PTZ
⑧ [Alarm] buttons
Alarm page is displayed. On the alarm page, the alarm operation and operation detection area
are set, the disturbance detection area is set, the sound detection alarm is set, and the alarm
notification is set.
→4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
⑨ [User mng.] buttons
Displays the User Administration page. The User Management page is used to register
authentication and configure data encryption to restrict users and PCs accessing the computer.
→4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
⑩ [Network] buttons
Displays the network page. The network pages configure the network settings for your
computer and the settings for DDNS (Dynamic DNS), SNMP (Simple Network Management
Protocol), FTP/SFTP, NTP servers, UPnP, HTTPS, Qos, SRTP, and MQTT.
→4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
⑪ [Schedule] buttons
Schedule page is displayed. In the Schedule page, the schedule is set for operation detection
permission, disturbance detection permission, sound detection permission, etc.
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
⑫ [Maintenance] buttons
Displays the maintenance page. On the Maintenance page, you can check the system log,
upgrade the software version, check the status, and initialize the settings of the computer.
→4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
⑬ [Support] buttons
The Support page is displayed. The support pages show how to display our support websites.
→4.13 Viewing Our Support Website [Support]
⑭ [Camera title]
Displays the currently set camera title.
⑮ [Settings page]
Displays the page of each setting menu. Depending on the menu, some pages may have more
than one tab. The lower part of the setting page is omitted.
4 Advanced settings
4.2 Displaying the camera settings menu from the PC
104
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・If the imaging modes are [16:9 mode(60fps mode)]/[16:9 mode(50fps mode)]/[4:3
mode(15fps mode)]/[4:3 mode(12.5fps mode)], the function extension software
cannot be used. The operation schedule of the function extension software during
installation is also deleted.
・Depending on the type of extension software, it may be limited to up to 7.5 fps in
15 fps mode, up to 6.25 fps in 12.5 fps mode, up to 15 fps in 30 fps mode, and up
to 12.5 fps in 25 fps mode.
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced
software
The function extension software page manages the function extension software and sets the
operation schedule. The Enhanced Software page consists of the [Software mng.], [Operation
sched.], and [Control log] tabs.
4.3.1 [Software mng.] for installing, uninstalling, and upgrading function extension
software
Click on the [Software mng.] tab of the function extension software page. Please refer to the table
below for the display and operation of the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
PTZ camera
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
105
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
106
Install the function extension software
1 Save the function extension software to be installed on the PC.
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
107
[Important]
・Check the [Remaining ROM] [Remaining RAM].
If there is insufficient space required to install the function extension software,
uninstall the installed function extension software.
See [Uninstall] for uninstallation.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
[Important]
・Do not use spaces or double-byte characters in the name of the destination
directory.
・Use the specified file (ext file) for the function extension software.
・Do not turn off the camera during installation.
・Do not perform any operation during installation until the installation is completed.
・Installation of the function extension software is performed only on the selected
camera.
・[MULTI] If you switch the imaging mode to Quad/Dual mode or from Quad/Dual
mode to another mode, all the function extension software is uninstalled.
Re-install if necessary.
2 Specify the [Ext. software] by clicking [Select Files].
3 Select the camera for which you want to install the function extension software in [Camera
selection]. If Quad/Dual mode is selected, [Camera selection] items are not displayed.
4 Make sure that [Install new Ext. software] is selected and press [Execute]. [Ext. software] is
installed. When the installation is completed, the name of the function extension software
installed on the [Software mng.] window is added.
Software Management Screen
When the function extension software is installed, the camera-specific data and the registration
status of the function extension software are displayed. The following operations can be performed
on this screen.
・Uninstalling the function extension software
・Display of the detailed registration status screen
・Display of the setting screen of the function extension software
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
108
[Note:]
•Refer to the catalog specifications for the maximum number of software extensions
that can be installed.
・For the functional extension software we sell and provide, our technical
information website<Control No. C0103>Please refer to.
Model name ROM capacity RAM capacity
WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-X86530-Z2_
MULTI
WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-S85402-V2L
WV-U85402-V2L
150MB 200MB
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ、 WV-X86530-Z2_PTZ 100MB 100MB
・Update of the function extension software
Camera-specific data
[MPR ID]
This ID is required to issue the license cancellation key number of the function extension
software. The device has a unique device ID.
[Remaining ROM]
Displays the ROM capacity for the function extension software remaining in the camera. If the
function extension software to be installed requires more than the ROM capacity shown here, it
cannot be installed.
[Remaining RAM]
Displays the RAM capacity for the function extension software remaining in the camera. If the
function extension software to be installed requires more RAM capacity than shown here, it
cannot be installed.
The ROM capacity and RAM capacity depend on the model you use.
[SDK version]
This displays the version information of the SDK installed in the camera. If the function extension
software to be installed requires more than the version number displayed here, the function
extension software may not work properly.
[Firmware version]
The camera software version information is displayed.
[RAM capacity expansion mode]
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether to expand the RAM capacity.
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
109
[Note:]
・[RAM capacity expansion mode] can be selected only for models with
RAM-capacity extension.
・Refer to the catalog specifications (additional control number) for the functions
provided for each model.
・When [RAM capacity expansion mode] is set to [On], this function disables the
recording function to SD Memory Card.
・If [Remaining RAM] shows negative values, uninstall the extension or set [RAM
capacity expansion mode] to [On].
・Press [Set] to restart the computer. After restarting, the product cannot be
operated for about two minutes as it was when the power was turned on.
・Information about the extension software that requires [RAM capacity expansion
mode] to be set to [On] can be found on our website.
For use in Japan:
https://cwc.i-pro.com/pages/application-platform-list
For use outside Japan:
https://i-pro.com/global/en/surveillance/i-pro-application-platform/
application-list
[Note:]
・[MULTI] Only the Multi-directional camera displays the camera number.
Function extension software
[Function Extension Software Name]
The installed function extension software is displayed in the list. If the camera is installed
separately, it is displayed as [Name of Function Extension Software (Camera Number)].
[Uninstall] buttons
You can uninstall the installed function extension software.
[Software version]
When function extension software is installed, the version information of the installed function
extension software and the version information of the SDK incorporated in the function extension
software are displayed. If the version number of the SDK included in the camera is less than the
version number required by the function extension software, the function extension software may
not work properly.
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
110
[Note:]
・If the function extension software does not include the SDK version information,
the SDK version information is not displayed.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] Only a Multi-directional camera can be installed.
[Status]
Displays the installation status of the function extension software. When [Operable] is displayed,
it indicates that the installed function extension software is ready for operation.
[Setup] buttons
When the function extension software has its own screen, such as the setting screen, the screen
can be displayed.
Install new extended software
Select this to install the new function extension software. Select the camera to be installed and the
function extension software to be installed.
Upgrade the version
Select the function extension software that is already installed. You can upgrade the function
extension software by clicking [Execute].
AI processor deactivation license
You can install and use the application software released from other companies using the AI
processor on your computer.
4.3.2 [Operation sched.] for scheduling extended software
Click on the [Operation sched.] tab of the function extension software page. Refer to the table
below for how to display and operate the setting menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
111
Select the function extension software to set the operation schedule.
[Operating day of week]
Select [Time table 1] [Time table 2] [Off] for each day of the week.
[Time table 1] [Time table 2]
To specify the time, click [▼] to set the time. 24-hour setting is available for [00:00] to [00:00].
You can configure [On]/[Off] in [Operation content].
How to set the schedule
1 From the list of function extension software, select the software for which the operation
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
112
schedule is to be set.
2 In the [Operating day of week], select the day of the week and the timetable that you want to
schedule.
3 In [Time table 1] [Time table 2], specify the time zone to be operated.
Specify [00:00] to [00:00] for 24-hour operation.
4 When you are finished, press [Set].
4.3.3 [Control log] to check the [Control log] of the function extension software
Displays the management log for the function extension software. Refer to the table below for how
to display and operate the setting menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Up to 200 management logs can be saved in the internal memory of the computer.
If the maximum number of management logs that can be saved is exceeded, the log is overwritten
from the old log.
100 management logs are displayed and saved even if the camera is turned off.
[Next 100 items>>]
Click to display the following 100 entries in the management log list that you are viewing.
[Page number display]
The currently open page is displayed in the form [Page/Total Page].
[<<Previous 100 items]
Click to display 100 items in front of the displayed management log list.
[No]
The serial number in the control log is displayed.
[Time & date]
4 Advanced settings
4.3 [Ext. software] for managing and scheduling advanced software
113
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・Dual mode is not supported.
・For how to adjust the camera orientation and angle, refer to the "Operation
Manual Installation".
・To automatically adjust the camera, set the vertical (TILT) angle of the camera
to 80 degrees.
The date and time when the log occurred is displayed.
[Description]
The contents of the management log are displayed.
For the contents of each control log, please refer to our technical information website.<Control
number: C0317>Please refer to.
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
The following settings can be made on the easy setting page.
・Publish camera images on the Internet
・Sets event operation such as recording to SD Memory Card by schedule/alarm.
The easy configuration pages consist of the [Easy installation], [Internet], and [Event action]
tabs.
4.4.1 [Easy installation] where easy installation is performed
When the [Easy installation] tabs on the easy setting pages are clicked, the instructions for
setting the cameras are displayed.
5 Select the method in which the camera is installed.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
114
[Install on a ceiling]:
Select this when the camera is placed on the ceiling.
[Install on a wall (horizontal direction)]:
Select this when the camera is placed horizontally on the wall.
[Install on a wall (vertical direction) Install with the right pipe (Camera 1 is on the upper side)]:
Select this if the camera is installed vertically on a wall with Camera 1 facing up.
[Install on a wall (vertical direction) Install with the left pipe (Camera 2 is on the upper side)]:
Select this if the camera is installed vertically on a wall with Camera 2 facing up.
[Next]Button:
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
115
Go to the next display.
6 Check the actual display. Fine-tune the screen as required.
[Display Layout]:
The image display position can be specified.
[Left/right placement]: The screen will be left-to-right.
[Up/down placement]: The screen is positioned up and down.
Press [Execute] to refresh the window in the selected alignment.
[Switch the camera display position]:
Press [Execute] to change the displayed window.
[Image rotation]:
Rotate the displayed image.
[Zoom adjustment]:
Zoom is adjusted.
[Back]Button:
Go back to a previous screen.
[Set]Button:
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
116
[Note:]
・Automatic port forwarding may change the port number. If this is changed, the
port number of the camera registered on the PC or recorder must be changed.
・The UPnP feature can be used to connect a camera to an IPv4 network. IPv6 is
not supported.
・To verify that auto-port forwarding has been configured correctly, click on the
[Status] tab on the Maintenance page and make sure that the [UPnP] status is
[On].
→4.12.3 [Status] for checking the status
If [On] is not displayed, please read [Cannot access cameras from internet] in
"Trouble!?"
→5.2 Trouble!?
・If you change the [UPnP(Auto port forwarding)] settings, the [UPnP] on the
[Advanced] tabs of the network pages will also change.
・If the live screen or configuration screen is not displayed correctly, such as when
replacing the routers to be used, set [UPnP(Auto port forwarding)] to [Off] once
and then set it to [On] again.
Confirms made selections.
4.4.2 [Internet] to set up an Internet-based disclosure system
Click the [Internet] tab for easy setting. Refer to the table below for how to display and operate
the setting menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
This is to configure the UPnP (Automatic Port Forwarding), DDNS, and Internet Recommendation
settings that are required to publish the camera on the Internet.
[UPnP(Auto port forwarding)]
You can configure [On]/[Off] to use the router's port forwarding capability.
To use the Automatic Port Forwarding feature, the router you use must be UPnP-enabled and
UPnP enabled.
[Area]
Select the region where the camera is installed.
[Global]/[Japan]
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
117
[Note:]
・Select [Japan] when using cameras in Japan. The [Viewnetcam.com] services
displayed when [Global] is selected are not accessible from within Japan.
[Note:]
・If you change the [DDNS] settings, the [DDNS] on the [Advanced] tabs of the
network pages will also change.
[Service]
Select [Viewnetcam.com]/[Off] to use the [Viewnetcam.com] services in the DDNS. After you set
up the Net, click [Go to MIEMASUNET Registration page] to open the Register [Viewnetcam.
com] Services window in the new window. After that, proceed with the registration according to
the screen.
For more information, see [With [Viewnetcam.com] services] or the [Viewnetcam.com] website
(http://www.viewnetcam.com/).
→4.10.4.1 With [Viewnetcam.com] services
[Recommended network setting for internet]
Set the recommended settings for publishing the camera on the Internet. When [Set] is clicked,
the dialog box displays the changes in the settings for the following settings: Click OK after
checking.
PTZ camera
[Image] tabs for video and audio pages
・JPEG(1)
[Resolution]: QVGA/320 x 180
・[Stream(1)] ・ [Stream(2)] ・ [Stream(3)] ・ [Stream(4)]
[Delivery mode]: best effort delivery
[Frame rate]: 30 fps
[Max bit rate (per client) *] :1024 kbps
・[Stream(1)]
[Resolution]: 1280 x 960/1280 x 720
・[Stream(2)]
[Image capture size] :VGA/ 640x360
・[Stream(3)]
[Image capture size] :VGA/ 640x360
・[Stream(4)]
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
118
[Image capture size] :QVGA/ 320x180
[Network] tabs on network pages
・[IPv6/v4 Common]
[Maximum RTP packet size]: Limited (1280 bytes)
[HTTP max segment size(MSS)]: Limited (1280 bytes)
Multi-directional camera
[Image] tabs for video and audio pages
・[JPEG]
[Resolution]: 320 x 180 (when the imaging mode is other than Quad/Dual mode)/640 x 360
(when the imaging mode is Quad/Dual mode)
・[Stream(1)] ・ [Stream(2)]
[Delivery mode]: best effort delivery
[Max bit rate (per client) *] :1024 kbps
・[Stream(1)]
[Image capture size] :2560x1440
・[Stream(2)]
[Image capture size] :640x360
[Network] tabs on network pages
・[IPv6/v4 Common]
[Maximum RTP packet size]: Limited (1280 bytes)
[HTTP max segment size(MSS)]: Limited (1280 bytes)
4.4.3 [Event action] for setting events
Select the [Event action] tabs on the easy setting pages. Refer to the table below for how to
display and operate the setting menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the contents of the current setting are displayed.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
119
[Note:]
・[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] can be selected only for models with
FTP/SFTP features.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
Event type
setting
Select the
desired operating
conditions.
Alarm
→4.4.3.2 Alarm: Sets terminal and
operation detection (alarm setting
screen)
Schedule
→4.4.3.9 Schedule: Setting
FTP/SFTP Periodic Transmission
(FTP/SFTP Periodic Transmission
Setting Screen)
In event operation, the event operation can be set for SD schedule recording, regular transmission
of FTP/SFTP, and alarm detection. When the settings are complete, press [Next] to proceed.
The configuration flow is as follows.
Event operation flow
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
120
Terminal/operation/disturbance/
sound detection
Event operation
setting
Set the operating
conditions
selected in the
event type
setting.
FTP/SFTP
transfer
→4.4.3.4 Alarm:
Setting details of
image transfer or
recording
conditions
SD recording
→4.4.3.4 Alarm:
Setting details of
image transfer or
recording
conditions
SD recording
H.265/H.264
→4.4.3.8
Schedule: Set SD
recording (Movie
recording setting
screen)
Regular
transmission of
FTP/SFTP
→4.4.3.9
Schedule: Setting
FTP/SFTP
Periodic
Transmission
(FTP/SFTP
Periodic
Transmission
Setting Screen)
Event operation
setting
Set the operating
conditions
selected in the
event type
setting.
Image transfer
condition setting
Recording
condition setting
Recording
condition setting
Image transfer
method setting
FTP/SFTP
settings
Alarm output (terminal)
Mail setting Schedule setting
Completion Completion
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
121
[Note:]
・[MULTI] There is no FTP/SFTP function.
[Note:]
・[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] can be selected only for models with
FTP/SFTP features.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Important]
・When formatting is performed, all data stored on the SD Memory Card are deleted.
・Do not turn off the computer during formatting.
4.4.3.1 Schedule/alarm setting (event type setting screen)
Here, select the type of event.
[Trigger]
[Alarm]:Select this to set the alarm detection.
[Schedule] :[Select this when you want to [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] SD-Record.
[SD memory card format]
To format the SD Memory Card, press [Execute].
Clicking [Execute] displays the [Format] confirmation window.
Press the [OK] button to start formatting.
When the [Format] Completion window is displayed, press x.
[Next] buttons
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
122
Select [Alarm] and press [Next] to open the Alarm Settings window.
→4.4.3.2 Alarm: Sets terminal and operation detection (alarm setting screen)
Select [Schedule] and press [Next] to open the Schedule Type Settings window.
→4.4.3.7 Schedule: Set SD recording or FTP/SFTP periodic transmission (Schedule type
setting screen)
4.4.3.2 Alarm: Sets terminal and operation detection (alarm setting screen)
This section sets the operation when an alarm is detected.
Alarm
[Terminal 1]
Set the operation of terminal 1.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
123
・[Off]:Terminal function is not used.
・[Alarm input(TRM1)]:Terminal alarm input is received.
・[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected.
・[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected.
・[Close(Continue)]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [On], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
・[Open(Continue)]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Off], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
・[Black & white input]:Receives black-and-white selector input. (When the input is [On], the
input is switched to black and white)
・[Auto time adjustment]:Time setting by terminal input is accepted. When the signal is input, set
to 00 minutes 00 seconds if the time difference from the normal time (00 minutes per hour) is 29
minutes or less. In the case of returning the time less than 5 seconds during SD recording, the
time is not changed. Selecting Auto Time Adjustment displays the pull-down menu for short
circuit and release selection.
・[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], the automatic time adjustment is
performed.
・[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], the automatic time adjustment is
performed.
[Terminal 2]
Set the operation of terminal 2.
・[Off]:Terminal function is not used.
・[Alarm input (TRM2)]:The alarm input is received.
・[Short circuit]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected.
・[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected.
・[Short circuit (Continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected.
When the terminal status is [On], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm
detection time.
・[Open (continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Off], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection time.
・[Alarm Output]:Alarm outputs according to the setting in [Output terminal].
→4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
[Terminal 3]
Set the operation of terminal 3.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
124
・[Off]:Terminal function is not used.
・[Alarm input (TRM3)]:The alarm input is received.
・[Short circuit]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected.
・[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected.
・[Short circuit (Continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [On], an alarm is detected.
When the terminal status is [On], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm
detection time.
・[Open (continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Off], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Off], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection time.
・[Aux output]:AUX output is performed. The [AUX] buttons appear on the live picture pages.
[VMD alarm]
On:If the motion detection area is not set, the entire area is set. To set the operation detection
area, use the [VMD area] tab on the alarm page.
→4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
[Off]:Disables all operation detection status.
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm]
[On]:If the disturbance detection area is not set, the entire area is set. To set up the undesired
detection area, use the [SCD area] tab on the alarm page.
→4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
[Off]:Disables all disturbance detection conditions.
[Audio detection alarm]
[On]:Use the sound detection alarm. All AI sounds are recognized.
→4.8.9 [Audio detection] for setting sound detection
[Off]:Sound detection alarm is not used.
[Alarm deactivation time]
Sets the time when the alarm is detected and the detection operation is not executed. For
example, if you set up an e-mail notification to a mobile terminal or a tablet terminal using an
alarm, this setting prevents you from sending too much e-mail.
5-[600 seconds]
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
125
[Note:]
・Alarm detection time is managed for each alarm type. For example, the operation
detection alarm is detected even when the alarm of terminal alarm 1 is not
detected.
Alarm linkage operation
[Terminal alarm 1]
Select the action to be interlocked when terminal alarm 1 is detected from the following. This can
be set when [Terminal 1] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM1)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 1 is detected.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, the watch moves to the preset
position when terminal alarm 1 is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When terminal alarm 1 is detected, patrol starts.
*When Patrol 1 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Terminal alarm 2]
Select the action to be interlocked when terminal alarm 2 is detected from the following. This can
be set when [Terminal 2] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM2)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 2 is detected.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, it moves to the position when
terminal alarm 2 is detected.
[Patrol 2]:When terminal alarm 2 is detected, patrol starts.
*When Patrol 2 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Terminal alarm 3]
Select the action to interlock when terminal alarm 3 is detected from the following. This can be set
when [Terminal 3] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM3)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 3 is detected.
1～256:Select the preset position registered beforehand to move to the position when terminal
alarm 3 is detected.
[Patrol 3]:When terminal alarm 3 is detected, patrol starts.
*When Patrol 3 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[VMD alarm]
Select the action to be linked to the alarm detected by the motion detector from the following.
[Off]:When an alarm is detected by the motion detector, interlock operation is not performed.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
126
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
1～256:Selecting the preset position registered beforehand moves the watch to the position when
an alarm is detected by the motion detector.
[Patrol 1]:When an alarm is detected by the motion detector, a patrol is started.
*When Patrol 1 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Audio detection alarm]
Select the action to be linked to the alarm detected by the sound detection from the following.
[Off]:The product does not perform interlocked operation even if an alarm is detected by sound
detection.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, the watch moves to the preset
position when an alarm is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When an alarm is detected by sound detection, patrol is started.
*When Patrol 1 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Next] buttons
Click the [Next] button to open the Alarm type setting window.
→4.4.3.1 Schedule/alarm setting (event type setting screen)
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.3 Alarm: Sets operation condition (Alarm type setting screen)
Here, the operation to be performed when the alarm is detected is set.
[Trigger]
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
127
[Note:]
・[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] can be selected only for models with
FTP/SFTP features.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[FTP/SFTP] and [[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission]] can be operated at
the same time when an alarm is generated.
・When [FTP/SFTP Transfer] and [[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission]] are
set simultaneously when an alarm is generated, [FTP/SFTP Transfer] when an
alarm is generated takes precedence.
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
・The alarm alarm is not recorded on the SD memory card.
[FTP/SFTP Transfer]:FTP/SFTP transfers JPEG images when an alarm is generated.
[SD memory recording]:Record to SD Memory Card when an alarm is generated.
[Recording format]
When [SD memory recording] is selected in [Trigger], select the compression method for the
images to be recorded from the JPEG/stream.
[Next] buttons
Select [FTP/SFTP Transfer] in [Trigger] and press [Next] to open the FTP/SFTP Transfer
Settings window.
Select [SD memory recording] in [Trigger] and JPEG in [Recording format] and press [Next] to
open the JPEG Record Setting window.
Select "[SD memory recording]" in "[Trigger]" and "[Recording format]" in "Streams" and press
"[Next]" to open the Movie Record Setting window.
→4.4.3.4 Alarm: Setting details of image transfer or recording conditions
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.4 Alarm: Setting details of image transfer or recording conditions
Setting FTP/SFTP transfer (FTP/SFTP transfer setting screen)
In this case, FTP/SFTP transfer when alarm is detected is set.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
128
For details on how to set up the above screen, refer to the following.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
129
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
→4.10.2.2 Configuring FTP/SFTP transmission function
[Next] buttons
Select [Alarm output] in the Alarm Settings window and press [Next] to open the Alarm Outputs
dialog box.
→4.4.3.5 Alarm: Sets output terminal.
If you do not select [Alarm output] on the Alarm Settings screen and [Next] is clicked, the Mail
Settings screen is displayed.
→4.4.3.6 Alarm: Configuring mail notification and mail server
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
Setting SD recording (JPEG recording setting screen)
The SD recording (JPEG) for alarm detection is set here.
See the [JPEG recording(Alarm)] below for instructions on how to set up the window above.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
[Next] buttons
Select [Alarm output] in the Alarm Settings window and press [Next] to open the Alarm Outputs
dialog box.
→4.4.3.5 Alarm: Sets output terminal.
If you do not select [Alarm output] on the Alarm Settings screen and [Next] is clicked, the Mail
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
130
[Note:]
・If the audio distribution mode is set to bi-directional (half duplex), the settings
cannot be made.
[Note:]
・Refer to the [Frame rate*] below for the frame rate you can set and the bit rate
that depends on the frame rate.
→4.4.3.8 Schedule: Set SD recording (Movie recording setting screen)
Settings screen is displayed.
→4.4.3.6 Alarm: Configuring mail notification and mail server
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
Set SD recording (H.265 or H.264) (Movie recording setting screen)
Here, SD recording (H.265 or H.264) at alarm detection is set.
[Audio recording]
Select whether or not to record audio data with [On] or [Off].
[On]:Audio data is saved in the movie (MP4 format).
[Off]:Audio data is not saved in movies (MP4 format).
Frame Rate
Set the frame rate of H.265 (or H.264) to be recorded.
[Pre alarm (recording) duration]
Select whether to record before alarm. Sets the time to save to the SD Memory Card.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
131
[Note:]
・The values that can be set depend on the resolution and bit rate of the stream to
be recorded. The higher the bit rate, the smaller the maximum value that can be
set as the pre-alarm time.
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Off]/ [1s]/ [2s]/ [3s]/ [4s]/ [5s]/ [8s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [25s]/ [30s]/ [40s]/ [50s]/ [60s]/
[90s]/ [120s]
[Post alarm (recording) duration]
Sets the time to save to the SD Memory Card after an alarm is generated.
[10s]/ [20s]/ [30s]/ [40s]/ [50s]/ [60s]/ [120s]/ [180s]/ [240s]/ [300s]
[Next] buttons
Select [Alarm output] in the Alarm Settings window and press [Next] to open the Alarm Outputs
dialog box.
→4.4.3.5 Alarm: Sets output terminal.
If you do not select [Alarm output] on the Alarm Settings screen and [Next] is clicked, the Mail
Settings screen is displayed.
→4.4.3.6 Alarm: Configuring mail notification and mail server
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.5 Alarm: Sets output terminal.
The alarm output is set here. This message is displayed when [Alarm output] is selected in the
alarm setting window.
To set the output terminal:
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
132
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
For details of the settings on the screen above, refer to the following.
→4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
[Next] buttons
Click the [Next] button to display the mail setting screen.
→4.4.3.6 Alarm: Configuring mail notification and mail server
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.6 Alarm: Configuring mail notification and mail server
Here, the settings for mail are made.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
133
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
134
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
For details on how to set up the above screen, refer to the following.
→4.10.2.1 Set mail sending
[Set] buttons
Clicking [Set] completes the setting.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.7 Schedule: Set SD recording or FTP/SFTP periodic transmission (Schedule type
setting screen)
Here you set the scheduling type to [SD memory recording] or [FTP/SFTP periodic image
transmission].
[Trigger]
[SD memory recording]:Record H.265 (or H.264) images on the SD Memory Card at the
scheduled time.
[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission]:The JPEG image is sent to the FTP/SFTP server at the
scheduled time.
[Recording format]
When [SD memory recording] is selected in [Trigger], select the streams to be recorded.
[Next] buttons
Select [SD memory recording] and press [Next] to open the Movie Record Setting window.
→4.4.3.8 Schedule: Set SD recording (Movie recording setting screen)
Select [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] and press [Next] to open the FTP/SFTP Periodic
Transmission Settings window.
→4.4.3.9 Schedule: Setting FTP/SFTP Periodic Transmission (FTP/SFTP Periodic
Transmission Setting Screen)
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
135
[Note:]
・The [Trigger] [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] can be selected only for
models with FTP/SFTP features.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・Both [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] and [FTP/SFTP] can be operated
simultaneously when an alarm is generated.
・Selecting [SD memory recording] cancels the [FTP/SFTP periodic image
transmission] setting.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.8 Schedule: Set SD recording (Movie recording setting screen)
Here, the schedule SD recording (H.265 or H.264) is set.
When the [Next] button is clicked after recording or setting the frame rate on the movie recording
setting screen, the schedule setting screen is displayed and you can set the schedule.
1 The recording, frame rate, and SD Memory Card are overwritten on the movie recording
setting screen.
[Audio recording]
You set whether to record audio data.
[On]:Audio data is saved in the movie (MP4 format).
[Off]:Audio data is not saved in movies (MP4 format).
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
136
[Note:]
・If the audio distribution mode is set to bi-directional (half duplex), the settings
cannot be made.
[Important]
・When [Overwrite] is switched from [Off] to [On], the old images may be deleted
to prepare for writing if there is not enough space on the SD Memory Card.
[Note:]
・When [Next] is clicked, [Transmission priority] is set to [Frame rate].
[Important]
・When [Overwrite] is switched from [Off] to [On], the old images may be deleted
to prepare for writing if there is not enough space on the SD Memory Card.
[Frame rate*]
Set the frame rate of H.265 (or H.264) to be recorded from the following.
–If [Image capture mode] is set to 30 fps:
1fps/ 3fps/ 5fps*/ 7.5fps*/ 10fps*/ 12fps*/ 15fps*/ 20fps*/ 30fps*
–If [Image capture mode] is set to 25fps:
1fps/ 3.1fps/ 4.2fps*/ 6.25fps*/ 8.3fps*/ 12.5fps*/ 20fps*/ 25fps*
–If [Image capture mode] is set to 15 fps:
1fps/ 3fps/ 5fps*/ 7.5fps*/ 10fps*/ 12fps*/ 15fps*
–If [Image capture mode] is set to 12.5 fps:
1fps/ 3.1fps/ 4.2fps*/ 6.25fps*/ 8.3fps*/ 12.5fps*
The bit rate is automatically set according to the selected resolution and frame rate. Check the
[Bit Rate* per Client] settings for each stream.
[Overwrite]
You set whether to overwrite and save images when the free space on the SD Memory Card is
running low.
[On]:If the free space on the SD Memory Card decreases, the old image is overwritten and saved
repeatedly.
[Off]:If the SD Memory Card has no free space, the SD Memory Card stops storing data.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
137
[Next] buttons
Clicking [Next] displays the window for setting the recording schedule to the SD Memory Card.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
2 Set schedule on the Schedule Setting screen.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
138
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
139
[Note:]
・If [SD memory recording] is not selected in [Operation mode], no recording is
performed.
[Note:]
・Only models with FTP/SFTP functions can be set.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
For details on how to set up the above screen, refer to the following.
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
[Set] buttons
Clicking [Set] completes the setting.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.4.3.9 Schedule: Setting FTP/SFTP Periodic Transmission (FTP/SFTP Periodic
Transmission Setting Screen)
Here, the FTP/SFTP periodic transmission is set.
When [Next] is clicked after periodic transmission and setting of servers on the periodic
transmission setting screen, the periodic transmission schedule setting screen is displayed and the
schedule for periodic transmission can be set.
1 Settings for periodic transmission are made on the Periodic Transmission Setting screen.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
140
For details of the settings on the screen above, refer to the following.
→4.10.2.2 Configuring FTP/SFTP transmission function
[Set] buttons
Displayed when [FTP periodic image transmission] is [Off]. Clicking [Set] saves the settings.
[Next] buttons
Displayed when [FTP periodic image transmission] is [On]. Clicking [Next] displays the window for
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
141
[Note:]
・Clicking [Next] saves the settings in the window.
setting FTP/SFTP scheduled periodic transmissions.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
2 Set the schedule for periodic transmission on the Schedule Setting screen.
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
142
4 Advanced settings
4.4 [Easy Setup] to use easy setting
143
[Note:]
・If [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission] is not selected in [Operation mode],
no FTP/SFTP periodic transmission is performed.
[Note:]
・The layout of each setting item varies depending on the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
For details on how to set up the above screen, refer to the following.
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
[Set] buttons
Clicking [Set] completes the setting.
[Back] button
Returns to the previous screen.
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
Basic pages set the camera title, date and time, SD Memory Card, and overlay. The basic pages
consist of the [Basic], [SD memory card], and [Overlay image] tabs.
4.5.1 [Basic] to perform basic settings
On the Basic Page, press the [Basic] tab. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
The camera title, date, and time are set here.
[Menu language]
Select the first language that appears when you access the camera from the list below.
[Auto]/[English]/[Japanese]/[Italian]/[French]/[German]/[Spanish]/[Chinese]/[Russian]/
[Portuguese]
[Auto]:The language used by the browser is automatically selected. If the machine does not
support the language, the English language is selected.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
144
[Important]
・If you need to set the time more accurately in system operation, use the NTP
server.
→4.10.2.3 Set up an NTP server
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Date/time display] can be set individually by the cameras.
[Camera title]
Enter the name of the computer. After input, press [Set] to display the entered name in the
camera title.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 20 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Half-pitch symbol " &
[Date/time]
Enter the current date and time. If you selected [12h] in [Time display format], select [AM] or
[PM].
When [Set PC time to the camera] is checked and [Set] is clicked, the date and time of the
computer are obtained and set to the computer.
Settable range:Jan/01/2013 00:00:00～Dec/31/2035 23:59:59
[Date/time display]
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether the date and time are displayed on the images. When the date
and time are not displayed, set it to [Off].
[Time display format]
Select the time display method from 24h/12h. Enter the [Date/time] according to this setting.
[Date/time display format]
Select the date display format. If [Date/time] is set to [13:10:00 on April 1, 2022], the display
formats are as follows.
DD/MM/YYYY: 01/04/2022 13:10:00
MM/DD/YYYY: 04/01/2022 13:10:00
DD/Mmm/YYYY: 01/Apr/2022 13:10:00
YYYY/MM/DD: 2022/04/01 13:10:00
Mmm/DD/YYYY: Apr/01/2022 13:10:00
[Date/time position]
Select the position where the date and time are displayed on the image.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
145
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Date/time position] can be set individually by the cameras.
[Upper left]: Displayed in the upper left corner of the window.
[Lower left]: Displayed in the lower left corner of the window.
[Upper center]: Displayed in the center of the window.
[Lower center]: Displayed at the bottom center of the window.
[Upper right] is displayed in the upper right corner of the window.
[Lower right]: Displayed in the lower right corner of the window.
[NTP]
Clicking [NTP >>] displays the [Advanced] tabs for the network pages.
→4.10.2.3 Set up an NTP server
[Time zone]
Select the time zone for the camera area.
[Summer time(daylight saving)]
Use [In], [Out] and [Auto] to specify whether to use Daylight Saving Time. Set in the region where
Daylight Saving Time is used.
[In]:Set the time to Daylight Saving Time. [*] is displayed in the time display.
[Out]:Reset Daylight Saving Time.
[Auto]:Switches to Daylight Saving Time according to the start date and time and end date
settings (month, week, day of week, time).
[Start time & date] [End time & date]
When [Auto] is selected in [Summer time(daylight saving)] Setting, the start date and time of
Daylight Saving Time and the end date and time of Daylight Saving Time are set in Month, Week,
Day of Week, and Time.
[Display on screen]
To make individual settings, select the camera and set the settings.
Select the camera to set the following items individually for each camera.
[Date/time display]
[Date/time position]
[Camera title on screen display]
[Camera title position]
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
146
[Note:]
・[MULTI] When the image capture mode is Quad/Dual mode, Camera 1 is
automatically selected and other cameras cannot be selected.
・[MULTI] Select Camera 1 in [Display on screen] and select [Reflect all settings
for Camera 1] to set the settings you changed for Camera 1 to all other cameras.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera title on screen display] can be set individually by the cameras.
[Note:]
・Up to two lines of [Camera title on screen] can be set.
・[MULTI] [Camera title on screen] can be set individually by the cameras.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera title position] can be set by cameras.
[Camera title on screen display]
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether the strings are displayed on the images.
When set to [On], the character strings entered in [Camera title on screen] are displayed at the
position selected in [Position].
[Camera title on screen]
Enter a character string to be displayed in the image.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 40 characters
Input Characters:One-byte (0-9, A-Z, a-z), two-byte (kanji, hiragana, katakana, alphanumeric),
one-byte and two-byte symbols ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Camera title position]
Select the position where the character string is displayed in the image.
[Upper left]:Displays in the upper left corner of the screen.
[Lower left]:Displays in the lower left corner of the screen.
[Upper center]:Displayed in the center of the screen.
[Lower center]:Displays at the bottom center of the screen.
[Upper right]:Displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.
[Lower right]:Displays in the lower right corner of the screen.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
147
[Important]
・If the [Date/time position] and [Camera title position] settings are different, the
frame rate may be lower than the set value.
・If the [Date/time position] and [Camera title position] settings are different, the
characters may run out or overlap depending on the [Character size] setting and
the number of characters. Confirm the display results before use.
・If [Character size] is set to [150%] or [200%], the frame rate may be lower than
the set value.
・Depending on the [Character size] setting and the number of characters or the
resolution of the images, it may be displayed only halfway or difficult to read.
Confirm the display results before use.
[Note:]
・Even if 50% and 75% are set, the images of 640 x 360, VGA, 320 x 180, and
QVGA show 100% [Camera title on screen].
・If [Detailed setting] [Overlay] is set to [On], the date and time&Characters on
the Screen: You cannot set [150%] or [200%] in [Character size].
[Note:]
・The brightness display in the image is displayed when the brightness is adjusted
on the system device.
Date and time&In-Screen Characters > [Display type]
Sets the display format to either [Permeation] or [Opaque].
[Permeation]:Displays the date and time and characters on the screen in transparent characters.
[Opaque]:Displays date and time and on-screen characters in opaque (black-coated) characters.
Date and time&In-Screen Characters > [Character size]
Select the date and time displayed in the image and the character size of the character string.
50%:The standard 50% size is displayed.
75%:Displays the standard 75% size.
100%:Displays the standard size.
150%:This is displayed as 150% of the standard size.
200%:Displayed as 200% of standard size.
[Brightness status display]
ON/OFF is used to set whether the brightness status is displayed when adjusting the brightness.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
148
[Important]
・When set to [On], the field angle is narrowed. When set to [On], check the field
angle when mounting the camera.
・Picture correction does not work in the following cases.
Pan and tilt zoom are executing.
During position refresh
・In the following cases, it may not be possible to obtain sufficient shaking
compensation depending on the shooting conditions.
When the subject is dark
-Rapid oscillation, such as mechanical vibration
Large-amplitude shaking
-Image quality/position setting in progress
・If the [Stabilizer] setting is changed with the following area set, the set area will
be misaligned. Set [Stabilizer] and then set the respective areas.
Mask area
-Privacy Zone
-Operation detection area
VIQS area
[Note:]
・When shaking occurs in a dark shooting environment, the shaking correction
effect may be improved by setting the maximum exposure time to [1/100s] or
faster shutter setting. Set the maximum exposure time depending on the
installation environment.
・When [Stabilizer] is set to [On], the superdynamic setting is [Off].
[Stabilizer]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not the camera's shaking correction function is enabled.
The gyroscope sensor can be used to compensate for low-frequency vibrations such as pole
vibrations caused by wind and fine vibrations at high magnification, thereby shooting images with
less blurring.
Use this function only when the camera is installed in an environment in which the camera
frequently swings. It is effective to reduce the vibration.
Check the operation during installation.
Do not use the shaking correction function when using the product in an environment where there
is no shaking.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
149
・When [Stabilizer] is set to [On], the digital zoom factor is limited to half.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the lamps installed in each model.
・[MULTI_PTZ] [Indicator] can be set from the PTZ-camera.
[Note:]
・When [Audio out] is set to [Audio], [Monitor out] cannot be selected.
・If you set [Audio transmission mode] to other than [Off] or [Mic input], you
cannot set [Audio out] to [Monitor].
・If you set [Audio out] to [Monitor], you cannot set [Audio transmission mode] to
anything other than [Off] or [Mic input].
[Note:]
・The [Monitor out] setting can be changed when the imaging mode is 30 fps, 60
fps, or 15 fps.
・The output image may be reversed up or down.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] The [Tilt adjustment lever position] can only be selected for the
Multi-directional camera settings.
[Indicator]
Select the ON/OFF status of the lamp. To check the operation status with the lamps, select
[On].
[Audio out]
Sets whether to use the audio output terminal as the adjustment monitor output.
Audio/monitor
[Monitor out]
Set the image format to be output from the image output terminal (MONITOR OUT).
NTSC/PAL
[Tilt adjustment lever position]
Set the [Tilt adjustment lever position] set when the camera is installed.
[High]/ [Mid]/ [Low]
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
150
[Note:]
・If [Image capture mode] is set to [16:9 Mode (60fps Mode)] or [16:9 mode(50fps
mode)], the SD Memory Card functions are not available. [SD memory card] is set
to [Not use].
[Note:]
・For the functional extension software we sell and provide, our technical
information website<Control No. C0103>Please refer to.
・It is recommended to format the SD Memory Card when setting the function
extension software mode from [On] to [Off].
・The operation of the recording function to the SD Memory Card cannot be
guaranteed when the extended software using the SD Memory Card is operated.
[Note:]
・If you use [Audio recording], you must set [Recording format] to streams.
4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
On the Basic Page, press the [SD memory card] tab. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, settings for the SD Memory Card are made.
Operation mode
[SD memory card]
You set whether to use the SD Memory Card or not.
[Ext. software mode]
This setting is set to [On] when the installed function extension software uses the SD Memory
Card of the computer.
[On]:The function extension software can use the SD Memory Card of the computer.
[Off]:The function extension software cannot use the SD Memory Card of the computer.
[Audio recording]
You can set whether to record audio data when storing movies in MP4 format.
[Off]:Audio data is not saved in movies (MP4 format).
[On]:Audio data is saved in the movie (MP4 format).
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
151
[Note:]
・Remaining capacity notification is made for each remaining capacity value below
the set value.
For example, when set to [50%], the remaining capacity is 50%, 20%, 10%, 5%, and
2%, respectively. The timing of notification may deviate slightly.
[Important]
・If you do not want to use the SD Memory Card, set it to [Not use].
・Before removing the SD Memory Card from the computer, be sure to set it to
[Not use]. If the SD Memory Card is set to [Use], the SD Memory Card may be
damaged.
・When the SD Memory Card is set to [Use], the SD Memory Card is saved
according to the [Save trigger] setting.
・After installing the SD Memory Card, set it to [Use].
・If the image update speed is high, the timing and interval of notification and
recording may be misaligned. In addition, when multiple users receive images,
notification or recording may not be performed as set. In that case, slow down the
image update rate.
・The number of SD Memory Card rewrites is limited. If rewriting is frequent, the
life of the watch may be shortened.
・The life of the SD Memory Card is affected by the number of image files saved to
the SD Memory Card and the number of logs written.
・You can reduce the number of files saved to the SD Memory Card by selecting
the stream in [Recording format] and setting the smaller value in [Bit Rate*/
[Remaining capacity notification]
To notify the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card using the mail notification function or the
unique alarm notification function, select the following whether to start notification when the free
space becomes the %.
50%/ 20%/ 10%/ 5%/ 2%
[Overwrite]
You set whether to overwrite and save images when the free space on the SD Memory Card is
running low.
[On]:If the free space on the SD Memory Card decreases, the old image is overwritten and saved
repeatedly.
[Off]:If the SD Memory Card has no free space, the SD Memory Card stops storing data.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
152
Client] of the stream to be recorded.
・If the SD Memory Card is written more frequently and the writing speed
decreases, it is recommended to replace the new SD Memory Card.
・When switching from [Off] to [On], when the free space on the SD Memory Card
is small, old images may be deleted to prepare for writing.
SD Memory Card security setting
[Additional info for detecting alteration]
Set whether to add information to enable detection when data on the SD Memory Card is falsified.
Falsification detection supports only video (MP4 format) and can be checked using dedicated
software.
Our Technical Information Website provides specific software for tampering detection and how to
use it.<Control No. C0304>Please refer to.
To Advanced Settings>>Click the [button] to display the setting window for adding falsification
detection information in a separate window.
→4.5.3 [Alteration detection] for detecting tampering
[SD memory card password lock]
Set the password on the SD Memory Card. When you set the password, you cannot write to or
read from the SD Memory Card on any device other than this unit. If the SD Memory Card is
stolen or lost, the risk of leakage of the recorded data can be reduced.
[Set]
If an SD Memory Card with no password set is inserted, the password can be set using the Set
button.
[Password]/[Retype password]
Type a password.
Number of characters that can be entered:4 to 16 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Reset]
If an SD Memory Card with the password set has been inserted, the password can be canceled by
pressing the release button.
[Password]
Type a password.
Number of characters that can be entered:4 to 16 characters
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
153
[Note:]
・The password lock function supports SDHC memory card or SDXC memory card
only.
・When using an SD Memory Card with Password lock set on a device other than
this device, release the password by pressing the Password lock release button,
and then remove the SD Memory Card from the card. You cannot cancel the
password on any device other than the camera, such as a PC.
・If the [SD memory card password lock] [Status] is [Lock] and the SD Memory
Card with no password setting is inserted into the computer, the password is
automatically set to the SD Memory Card.
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Change]
If an SD Memory Card with the password already set is inserted, the password can be changed by
using the Change button.
[Old password]/[New password]/[Retype new password]
Type a password.
Number of characters that can be entered:4 to 16 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Status]
Displays the password lock setting status.
[During locking]:The SD Memory Card has a password and the lock function is enabled.
[Not set]:Lock function is disabled
The password setting status of the SD Memory Card is displayed.
[Password already set]:The password is set correctly.
[Error (unsupported SD memory card)]:Password lock not supported card is inserted. Check that
the SDHC Memory Card or SDXC Memory Card is inserted.
[Error (password mismatch)]:The SD Memory Card cannot be used because the password set on
the SD Memory Card and the password set on this computer do not match. Confirm the password
is correct.
[Errors (other errors)]:This message is displayed when an error occurs in the SD Memory Card.
Check the SD Memory Card.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
154
[Important]
・If you forget the set password, you cannot cancel the password. Since the SD
Memory Card with the password set cannot be used, be sure to manage it carefully.
・If you forget the set password and want to replace it with a new SD Memory Card,
set the [SD memory card password lock] [Status] to [Not been set] in advance by
following one of the steps below.
Enter the password using the release button and press the set button.
-Initialize the set value from the maintenance page.
[Important]
・Use an UHS-I (Ultra High Speed-I)-compatible card for the Speed Class 10 SD
Memory Card.
・It is recommended to use the microSD memory card dedicated to i-PRO devices.
・When using SD Memory Cards other than those compatible with Speed Class 10,
the bit rate of streams selected with [Recording format] should be 6144 kbps.
・When using SD Memory Cards compatible with Speed Class 10, the bit rate of
streams selected by [Recording format] should be up to 12288 kbps.
・[MULTI] The SD Memory Card cannot be used except for the Speed Class 10.
・[MULTI] The bit rate of the streams selected in [Recording format] should be up
to 4096 kbps.
Recording stream
[Recording format]
Select the type of image data to be saved on the SD Memory Card.
[Off]:Image data is not saved.
JPEG(1):Still image (JPEG(1)) is saved. Save the data according to the [JPEG(1)] resolution in the
[Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
JPEG(2):Still image (JPEG(2)) is saved. Save the data according to the [JPEG(2)] resolution in the
[Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
[Stream(1)]:Save the movie (stream (1)) in MP4 format. Save your data according to the
[Stream(1)] settings on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
[Stream(2)]:Save the movie (stream (2)) in MP4 format. Save your data according to the
[Stream(2)] settings on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
[Stream(3)]:Save the movie (stream (3)) in MP4 format. Save your data according to the
[Stream(3)] settings on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
[Stream(4)]:Save the movie (stream (4)) in MP4 format. Save your data according to the
[Stream(4)] settings on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
155
[Note:]
・When [Stream] is selected, the [Stream] settings in the [Image] tabs of the video
and audio pages are [Streams].&This switches to the [Record movie] setting.
・When [Recording format] is changed to [Stream], the following functions may be
corrected.
-If [Transmission priority] is set to [Best effort], it is set to [Frame rate].
If-[Refresh interval] is set to [2s], [3s], [4s], or [5s], then it is set to [1s].
・[Recording format] cannot be changed to [JPEG] if [On] is set to [Additional info
for detecting alteration].
・If [Recording format] is [Stream], the file to be saved is named automatically.
・If [Recording format] is [Stream], there may be fewer users that can be connected.
・If you configure [On] for [Audio recording], the maximum bit rate that can be
configured for streams is limited.
・If you configure [On] for [Additional info for detecting alteration], the maximum
bit rate that can be configured for streams is limited.
・[MULTI] If [Stream] is selected in [Recording format], the bit rate is restricted.
[Save trigger]
Select the method below to save images on the SD Memory Card.
[FTP/SFTP periodic transmission error]:FTP/Save the image when periodic transmission to the
SFTP server fails.
This option is available only when [JPEG] is selected in [Recording format].
[Alarm input]:Saves the image when an alarm is generated.
[Manual]:Save the image manually.
[Schedule]:Save the image according to the schedule settings. This option is available only when
[Stream] is selected in [Recording format].
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
When [Alarm input] is selected in [Save trigger], the alarm type can be selected from the following.
Terminal 1:The image is saved when an alarm is generated at terminal 1.
Terminal 2:Image is saved when alarm is generated at terminal 2.
[Terminal 3]The image is saved when an alarm is generated at terminal 3.
[VMD]:Image is saved when operation detection occurs.
[SCD]:The image is saved when undesired detection occurs.
[Auto track]:Save the image when auto tracking occurs.
[Command alarm]:Saves the image when a command alarm is entered.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
156
[Note:]
・If [Recording format] is streamed, [FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission error]
cannot be set.
・To generate an alarm, use the [Alarm] tabs to set the alarm.
・If [Recording format] is [JPEG], [Schedule] cannot be set.
・When connected to our network disk recorder, [Save trigger] may be grayed out
by [Network failure]. To change the [Save trigger] setting after you disconnect
the recorder, set [SD memory card] to [Not use] and then set [Use] again.
・If [GOP control] is set to Advanced (Fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe), alarm
recording cannot be set.
・Images are not recorded when sound detection alarm is generated.
JPEG manual storage recording
This setting is available only when [Recording format] is set to [JPEG(1)] or [JPEG(2)] and [Save
trigger] is set to [Manual].
[File name]
Enter the file name for saving images to the SD Memory Card. The following file names are
actually saved.
File name:File name entered + Date and time (year, month, day, minute, second) + Sequence
number
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 8 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & * / : ; < > ? ￥ ¦
[Image saving interval]
If [Save trigger] is set to [Manual], select the interval to save images to the SD Memory Card from
the following.
When [Image capture mode] is set to 30 fps/15 fps: 0.1 fps/0.2 fps/0.33 fps/0.5 fps/1 fps
When [Image capture mode] is set to 25 fps/12.5 fps: 0.08 fps/0.17 fps/0.28 fps/0.42 fps/1 fps
JPEG recording (when alarm occurs)
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
157
This setting is available only when [Recording format] is set to [JPEG(1)] or [JPEG(2)] and [Save
trigger] is set to [Alarm input].
[File name]
Enter the file name for saving images to the SD Memory Card. The following file names are
actually saved.
File name:File name entered + Date and time (year, month, day, minute, second) + Sequence
number
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 8 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & * / : ; < > ? ￥ ¦
[Storage interval/number of images (pre-alarm)] [Image saving interval]
When [Save trigger] is set to [Alarm input], select the pre-alarm image interval to save the image
to the SD Memory Card.
When [Image capture mode] is set to 30 fps/15 fps: 0.1 fps/0.2 fps/0.33 fps/0.5 fps/1 fps
When [Image capture mode] is set to 25 fps/12.5 fps: 0.08 fps/0.17 fps/0.28 fps/0.42 fps/1 fps
[Storage interval/number of images (pre-alarm)] [Number of images to be saved]
Select the number of pre-alarm images to be saved to the SD Memory Card when an alarm is
generated.
[Off]/[1 pic]/[2 pics]/[3 pics]/[4 pics]/[5 pics]
[Storage interval/number of images (Post alarm)] [Image saving interval]
If [Save trigger] is set to [Alarm input] or [Manual], select the intervals below to save images to
the SD Memory Card.
When [Image capture mode] is set to 30 fps/15 fps: 0.1 fps/0.2 fps/0.33 fps/0.5 fps/1 fps
When [Image capture mode] is set to 25 fps/12.5 fps: 0.08 fps/0.17 fps/0.28 fps/0.42 fps/1 fps
[Storage interval/number of images (Post alarm)] [Number of images to be saved]
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
158
[Note:]
・The values that can be set depend on the resolution and bit rate of the stream to
be recorded. The higher the bit rate, the smaller the maximum value that can be
set as the pre-alarm time.
Within the display Description
‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑MB/‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑MB SD Memory Card is not inserted.
Otherwise, the remaining capacity cannot be acquired due to a
read error.
********MB/********MB SD Memory Card is not formatted.
########MB/########MB The password lock of the SD Memory Card cannot be canceled.
Select the number of alarm images to be saved to the SD Memory Card when an alarm is generated
from the following list.
[10 pics]/[20 pics]/[30 pics]/[50 pics]/[100 pics]/[200 pics]/[300 pics]/[500 pics]/[1000
pics]/[2000 pics]/[3000 pics]
Movie recording (when alarm is generated)
This setting is available only when the [Recording format] of the SD Memory Card is set to
streaming and [Save trigger] is set to [Alarm input].
[Pre alarm (recording) duration]
Select whether to record before alarm. Sets the time to save to the SD Memory Card.
[Off]/ [1s]/ [2s]/ [3s]/ [4s]/ [5s]/ [8s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [25s]/ [30s]/ [40s]/ [50s]/ [60s]/
[90s]/ [120s]
[Post alarm (recording) duration]
Sets the time to save to the SD Memory Card after an alarm is generated.
[10s]/ [20s]/ [30s]/ [40s]/ [50s]/ [60s]/ [120s]/ [180s]/ [240s]/ [300s]
*Actual recording time may be longer than the time set for the post alarm time.
SD memory card information
[Remaining capacity]
The remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory Card are displayed.
Depending on the status of the SD Memory Card, it may be displayed as follows.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
159
[Note:]
・When [Overwrite] is set to [Off] and the remaining capacity of the SD Memory
Card becomes [0MB], images are not saved to the SD Memory Card. When the
free space on the SD Memory Card runs out, the specified mail address and
unique alarm notification destination can be notified with the notification function.
→4.8.4.2 Mail sending when an alarm is generated
→4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification
[Important]
・Prior to formatting, set [SD memory card] to [Use] on the basic pages.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
・The SD Memory Card must be formatted using the [SD memory card] tabs before
using the SD Memory Card. The following functions may not work properly when
formatted outside of the [SD memory card] tabs.
-Save/retrieve image when alarm is generated
-Save/retrieve images when manually saved
-Save/retrieve images using the Schedule function
-Save/retrieve alarm log, manual/schedule save log, system log
-Saving/retrieving images using SD Memory recording function of our network
disk recorder
-Play/download images on the SD Memory Card
・When formatting is performed, the operation is interrupted if another user is
working on it.
・You cannot write to the SD Memory Card during formatting.
・When formatting is performed, all data stored on the SD Memory Card are deleted.
・Do not turn off the computer during formatting.
・After formatting, the SD Memory Card displays less than the total amount of
space because it creates the initial directory required to operate.
・The use of an SD Memory Card for i-PRO devices is recommended.
・When recording images repeatedly on an SD Memory Card using the automatic
overwrite function, use an SD Memory Card with high reliability and durability.
・Use an UHS-I (Ultra High Speed-I)-compatible card for the SD Memory Card
that supports the speed class Class 10.
[Format]
To format the SD Memory Card, press [Execute].
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
160
[Note:]
・If you use Falsification Detect, you must set [Recording format] to streaming.
4.5.3 [Alteration detection] for detecting tampering
When the data on the SD Memory Card is falsified, the data can be detected using the dedicated
software.
Falsification detection supports only video files (MP4 format).
For information on how to set up falsification detection, refer to the support video page of the
support site.<Control No. P0001>Please refer to.
Our Technical Information Website provides specific software for tampering detection and how to
use it.<Control No. C0304>Please refer to.
[Select certificate]
Select the certificate to use for falsification detection.
[Pre-install]:Select the pre-installation certificate.
CA:Select a CA certificate. This is displayed only if the CA certificate is installed.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
161
[Note:]
・If the [Recording format] of [Recording stream] is set to JPEG, the setting cannot
be changed to On.
[Additional info for detecting alteration]
Set whether to add the information for detecting tampering to the movie file (MP4 format) to be
saved in the SD Memory Card.
[Pre-install Certificate-Get Certificate]
Click the Run button to download the route certificate for the pre-installation certificate. Use the
downloaded certificate to detect falsification of movies (MP4 file) on the SD Memory Card using
the dedicated software.
[CA certificate-CRT key generation]
Creates a CRT key (encryption key) for use in falsification detection.
CRT key generation is performed in [CRT key generation dialog] displayed when [Execute] is
clicked.
[CA Certificate-Create Signature Request (CSR)]
When using CA certificates issued by a certification authority as CA certificates for use in
tampering detection, it generates a signature request (CSR) to apply to the certification authority.
Create a signature request (CSR) by clicking on the [Execute] button. This is displayed in the
[Create Signature Request (CSR) dialog].
[CA certificate-certificate installation]
This feature installs certificates (CA certificates) issued by certification agencies and displays
information about installed certificates (CA certificates).
When [Select File] is clicked, the [Open File Dialog] is displayed. Select the certificate (CA
Certificate) file issued by the certification authority. Click [Execute] to install the certificate (CA
Certificate).
If a certificate (CA certificate) is installed, the file name of the installed certificate is displayed.
[CA certificate-information]
The information of the certificate (CA certificate) issued by the certification authority is displayed.
When [Execute] is clicked, the registered contents of the installed certificate (CA certificate) are
displayed in [CA Certificate Confirmation Dialog].
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
162
[Important]
・When deleting a valid certificate (CA certificate), make sure that you have a
backup of the certificate (CA certificate) on your PC or recording media. To
reinstall, a certificate (CA certificate) is required.
Clicking [Delete] deletes the installed certificate (CA certificate).
[CA Certificate-Get Certificate]
The certificate (CA certificate) issued by the certification organization is downloaded from this
machine.
Use the downloaded certificate to detect falsification of movies (MP4 file) on the SD Memory Card
using the dedicated software.
4.5.4 How to set up falsification detection
For information on how to set up falsification detection, refer to the support video page of the
support site.<Control No. P0001>Please refer to.
4.5.5 [Overlay image] to set overlays
The overlay image function embeds images uploaded to the computer into live images (overlay
display).
On the Basic Page, press the [Overlay image] tab. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the overlay image function is set.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
163
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
[Overlay image]
Select the camera for which you want to set the overlay.
[Camera 1]:Sets camera 1 overlay.
[Camera 2]:Sets camera 2 overlay.
[Camera 3]:Set the camera 3 overlay.
[Camera 4]:Set the camera 4 overlay.
[Overlay]
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
164
[Note:]
・If [[Character size]] is set to [150%] or [200%] for [Characters in Date/Time
Screen], [Overlay] cannot be set.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・If [[Character size]] is set to [150%] or [200%] for [Characters in Date/Time
Screen], [Overlay] cannot be set.
・The overlay image is not output to the MONITOR OUT terminal.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・Save the image file in a folder that does not use space or double-byte characters.
You may not be able to upload files saved in spaces or folders using double-byte
characters.
[Important]
・Do not turn off the computer or operate the machine during upload of the image
file.
・The uploaded image displayed is reduced depending on the resolution of the live
image. The image quality of the uploaded image may deteriorate and be displayed.
Check the image overlaid on the live image page.
.
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether the uploaded images are overlaid or not.
[On]:Displays the overlay. When set to [On], overlaid images are recorded during recording on
the SD Memory Card.
[Off]:Overlay is not displayed.
[Image Selection]
Follow the procedure below to upload an overlay image file to the computer.
1)Click the [Select File] button to select the image file saved in the PC.
2)Click [Execute] to upload the selected image files to the computer. When an image file is
uploaded, the uploaded image (uploaded image) is displayed as an overlay on the setting screen.
You can use image files with the following specifications for overlay display:
・Image format: 256 color bitmap (BMP: Windows format)
・Image size: 24 pixels x 24 pixels to 512 pixels x 512 pixels
・File capacity: 257 Kbytes or less
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
165
・The uploaded image is saved when uploaded.
[Position]
The uploaded image display position (upper left corner of the image) is displayed with [X] and [Y]
coordinates.
There are two ways to change the display position of uploaded images.
・Drag and drop the uploaded image displayed by using the mouse.
・Enter the coordinates for [X] and [Y] and press [Set].
Input digits:
-If [Image capture mode] is [16:9 mode]
X: 0 to 639, minus the size next to the uploaded image
Y: 0 to 359, minus the vertical size of the uploaded image
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
166
[Note:]
・You can change the display position by moving the red frame displayed when
dragging the uploaded image.
・Coordinates for displaying uploaded images to protrude from the top of the setting
screen cannot be set.
・When uploaded images are moved by the mouse, the display position is saved
without clicking the [Set] button.
・Even if you move the uploaded image to the edge of the screen, there may be a
gap between the image and the edge of the screen.
[Important]
・After changing the [Image capture mode] settings, check the position of the
uploaded images. If the display position is misaligned, set the display position
again. If the uploaded image is displayed out of the setting screen, the display
position returns to the initial value (center of the live image).
-If [Image capture mode] is [4:3 mode]
X: 0 to 639, minus the size next to the uploaded image
Y: 0 to 479, minus the vertical size of the uploaded image
[Permeation]
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether or not the selected colors are transmitted by [Selection of color
to be penetrated].
[On]:Transmits colors selected in [Selection of color to be penetrated].
[Off]:The colors selected in [Selection of color to be penetrated] are not transmitted.
[Selection of color to be penetrated]
Select the color to be transmitted as shown below.
1 Clicking [Color Selection] displays the sub-window with the uploaded images.
4 Advanced settings
4.5 [Basic] for basic setup of the machine
167
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
2 Click the color to be transmitted in the displayed image. The selected color and RGB values
are displayed.
3 Close the sub-window by clicking [Close].
4 Finally, clicking on the [Set] will transparent the selected colors.
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
Image/audio pages configure JPEG images, H.265 images and H.264 images, and set image quality
and sound.
Video/Audio pages consist of the [Image], [Image quality], and [Audio] tabs.
4.6.1 [Image] to set the imaging modes
Click the [Image] tabs on the video pages. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
[Image capture mode]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
168
Aircraft type Imaging mode
PTZ camera 16:9 (30 fps mode)
16:9 (25fps mode)
16:9 (60 fps mode)
16:9 (50 fps mode)
4:3 (15 fps mode)
4:3 (12.5 fps mode)
4:3 (30 fps mode)
4:3 (25fps mode)
Multi-directional camera
(WV-S85702-F3L)
8 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps mode)
8 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps mode)
8 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps Dual mode)
8 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps Dual mode)
Multi-directional camera
(WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-X86530-Z2_
MULTI)
5 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps mode)
5 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps mode)
5 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (15 fps mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5 fps mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (15 fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5 fps Quad mode)
Multi-directional camera
(WV-S85402-V2L、 WV-U85402-V2L)
4 megapixels [16:9] (30 fps mode)
4 megapixels [16:9] (25fps mode)
4 megapixels [16:9] (30 fps Dual mode)
4 megapixels [16:9] (25 fps Dual mode)
[Important]
・If you change the image pickup mode setting with the following area setting, the
position will be misaligned. Therefore, after setting the imaging mode, set each
area.
Mask area
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
-Privacy Zone
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
-Operation detection area
→4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
Select the image to be displayed on the live image, etc.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
169
Undesired detection area
→4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas
VIQS area
→4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
-overlay image
→4.5.5 [Overlay image] to set overlays
・The [16:9 mode(60fps mode)]/[16:9 mode(50fps mode)]/[4:3 mode(15fps
mode)]/[4:3 mode(12.5fps mode)] imaging modes do not allow the use of advanced
features or autotracking features.
・[MULTI] If a slow shutter mode is set during operation, such as at night, it may
take a lot of time to complete the setting.
[Note:]
・If the VIQS area is enabled, make sure that the VIQS settings do not exceed the
maximum range after changing the aspect ratio from [4:3] to [16:9].
・In 2 megapixels [16:9] (60 fps mode), when multiple streams are delivered, 60 fps
delivery is not possible and the image may be displayed intermittently. If the voice
is simultaneously delivered, the data will be delivered at 30 fps.
For other terms and conditions regarding stream delivery, please refer to our
technical information website.<Control No. C0309>Please refer to.
4.6.2 [Image] for setting JPEG images
Click on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Live image (initial display)
Here, the default setting to be displayed on the live picture is performed.
[Initial display stream]
Select the image to be displayed on the live image page from the following.
PTZ camera
JPEG(1)/ JPEG(2)/ [Stream(1)]/[Stream(2)]/[Stream(3)]/[Stream(4)]/[Multi-directional + PTZ]
Multi-directional camera
[4 image display stream (2)], [3 image display stream (2)], [4 image display JPEG], [3 image display
JPEG], [3 image display 1 stream (1)], [Camera 1 stream (2)], [Camera 1 JPEG], [Camera 1
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
170
[Note:]
・Selecting JPEG enables you to select the update interval.
MJPEG/ [Refresh interval : 1s]/[Refresh interval : 3s]/[Refresh interval :
5s]/[Refresh interval : 10s]/[Refresh interval : 30s]/[Refresh interval : 60s]
・The streams can be selected when [Stream transmission] is [On].
・[MULTI] When [4 image display JPEG]/[3 image display JPEG] is selected,
[Refresh interval : 1s] [Still image update: 3 seconds] cannot be selected.
・[MULTI] Select [4 image display stream (2)], [3 image display stream (2)], [4
image display JPEG], or [3 image display JPEG] to select the following display
method.
[4 split]/[360 deg.]
[3 split]/[270 deg.]
・[MULTI] Four-image display is available for the four-eye model.
・[MULTI] Three-image display is available for the three-eye model.
・[MULTI_PTZ] Only Multi-directional/PTZ-integrated cameras can be selected
for [Multi-directional + PTZ].
[Note:]
・If [Stream transmission] is set to [On] and the value with [*] is set, the image
updating rate may be lower than the set value. The value with [*] depends on the
model. Refer to this item on the detailed camera setting screen for the relevant
parameters.
・The [*] option is omitted.
・Depending on the network environment, resolution, image quality, number of
JPEG], [Camera 2 stream (1)], [Camera 2 stream (2)], [Camera 2 JPEG], [Camera 3 stream (1)],
[Camera 3 stream (2)], [Camera 3 JPEG], [Camera 4 stream (1)], [Camera 4 stream (2)], and
[Camera 4 JPEG]/[Camera 4 JPEG].Multi-directional + PTZ
[JPEG image updating speed (movie)*]
Select the rate at which the JPEG image is updated.
If [Image capture mode] is set to [Single source [4:3](30fps mode)]/[Dual sources [4:3](15fps
mode)]/[60fps mode]:
0.1fps/ 0.2fps/ 0.33fps/ 0.5fps/ 1fps/2fps/ 3fps/ 5fps/ 6fps/ 10fps/ 12fps/ 15fps/ 30fps
If [Image capture mode] is set to [Single source [4:3](25fps mode)]/[Dual sources [4:3](12.5fps
mode)]/[50fps mode]:
0.08fps/ 0.17fps/ 0.28fps/ 0.42fps/ 1fps/ 2.1fps/ 3.1fps/ 4.2fps/ 5fps/ 8.3fps/ 12.5fps/ 25fps
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
171
simultaneous accesses, etc., the image update rate may be lower than the set
value.
・If the image is not delivered at the set image update rate, you can reduce the
resolution and image quality to close to the set value.
・The updating speed up to the value of the selected imaging mode can be selected.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
Aircraft type Imaging mode JPEG1 JPEG2
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ
WV-X86530-Z2_PTZ
16:9 (30 fps mode)
16:9 (25fps mode)
16:9 (60 fps mode)
16:9 (50 fps mode)
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360 640x360
320x180
4:3 (30 fps mode)
4:3 (25fps mode)
1280x960
640x480 640x480
320x240
4:3 (15 fps mode)
4:3 (12.5 fps mode)
2048x1536
1280x960
640x480 640x480
320x240
Aircraft type Imaging mode JPEG1 JPEG2
WV-S85702-F3L 8 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps mode) 3840x2160 --
JPEG
Here, the [Image capture size] [Image quality] of JPEG is set. For settings for H.265 (or H.264)
images, see below.
→4.6.3 [Image] for setting up streams
[Image capture size]
When displaying JPEG images, select the resolution of the images to be displayed.
Please refer to the following for the relationship between your model and symbols and terminology.
→1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
PTZ camera
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
172
8 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps mode) (Without
function)
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
8 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps Dual mode)
8 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps Dual mode)
3840x2160
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
WV-X86531-Z2_
MULTI
WV-X86530-Z2_
MULTI
5 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps mode)
5 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps mode)
3072x1728
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
5 megapixels [16:9] (15 fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [16:9] (12.5 fps Quad mode)
3072x1728
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
5 megapixels [4:3] (15 fps mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5 fps mode)
3072x2304
2560x1920
1280x960
640x480
320x240
5 megapixels [4:3] (15 fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5 fps Quad mode)
3072x2304
2560x1920
1280x960
640x480
WV-S85402-V2L
WV-U85402-V2L
4 megapixels [16:9] (30 fps mode)
4 megapixels [16:9] (25fps mode)
2688x1520
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
4 megapixels [16:9] (30 fps Dual mode)
4 megapixels [16:9] (25 fps Dual mode)
2688x1520
2560x1440
1920x1080
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
173
1280x720
640x360
[Note:]
・If you set [Stream transmission] to [On], you can view both H.265 (or H.264) and
JPEG images on live picture pages.
・If one of the streams' [Stream transmission] is set to [On], the image update rate
of the JPEG image is limited.
For information about the rate of updating JPEG images when [Stream
transmission] is set to [On], see below.
→2.3.1 View camera images
・[MULTI] If any one of the [Stream transmission] cameras is set to [On], the image
[Image quality]
Set the quality of JPEG images at each resolution.
[0 Super fine]/[1 Fine]/2/ 3/ 4/ [5 Normal]/6/ 7/ 8/ [9 Low]
4.6.3 [Image] for setting up streams
Click on the [Image] tabs of the video and audio pages. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, H.265 (or H.264) images [bit rate per client], [Image capture size], [Image quality]
Configure, for example. For the settings of the JPEG image, refer to the following.
→4.6.2 [Image] for setting JPEG images
Stream
A stream is a system that simultaneously delivers images with different resolution and frame rates.
The number of streams that can be delivered at the same time is expressed as the number of
streams.
The number of streams depends on the model. Refer to the catalog specifications for the number
of streams for each model.
[Stream transmission]
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether to deliver H.265 (or H.264) images.
[On]:Deliver H.265 (or H.264) images.
[Off]:The H.265 (or H.264) image is not delivered.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
174
updating rate of the JPEG image is limited.
・[MULTI] This setting can be set individually by each camera.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
Aircraft type Imaging mode
H.265/H.264
Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ
WV-X86530-Z2_PTZ
16:9 (30 fps mode)
16:9 (25fps mode)
16:9 (60 fps mode)
16:9 (50 fps mode)
1920x1080 1920x1080
1280x720 1280x720 1280x720
640x360 640x360 640x360 640x360
320x180 320x180 320x180 320x180
4:3 (30 fps mode)
4:3 (25fps mode)
1280x960 1280x960
VGA VGA VGA VGA
QVGA QVGA QVGA QVGA
4:3 (15 fps mode)
4:3 (12.5 fps mode)
2048x1536
1280x960
VGA VGA VGA
QVGA QVGA QVGA
Aircraft type Imaging mode
H.265/H.264
Stream 1 Stream 2 Stream 3 Stream 4
WV-S85702-F3L 8 megapixels [16:9] (15
fps mode)
3840x2160 --
(Without
--
(Without
2560x1440
[Stream encoding format]
Select the compression method for the stream to be delivered.
H.265:H.265 images are delivered.
H.264:H.264 images are delivered.
[Image capture size]
Select the resolution of the H.265 (or H.264) image from the following. Selection may be limited
depending on the selected resolution.
Please refer to the following for the relationship between your model and symbols and terminology.
→1.2 Compatible models and symbols in this manual
PTZ camera
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
175
8 megapixels [16:9]
(12.5 fps mode)
function) function)
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
8 megapixels [16:9] (15
fps Dual mode)
8 megapixels [16:9]
(12.5 fps Dual mode)
3840x2160
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
WV-X86531-Z2_
MULTI
WV-X86530-Z2_
MULTI
5 megapixels [16:9] (15
fps mode)
5 megapixels [16:9]
(12.5 fps mode)
3072x1728
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
320x180
5 megapixels [16:9] (15
fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [16:9]
(12.5 fps Quad mode)
3072x1728
2560x1440
1920x1080
1280x720
640x360
5 megapixels [4:3]
(15fps mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5
fps mode)
3072x2304
2560x1920
1280x960
VGA
QVGA
5 megapixels [4:3] (15
fps Quad mode)
5 megapixels [4:3] (12.5
fps Quad mode)
3072x2304
2560x1920
1920x1080
1280x960
640x480
WV-S85402-V2L
WV-U85402-V2L
4 megapixels [16:9] (30
fps mode)
4 megapixels [16:9]
(25fps mode)
2688x1520
2560x1440
1920x1080
640x360
320x180
4 megapixels [16:9] (30
fps Dual mode)
2688x1520
2560x1440
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
176
4 megapixels [16:9] (25
fps Dual mode)
1920x1080
640x360
[Note:]
・If [Image rotation] is set to [90°] or [270°] on the [Basic] tabs of the basic
pages, the resolution [320x180] cannot be set.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
[Note:]
・Setting [Transmission priority] to [Frame rate] may result in fewer users being
able to connect.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
[Transmission priority]
Set the stream delivery mode from the following.
・ [Constant bit rate]:The H.265 (or H.264) images are delivered at the bit rate set by [Max bit
rate (per client) *].
・ [VBR]:The H.265 (or H.264) images are delivered at the frame rate set by [Frame rate*] while
maintaining the image quality level set by [Image quality]. At this time, the bit rate is varied
within the maximum bit rate set by [Max bit rate (per client) *]. The recording capacity varies
depending on the [Image quality] settings and subject conditions.
・ [Frame rate]Deliver H.265 (or H.264) images at the frame rate set by [Frame rate*].
・ [Best effort]The H.265 (or H.264) images are delivered with varying bit rates within the
maximum bit rate set by [Max bit rate (per client) *], depending on the bandwidth of the
networks.
[Frame rate*]
Set the frame rate from the following.
-For [16:9 mode(30fps mode)]/[16:9 mode(60fps mode)]/[4:3 mode(30fps mode)]/[4:3
mode(15fps mode)]:
1fps/ 3fps/ 5fps/ 7.5fps/ 10fps/ 12fps/ 15fps/ 20fps/ 30fps/ 60fps
-For [16:9 mode(25fps mode)]/[16:9 mode(50fps mode)]/[4:3 mode(25fps mode)]/[4:3
mode(12.5fps mode)]:
1fps/ 3.1fps/ 4.2fps/ 6.25fps/ 8.3fps/ 12.5fps/ 20fps/ 25fps/ 50fps
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
177
[Note:]
・[Frame rate*] is restricted to [Max bit rate (per client) *]. When a value with [*]
is set, the frame rate may be lower than the set value. If [Transmission priority] is
set to [VBR], the image may be suspended periodically depending on the [Max bit
rate (per client) *] and [Image quality] settings. Confirm the image delivered after
setting.
・The [*] option is omitted.
・The frame rate up to the value of the selected imaging mode can be selected.
・Depending on the number of concurrent users or the combination of functions
used, the frame rate may be lower than the set value. Confirm the image delivered
after setting.
・If the frame rate is set low, the image may not be displayed properly depending on
the web browser you use.
・60 fps can be selected only when [Image capture mode] is in [16:9 mode (60 fps
mode)]. In this case, stream (1) will be [fixed at 60 fps]. [Stream(2)] ～ [Stream(4)]
can be up to 10 fps.
・50 fps can be selected only when [Image capture mode] is in [16:9 mode (50 fps
mode)]. In this case, stream (1) is set to [Fix 50fps]. [Stream(2)] ～ [Stream(4)]
can be up to 8.3 fps.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
[Max bit rate (per client) *]
Select H.265 (or H.264) bit rate for one client from the following.
64kbps/128kbps */ 256kbps */ 384kbps */ 512kbps */ 768kbps */ 1024kbps */ 1536kbps */
2048kbps */ 3072kbps */ 4096kbps */ 6144kbps */ 8192kbps */ 10240kbps */ 122888kbps */
14336kbps */ 16384kbps */ 20480kbps */ 24576kbps */---free input
If [-----] is selected, the bitrate can be entered freely to the extent that it can be set.
If [Transmission priority] is [Constant bit rate], [Frame rate], or [Best effort]
320x180, 640x360, QVGA, VGA: 64 kbps to 4096 kbps *
1280x720
*1
For 1280 x 960: 128 kbps *~ 8192 kbps *
1920x1080
*1
For: 256 kbps *~ 12288 kbps *
For 2048 x 1536: 512 kbps *~ 16384 kbps *
For 2560 x 1440, 2560 x 1920: 768 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 3072 x 1728: 1024 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 3072 x 2304: 1536 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
3840 x 2160 : 2048 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
178
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for resolutions that can be selected for each
model.
・The bit rate of streams is restricted to [Bandwidth control(bit rate)] on the
[Network] tabs of network pages. Therefore, when the value with [*] is set, the
image may not be delivered.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
・It is recommended that the bit rate of the stream be set to 8192 kbps or less. If a
value greater than 8192 kbps is set, the continuity of recorded images may be
abnormal.
・When the refresh interval is short, the bit rate may be exceeded depending on
the subject.
・Depending on the number of concurrent users or the combination of functions
used, the bit rate may be lower than the set value. Confirm the image delivered
after setting.
・If you use [60fps mode] or [50fps mode] at the resolution of *1, you can set up to
24576 kbps.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
When [Transmission priority] is [VBR]
320x180, 640x360, QVGA, VGA: 64 kbps to 12288 kbps *
1280x720
*1
For 1280 x 960: 128 kbps *~ 12288 kbps *
1920x1080
*1
In the case: 256 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 2048 x 1536: 512 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 2560 x 1440, 2560 x 1920: 768 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 2688 x 1520: 768 kbps to 24576 kbps
For 3072 x 1728: 1024 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 3072 x 2304: 1536 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
For 3840 x 2160: 2048 kbps *~ 24576 kbps *
[Image quality]
Select the image quality for the H.265 (or H.264) image from the following.
For [Constant bit rate], [Frame rate], [Best effort]:Movement priority/Standard/Image quality
priority
For [VBR]: [0 maximum image quality]/[1 Fine]/2/3/4/[5 Normal]/6/7/8/[9 Low]
Smart Coding-[Auto VIQS]
Images are distributed so that the quality of images in moving places is high and the amount of
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
179
[Note:]
・This function can be used with [Stream(1)] only. If [On(High)] or [On(Low)] is
selected, the VIQS settings are disabled from the [Image quality] tabs.
・[MULTI4] [MULTI3] Regardless of the frame rate set, smart coding is limited to
7.5 fps maximum in 15 fps mode, 6.25 fps maximum in 12.5 fps mode, 15 fps
maximum in 30 fps mode, and 12.5 fps maximum in 25 fps mode.
[Note:]
・This function can be used with [Stream(1)] only. If [On] is selected, the VIQS
settings are disabled from the [Image quality] tabs.
・When [On] is selected, movement may not be smooth or noise may be generated
in areas without objects (heads, people, cars, and motorcycles).
data in other places is low.
[Off]:Auto VIQS is not used.
[On]:It keeps the image quality in the moving place high and reduces the amount of data in other
places.
Smart Coding-[Smart VIQS]
Images are distributed so that the amount of data decreases while maintaining high image quality
in areas with objects (head, people, cars and motorcycles) and low/medium/medium image quality
in other areas.
[Off]:Do not use smart VIQS.
[On(High)]:Images are distributed so that the image quality in the area where the object (head,
people, automobiles, and motorcycles) is located is maintained at a high level, while the image
quality in other areas is maintained at a low level and the amount of data is reduced.
[On(Low)]:Images are distributed so that image quality is high in areas with objects (head, people,
cars, and motorcycles) and medium image quality is maintained in other areas while data volume is
low.
Smart Coding-[Smart P-picture control]
To reduce the amount of data, control the generation of data (macroblock) as little as possible
except where there is an object (head, person, car, or motorcycle).
[Off]:Smart P picture control is not used.
[On]:In order to reduce the amount of data, P-picture data is controlled to be generated as little
as possible in areas other than those with an object (head, person, car, or motorcycle).
Smart Coding-[GOP control]
The GOP control reduces the amount of data.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
180
[Important]
・When [Low], [Mid], [Mid], or [Frame rate control (Variable GOP4s-16s + Frame
rate control)] is selected, recording cannot be performed on the SD Memory
Card. If Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe) is selected, the data can be
recorded on SD cards only with [Manual] [Schedule].
[Note:]
・Using GOP control increases the refresh interval for the H.265 (or H.264) image.
Therefore, do not use in network environments where there are many errors.
・[Low]/[Mid]/[Frame rate control (variable GOP4s-16s + frame rate control)] can
be set only when [VBR] is selected in [Transmission priority]. [Advanced (Fixed
GOP 60s + 1s keyframe)] can be set regardless of the [Transmission priority].
・[Low (variable GOP 1s-8s)], [Mid (variable GOP 4s-16s)], and [Frame rate
control (variable GOP 4s-16s + frame rate control)] can reduce the amount of
data when there is no detectable object (face, person, car, or motorcycle) in the
image. [Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe)] reduces the amount of data
regardless of the presence or absence of the sensing object.
・When [Frame rate control] is set, the frame rate can be changed from 1fps to
[Frame rate*] depending on the presence or absence of the sensing object.
・When [Frame rate control] is set, the display may temporarily slow or fast when
the frame rate is switched.
・[MULTI] Selecting Low (variable GOP1s-8s)/[Mid (variable GOP 4s-16s)]/
[Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe)]/[Frame rate antrol (variable GOP
4s-16s + frame rate control)] limits the bit rate.
If [H.265] is selected in [Stream encoding format]: [Off]/Low/Mid/Advanced/Frame rate control
If [H.264] is selected in [Stream encoding format]: [Off]/[Low]/[Mid(variable GOP 4s-16s)]
[Refresh interval]
Select the refresh interval (I-Picture interval: 0.2 to 5 seconds) for the H.265 (or H.264) image
from the following.
If there are many errors in the network environment, the image will be less distorted if the refresh
interval is shortened.
However, the updating speed of the image may decrease or the bit rate may be exceeded.
[0.2s]/ [0.25s]/ [0.33s]/ [0.5s]/ [1s]/ [2s]/ [3s]/ [4s]/ [5s]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
181
[Note:]
・If [GOP control] is set to Low (variable GOP 1s-8s), the refresh interval is set to
8s.
・If [GOP control] is set to Mid (variable GOP 4s-16s), the refresh interval is set
to 16s.
・If [GOP control] is set to Advanced (fixed GOP 60s + 1s keyframe), the refresh
interval is set to 60s.
・If [GOP control] is set to [Frame Rate Control (variable GOP 4s-16s + frame
rate control)], the frame rate can be varied between values set from 1fps to
[Frame rate*] according to the magnitude of the image change. The lower the
frame rate, the longer the refresh interval. The maximum refresh interval is 16s.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
[Note:]
・For the maximum number of simultaneous unicast accesses, see the following.
→2.3.1 View camera images
・If [Unicast port (MANUAL)] is selected, you must configure a unicast port
number.
[Transmission type]
Select the distribution method of H.265 (or H.264) image from the following.
[Unicast port (AUTO)]:
When sending images and sounds from your computer, [Unicast port1(Image)] and [Unicast
port2(Audio)] are automatically set. If you do not need to fix the number of the ports on which the
streams are delivered, such as when used in networks, it is recommended that you set it to
[Unicast port (AUTO)].
[Unicast port (MANUAL)]:
When sending images and audio from the computer, the [Unicast port1(Image)] and [Unicast
port2(Audio)] must be set manually. When accessing a camera using a browser, the port number is
automatically selected even in this setting. When distributing a stream over the Internet, fix the
port number to be used as the Broadband Router (hereinafter referred to as the Router). For
details, refer to the router's instruction manual.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
[Multicast]:
You can access this machine at the same time without restricting the number of people. To send
streams in multicast, enter [Multicast address], [Multicast port], and [Multicast TTL/HOPLimit].
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
182
・When multicast is set, the browser will not be able to view the H.265 image (or
H.264 image).
・If [Multicast] is selected, you must configure multicast IP addresses.
・[MULTI] This setting is common to all cameras.
[Note:]
・Check and enter the available multicast IP address.
[Note:]
・When sending audio from your computer, the multicast port number plus [1000]
is used.
[Unicast port1(Image)]
Enter the unicast port number (used to send images from your computer).
Configurable port number:1024 to 50000 (even number only)
[Unicast port2(Audio)]
Enter the unicast port number (to be used when sending audio from your computer).
Configurable port number:1024 to 50000 (even number only)
[Multicast address]
Enter the multicast IP address.
Send images and sound to the specified IP address.
IPv4 configurable range:224.0.0.0～239.255.255.255
IPv6 configurable range:Multicast addresses starting with FF
[Multicast port]
Enter the multicast port number (used when sending images from your computer).
Configurable port number:1024 to 50000 (even number only)
[Multicast TTL/HOPLimit]
Enter the TTL/HOPLimit value for the multicast.
Settable value:1～254
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
183
[Important]
・When delivering a stream over the Internet, the distribution image may not be
displayed depending on the settings of the proxy server, firewall, etc. In this case,
contact your network administrator.
・If you want to display multicast images using a PC with multiple LAN cards,
disable LAN cards that are not used for reception.
4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
Click on the [Image quality] tabs of the video and audio pages. Refer to the following how to
display and operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
To Advanced Settings for each item>>Clicking this button displays the advanced settings window
in a separate window and allows you to set the settings while viewing the images displayed on the
[Image quality] tab.
You can set the image quality adjustment, zoom/focus, privacy zone, VIQS, and lens distortion
compensation.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
184
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
185
[Note:]
・[MULTI] Only Multi-directional cameras can be selected.
Selecting the camera from the pull-down menu at the bottom of the screen displays the live
picture of the selected camera. You can view the image quality adjusted on this screen.
[Image adjust]
To Advanced Settings>>When the [button] is clicked, the image quality setting window is
displayed in a separate window.
→4.6.4.1 To adjust the image quality (image quality adjustment screen)
[Image adjust]
To Advanced Settings>>When the [button] is clicked, the image quality setting window is
displayed in a separate window.
→4.6.4.1 To adjust the image quality (image quality adjustment screen)
[Extra zoom]
To Advanced Settings>>When the button is clicked, the EX zoom setting window is displayed in a
separate window.
→4.6.4.3 Adjust the angle of view with the EX zoom
[Privacy zone]
To Advanced Settings>>Click the [Privacy Zone] button to open the Privacy Zone Settings
window.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
186
[Note:]
・Items displayed differ depending on the model. Refer to the catalog specifications
for the functions installed in each model.
・[PTZ] See the following for the operation of the zoom function of the PTZ camera.
→4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
[VIQS]
To Advanced Settings>>Click the [VIQS] button to display the VIQS settings window.
→4.6.4.6 Set up VIQS
[Lens distortion compensation]
To Advanced Settings>>Click this button to display the setting window for lens distortion
compensation in a separate window.
→4.6.4.8 Set the lens distortion compensation
4.6.4.1 To adjust the image quality (image quality adjustment screen)
In the Video/Audio [Image quality] tabs to [Image adjust] Advanced Settings>>Click the [Button].
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
Image quality is set in the setting screen displayed in a separate window. When you change the
values, the values are displayed in the [Image quality] tabs
The image you have also reflects the changes you made.
Click + on the left side of each item in the setting screen to expand each item and display detailed
settings.
Click-> on the left of each expanded item to return to the previous window.
<Example: Basic image quality adjustment>
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
187
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
・[MULTI] For [Common(Cam. 1-2)], for [Super Dynamic], [Light control mode],
[White balance], and Intelligence Auto, only items can be set up prior to the
advanced settings. To perform other advanced settings, select each camera.
[Camera selection]
Select the camera that reflects the image quality settings.
[Common(Cam. 1-2)]:The settings are made simultaneously for each camera. The images
displayed on the [Image quality] tabs are divided into cameras.
[Camera 1]:Sets camera 1 image quality. The image displayed on the [Image quality] tab is the
camera-1 image.
[Camera 2]:Sets camera 2 image quality. The image displayed on the [Image quality] tab is
camera-2 image.
[Camera 3]:Set the image quality of camera 3. The image displayed on the [Image quality] tab is
the camera-3 image.
[Camera 4]:Set the image quality of camera 4. The image displayed on the [Image quality] tab is
the camera 4 image.
Basic image quality adjustment
[Brightness]
Adjust the brightness.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
188
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to brighten the image.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to darken the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default brightness.
[Maximum gain]
Adjust the maximum gain. When the subject's illumination becomes dark, the gain automatically
increases and the screen brightens.
Increasing the gain may increase the noise.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to increase the maximum gain.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to reduce the maximum gain.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Chroma gain level]
Adjust the chroma level (color intensity).
When the slider bar is moved in the [+] direction, it becomes bright and bright.
When the slider bar is moved in the [-] direction, the color becomes calm.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Sharpness level]
Adjust the sharpness level (contour correction).
Moving the slider bar in the direction of [+] results in a sharp contour, while moving the slider bar
in the direction of [-] results in a soft contour.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Digital noise reduction]
The digital noise reduction function automatically reduces noise at low illumination levels.
Move the slider bar in the direction of [+] to increase the effect of noise reduction. For more
afterimages
I have one.
Moving the slider bar in the direction of [-] reduces the noise reduction effect. There are fewer
aftereffects.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
Superdynamic
[Super Dynamic]
You can set [On] or [Off] to activate the super dynamic function.
See [What is Super Dynamic] for details on super dynamic.
[On]:The Super Dynamic function is activated.
[Off]:Stops the superdynamic function.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
189
[Note:]
・This cannot be set when [Image capture mode] is [16:9 mode(60fps mode)] or
[16:9 mode(50fps mode)].
・Set [Super Dynamic] to [Off] when the following phenomena are observed
depending on the lighting condition.
-when flickering or color changes occur
-when noise is generated in the bright area of the screen
・If [Light control mode] is set to [Fix shutter], [Super Dynamic] cannot be set to
[On].
・When [Stabilizer] is set to [On], the superdynamic setting is [Off].
[Level]
Adjust the superdynamic level.
When the slider bar is moved in the [+] direction, you can shoot a subject with a large difference in
light and darkness without flipping white or shading black.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to take a full picture of the middle brightness.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
What is Superdynamic?
If there is a large difference between the bright and dark areas, the camera will set the lens
aperture to match the bright areas, making the dark areas invisible. Conversely, when the lens
aperture is adjusted to the dark area, the bright area is not visible.
Super Dynamic is a function of combining images with large brightness and darkness, and images
with large darkness, and reproducing brightness and darkness faithfully.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
190
[BLC/ HLC]
Select from the following. This setting is not available if [Super Dynamic] is set to [On] or
[Intelligent Auto] is set to [On].
[Back light compensation(BLC)]:Enables the backlight correction function.
[High light compensation(HLC)]:Enables the high light correction function. Illumination
compensation suppresses bright lighting of subjects such as car headlights during nighttime.
[Off]:Stops the backlight compensation function and the intense light correction function.
[BLC level]
Adjust the backlight correction level.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction improves the backlight correction effect. Moving the
slider bar in the [-] direction reduces the effect of backlight correction.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[HLC level]
Adjust the intensity correction level.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction improves the effect of intense light correction. Moving
the slider bar in the [-] direction reduces the effect of intense light correction.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Mask area]
When the mask area is set, the set area can be masked and the light intensity can be adjusted. If
[Super Dynamic] is set to [On], it cannot be set.
For details on how to set the mask area, refer to the following.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
191
[Note:]
・[MULTI] When [Common(Cam. 1-2)] is selected in [Camera selection], the mask
area cannot be set. Set for each camera.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalogue specifications for the [Light control mode] that can be
selected for each model.
・If you increase the shutter speed (～1/10,000), you will be less prone to blur
even when the subject moves faster.
・Increasing the shutter speed decreases the sensitivity.
・If [Super Dynamic] is set to [On], [Fix shutter] cannot be set.
]
,
]
]
.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
Light intensity control mode
[Light control mode]
Select the mode to control the light intensity from the following.
[Outdoor scene]:The brightness (illumination) controls the light intensity by combining the
electronic shutter and automatic aperture. This setting is used when shooting bright subjects such
as outdoors. Be careful not to flicker under fluorescent lights, etc.
[Flickless (50 Hz)]/[Flickless (60 Hz)]:Flicker is automatically corrected with a fluorescent lamp.
50 Hz/60 Hz will be used differently in different regions.
ELC:The electronic shutter is used to control the light intensity.
[Fix shutter]:
If [Image capture mode] is [Single source [4:3](30fps mode)]/[Dual sources [4:3](15fps mode)]:
[1/30 fixed], [3/120 fixed], [2/100 fixed], [2/120 fixed], [1/100 fixed], [1/120 fixed], [1/250
fixed], [1/500 fixed], [1/1000 fixed], [1/2000 fixed], [1/4000 fixed], or [1/10000 fixed]
If [Image capture mode] is [Single source [4:3](25fps mode)]/[Dual sources [4:3](12.5fps mode)]:
[1/25 fixed]/[3/100 fixed]/[2/100 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000
fixed]/[1/2000 fixed]/[1/4000 fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
If [Image capture mode] is in [60fps mode]:
[1/60 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/120 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000 fixed]/[1/2000
fixed]/[1/4000 fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
If [Image capture mode] is in [50fps mode]:
[1/50 fixed]/[1/100 fixed]/[1/250 fixed]/[1/500 fixed]/[1/1000 fixed]/[1/2000 fixed]/[1/4000
fixed]/[1/10000 fixed]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
192
・To configure [Fix shutter], set [Super Dynamic] to [Off].
・If [Image capture mode] is [Single source [4:3](25fps mode)], [50fps mode], or
[Dual sources [4:3](12.5fps mode)], [Flickerless 60Hz] cannot be set.
・When [25fps mode], [50fps mode], or [12.5fps mode] is selected for [Image
capture mode], [Indoor scene(60 Hz)] is not available.
・It may be able to reduce flickering by switching the [Image capture mode] as
follows:
– In the area where the power frequency is 60Hz: Switch the [Image capture
mode] to 30 fps mode or 15 fps mode.
– In the area where the power frequency is 50Hz: Switch the [Image capture
mode] to 25 fps mode or 12.5 fps mode.
[Important]
・When [Maximum shutter] is set to the following, the frame rate may decrease
when the subject is dark.
If the [Image capture mode] is in 30 fps or 15 fps mode:
Value longer than [1/30s maximum] ([2/30s maximum]/[4/30s maximum]/[6/30s
maximum]/[10/30s maximum]/[16/30s maximum])
If the [Image capture mode] is in 25 fps or 12.5 fps mode:
Value longer than [1/25s maximum] ([2/25s maximum]/[4/25s maximum]/[6/25s
maximum]/[10/25s maximum]/[16/25s maximum])
・[MULTI] If the frame rate is lowered for one or more cameras due to the above,
[Maximum shutter]
The maximum exposure time adjusts the maximum storage time of the sensor. The following values
can be set.
If [Image capture mode] is in 30 fps or 15 fps mode:
[Maximum 1/1000s]/[Maximum 1/4000s]/[Maximum 1/2000s]/[Maximum 1/1000s]/[Maximum
1/5000s]/[Maximum 1/250s]/[Maximum 1/120s]/[Maximum 2/120s]/[Maximum 2/120s]/
[Maximum 2/100s]/[Maximum 3/120s]/[Maximum 1/30s]/[Maximum 2/30s]/[Maximum
4/30s]/[Maximum 6/30s]/[Maximum 10/30s]/[Maximum 16/30s]
If [Image capture mode] is in 25 fps or 12.5 fps mode:
[maximum 1/10000 s]/[maximum 1/4000 s]/[maximum 1/2000 s]/[maximum 1/1000 s]/
[maximum 1/500 s]/[maximum 1/250 s]/[maximum 1/100 s]/[maximum 2/100 s]/[maximum
3/100 s]/[maximum 1/25 s]/[maximum 1/25 s]/[maximum 2/25 s]/[maximum 4/25 s]/[maximum
6/25 s]/[maximum 10/25 s]/[maximum 16/25 s]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
193
the frame rate is lowered for the other cameras whose exposure time has not
changed.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalogue specifications for the [Maximum shutter] that can be
selected for the respective models.
・If [Super Dynamic] is set to [On], [Maximum 1/2000 s], [Maximum 1/4000 s], or
[Maximum 1/10000 s] cannot be set.
・If [Maximum gain] is set to [0], the [Maximum shutter] setting is restricted as
follows.
If [Image capture mode] is set to [Single source [4:3](30fps mode)]/[60fps
mode]/[Dual sources [4:3](15fps mode)]:
[Maximum 2/30s] or more cannot be set.
If [Image capture mode] is set to [Single source [4:3](25fps mode)]/[50fps
mode]/[Dual sources [4:3](12.5fps mode)]:
[Maximum 2/25s] or more cannot be set.
・If [Light control mode] is set to [Flickless (60Hz)], the duration cannot be set to
less than [1/120s].
・If [Light control mode] is set to [Flickless (50Hz)], the duration cannot be set to
less than [1/100s].
[Light control speed]
Adjust the speed of light intensity adjustment.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to increase the speed of light adjustment.
Moving the slider bar in the [-] direction slows the light intensity adjustment speed.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
Switching between black and white
[D&N]
Select the mode for switching between black-and-white and color images.
Model with IR LED light
[Off]:It is always shot with color images.
[On(IR Light Off)]:The picture is always taken in black and white.
[On(IR Light On)]:The picture is always taken in black and white. This setting is used when
near-infrared lighting is used at night.
[Auto1(IR Light Off)]:The color image and black-and-white image are automatically switched
depending on the brightness (illumination) of the image.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
194
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・Since the Auto3 (Super Chroma Compensation (SCC)) setting uses color
correction technology, the color tone may be displayed differently from the actual
subject depending on the ambient lighting conditions.
・The operation sound may be heard when switching between black and white.
However, this is not an error.
・Automatic color/black-and-white image switching may not work depending on the
environment. In this case, use the scheduling function to change the color
image/black-and-white image. How to set up is our technical information website
<Control No. C0314>Please refer to.
・[MULTI] If [D&N] is set to other than [Off], all cameras will be changed to the
same setting.
[Auto2(IR Light On)]:The color image and black-and-white image are automatically switched
depending on the brightness (illumination) of the image. This setting is used when near-infrared
lighting is used at night.
[Auto3(SCC)]:Set this when you want to maintain a color image even when the light source is
dark. The Super ChromaCompensation (SCC) function maintains the color image to low brightness.
IR LED lightNo-model
[Off]:It is always shot with color images.
[On]:The picture is always taken in black and white.
[Auto1(Normal)]:The color image and black-and-white image are automatically switched
depending on the brightness (illumination) of the image.
[Auto2(IR Light)]:The color image and black-and-white image are automatically switched
depending on the brightness (illumination) of the image. This setting is used when near-infrared
lighting is used at night.
[Auto3(SCC)]:Set this when you want to maintain a color image even when the light source is
dark. The Super Chroma Compensation (SCC) function maintains the color image to low illumination.
What is Super Chroma Compensation (SCC)?
This function enables the acquisition of color images that are faithful using a unique color
correction technology even in an environment with low illumination that cannot capture images
faithfully.
[Level]
Select the brightness (illumination) level to switch between color image and black-and-white
image from the following. The following switching illuminance is the illuminance when [Super
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
195
[Note:]
・The color image switching is about 5 to 8 times bright. It may vary depending on
the environment.
・If [Maximum gain] is set low, it may not be easy to switch over depending on the
environments.
[Note:]
・Only IR-equipped models can be selected for [IR LED light intensity].
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・When [Black & white input] is selected in [Terminal 1] of the [Alarm] tab, [Off]
can be selected.
・[MULTI] This setting is displayed only when [Camera selection] is set to
[Common(Cam. 1-2)]. The settings for each camera are not available.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[MULTI] [IR Light Individual Setting] can be selected only for the model with IR
of the Multi-directional camera.
Dynamic] is [Off].
3:The brightness (brightness) of the camera is about 8 lx or less, and the image is switched to
black and white.
2:The brightness (brightness) around the camera is about 4 lx or less, and the camera switches to
a black-and-white image.
1:The brightness (brightness) of the camera is about 2 lx or less and the image is switched to black
and white.
0:The brightness (brightness) around the camera is about 1 x or less, and the image is switched to
black and white.
[Dwell time]
Select the time before switching between color image and black-and-white image from the following.
[2s]/ [10s]/ [30s]/ [1min]
[IR LED light intensity]
Select IR light intensity from [High]/[Middle]/[Low]/[Off].
IR Light individual settings
You can enable or disable each IR Light individually.
For more information on our technical information website<Control No. C0109>Please refer to.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
196
[Note:]
・Only IR-equipped models can be selected for [IR LED light intensity].
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the selectable switching method for each
model.
・When [Intelligent Auto] is [On], [Intensity control] does not work.
・[MULTI] If [IR LED light intensity] is set to other than [Off], all cameras will be
changed to the same setting.
[Note:]
・Colors may not be reproducible faithfully if the following conditions are met: In
such cases, set it to [AWC].
Most dark-colored subjects
The outgoing blue sky and the evening sun
Subject with too low illumination
・If [AWC] is selected, press [Set].
[Intensity control]
IR Light Sets ON/OFF whether the white and suppression function can be activated.
White balance
[White balance]
Select the white balance adjustment method from the following.
Adjust the white color with the R volume (adjusting red color) or the B volume (adjusting blue).
[ATW1]:Set the automatic color temperature tracking mode. The camera continuously checks the
color temperature of the light source and automatically adjusts the white balance. The operating
range is about 2700 K to 6000 K.
[ATW2]:Set the automatic color temperature tracking mode under sodium lamp. The camera
automatically adjusts the white balance under the sodium lamp. The operating range is from about
2000 K to 6000 K.
[AWC]:Set the automatic white balance control mode. Since the light source is fixed, it is suitable
for shooting where the light source does not change. The operating range is from approximately
2000 K to 10000 K.
[Red gain]
Adjusts the red color of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to darken the red color. When the slider bar is moved in
the [-] direction, the red color becomes light. Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Blue gain]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
197
[Note:]
・[MULTI] When [Common(Cam. 1-2)] is selected in [Camera selection], the mask
area cannot be set. Set for each camera.
Adjust the blue color of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to darken the blue color. When the slider bar is moved in
the [-] direction, the blue color becomes light. Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Mask area]
When the mask area is set, the set area can be masked and the white balance can be adjusted.
For details on how to set the mask area, refer to the following.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
[Adjustment speed]
Adjust the white balance adjustment speed.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to increase the white balance adjustment speed. Move the
slider bar in the [-] direction to slow the white balance adjustment speed. Press [Reset] to return
to the default settings.
Intelligent auto
[Intelligent Auto]
Set ON/OFF whether the intelligent auto function is enabled or not.
Intelligent Auto identifies scenes (backlights, outdoors, night scenes, etc.), faces, moving objects,
etc., and automatically squeezes the camera to adjust the gain, shutter speed, and contrast to
make it easier to see faces and moving objects.
What is Intelligent Auto?
This function enables the camera to adjust the gain, shutter speed, and contrast by identifying
scenes (backlight, outdoors, night scenes, etc.), faces of people, and moving objects, thereby
making it easier to see faces and moving objects.
[Face priority level (Brightness)]
Adjust the face priority level when activating intelligent auto.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to make the face more visible.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to adjust the entire image in a balanced manner.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Motion priority level (Shutter)]
Adjust the motion priority level when activating intelligent auto.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction makes moving subjects less prone to blurring but
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
198
[Note:]
・Flicker caused by fluorescent lamp may occur when intelligent auto is activated.
In this case, set one of the following settings.
Adjust the [Motion priority level] slider bar to [-].
Change [Light control mode] to [Indoor scene(50Hz)] or [Indoor scene(60Hz)].
・When intelligent auto is activated, the brightness of the entire image may change
due to changes in some subjects. In such cases, adjust the [Face priority level]
slider bar to [-].
・[MULTI4] [MULTI3] When intelligent auto is activated, the maximum frame rate
is limited to 7.5 fps in 15 fps mode and 6.25 fps in 12.5 fps mode regardless of the
frame rate.
[Note:]
・If [Intelligent Auto] is set to [On], this item cannot be set.
[Note:]
・If [Fog compensation] is set to [On], this item cannot be set.
increases dark subject noise.
Moving the slider bar in the [-] direction tends to blur the moving subject but reduces the dark
subject noise. Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
Advanced settings
[Auto contrast adjust]
Use [On] or [Off] to set the auto-contrast adjust function.
[On]:Activate the automatic contrast adjustment function.
[Off]:Stops the automatic contrast adjustment function.
[Contrast level]
Adjust the contrast intensity.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to increase the contrast of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to reduce the image contrast.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Adaptive black stretch]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
199
[Important]
・The [Adaptive black stretch] setting may cause darker areas to become more
noisy, and darker or brighter areas may be near the border between darker and
brighter areas than other darker areas.
[Note:]
・If [Fog compensation] is set to [On], this item cannot be set.
[Note:]
・If [Fog compensation] is set to [On], this item cannot be set.
[Note:]
・When [Fog compensation] is set to [On], [Contrast level], [Adaptive black
stretch], and [Adaptive highlight stretch] cannot be set.
Adjust the brightness of the dark area of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction to brighten the dark area of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to darken the dark area of the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Adaptive highlight stretch]
Adjust the brightness of the bright area of the image.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction will increase the contrast between the light and dark
areas of the image.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to reduce the contrast between the light and dark areas of
the image.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Fog compensation]
On/Off sets whether the fog correction function is enabled.
If [Intelligent Auto] is set to [On] or [Auto contrast adjust] is set to [On], it cannot be set. With
the fog correction function, digital image processing can be used to correct images easily when
they are blurred, such as when a fog occurs.
On:Enables the fog correction function.
Off:Stops the fog correction function.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
200
[Level]
Adjust the fog correction level.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction increases the correction level, while moving the slider
bar in the [-] direction decreases the correction level. Press [Reset] to return to the default
settings.
Pedestal level
Move the slider bar to adjust the black level of the image.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction brightens the image. Move the slider bar in the [-]
direction to darken the image. Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
Scene registration
[Scene file]
The combination of the set items can be saved as a scene file. Select the scene file here.
You can set the saved scene file on the schedule page. If the shooting environment changes
greatly depending on the time, you can record the image with a combination of settings
appropriate to the environment by registering it in the schedule.
→4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
[Scene file title]
You can change the scene file name (up to 10 characters) to be displayed in [Scene file]. Only the
file names displayed in [1:], [2:], [3:], [4:] can be changed.
Characters that cannot be entered:Half-pitch symbol " & ￥
[Load] buttons
The set data selected in [Scene file] is loaded and reflected in the current image.
[Register] buttons
This feature registers combinations of currently displayed image quality-adjusted settings in a
scene file displayed on the [Scene file].
4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
This section explains how to adjust the light intensity by masking a portion of the screen.
To configure the mask area, set [Super Dynamic] to [Off].
1 Displays the image quality adjustment setting screen.
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
201
2 Click + to the left of the [Super Dynamic] to view the Detailed Super Dynamics menu.
3 Clicking on the [Start] buttons in the [Mask area] displays the boundaries and divides the
images displayed on the [Image quality] tabs into 48 (8×6).
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
202
4 Click the split area to be masked to set the frame you clicked to the mask area and turn
white. To release the mask, click the mask area again.
5 Once the mask area has been set, clicking [Stop] will clear the frame from the images on the
[Image quality] tab.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
203
[Important]
・If you change the [Image capture mode] of the [Image] tabs after you configure
the mask area, the mask area may be misaligned. Be sure to check the mask area
settings again.
・If you set EX optical zoom or HD EX optical zoom after setting the mask area,
the mask area may be misaligned. Be sure to check the mask area settings again.
[Note:]
・To cancel all mask areas, press [Reset].
[Note:]
・This function cannot be adjusted when [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual
mode.
[Note:]
・The maximum magnification of the EX zoom depends on the model and the [Image
capture mode] you are configuring.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the maximum magnification of each model.
4.6.4.3 Adjust the angle of view with the EX zoom
To Advanced Settings in [Extra zoom] on the [Image quality] tabs of video pages>>Click the
[Button]. ([Image quality] for setting image quality adjustment, zoom/focus, privacy zone, VIQS,
and lens distortion compensation)
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
Use EX Zoom to adjust the angle of view of the image.
・Adjust the zoom factor in the [Wide angle] direction.
・Zoom (magnification) 1.0 times.
・Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
204
[Important]
・The extra zoom function may not be activated on the appropriate position if the
setting for the function is performed after the settings for the VIQS area, privacy
zone, VMD area, and SCD area. Therefore, configure each area's settings after
configuring the extra zoom settings.
→4.6.4.6 Set up VIQS
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
→4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection
→4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
・Set the mask area to 1.0 times the zoom factor. After the EX zoom is set, the
mask position is specified when the zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
[Note:]
・This function cannot be adjusted when [Image capture mode] is in dual-mode.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The camera to adjust the angle of view can be selected.
4.6.4.4 Adjust the zoom/focus
To [Advanced Settings] in [Zoom/Focus Adjustment] of the [Image quality] tabs on the video
pages>>Click the [Button]. ([Image quality] for setting image quality adjustment, zoom/focus,
privacy zone, VIQS, and lens distortion compensation)
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
Use Zoom and EX optical zoom to adjust the angle of view of the displayed image.
Adjust the focus by moving the lens focus to the optimal position. It can be adjusted manually or
automatically.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
205
[Zoom ratio designation]
Adjust the zoom and focus simultaneously.
Press the slider bar to zoom in or out the angle adjustment frame in the image.
When you adjust the zoom (magnification) in the "telephoto" direction, only the image adjustment
frame is reduced and you can specify the zoom (magnification) while checking the angle of view
after the zoom is executed.
When the zoom (magnification) is adjusted in the "Wide angle" direction, the image itself is
reduced or the frame for the zoom angle adjustment is enlarged. You can specify the zoom
(magnification) while checking the image size after the zoom is executed.
Adjust the angle of view adjustment frame, and click [Execute] to zoom. Then, automatically
adjust the focus to the object in the center of the window using the auto focus function.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
206
[Note:]
・The maximum magnification of the EX zoom depends on the model and the [Image
capture mode] you are configuring.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the maximum magnification of each model.
・In the [Manual zoom adjustment] Buttons, When you press buttons, [Zoom
ratio designation] cannot be operated. To perform [Zoom ratio designation], click
the "Read" button or click the X1 button on the [Manual zoom adjustment].
[Important]
・When EX optical zoom is set with the VIQS area, privacy zone, operation
detection area, undesired detection area, and mask area set, the position is
misaligned. Therefore, set the EX optical zoom and then set each area.
→4.6.4.6 Set up VIQS
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
→4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection
→4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
[Note:]
・One-click on the [Near] or [Far] buttons may appear to have no change in focus
due to trace adjustments. If you want to move the focus position large, press and
hold the button for a long time.
[Manual zoom adjustment]
Adjust the zoom manually.
Adjust the zoom factor to 1.0 times in the [Wide Angle] direction.
Zoom (magnification) is 1.0 times.
: Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
[Manual focus adjustment]
Adjust the focus manually.
[Near]: Adjust the focus to the [Near].
[Reset] returns focus (focus) to its default settings.
[Far]: Adjust the focus to the [Far].
[Focus area setting]
When auto focus is executed, you can specify the object in the frame where you want to adjust the
focus.
If not, adjust the focus to the object in the center area of the window.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
207
[Note:]
・If you set the focus frame and then change the "Rotate images" on the [Basic] tab
or "Image capture mode" on the [Image] tab, the focus frame may be misaligned.
Be sure to check the focus frame settings again.
[Important]
・If the [Image capture mode] is [Single source [4:3](30fps mode)], it may take a lot
of time for auto focus to be completed if auto focus is executed while the slow
shutter is running at night while [Maximum shutter] is set to longer than [1/30s].
・If the [Image capture mode] is [Single source [4:3](25fps mode)], it may take a lot
of time for auto focus to be completed if auto focus is executed while the slow
shutter is running at night while [Maximum shutter] is set to longer than [1/25s
max.].
・The focus may not be adjusted automatically in the following locations or object.
In this case, adjust the focus manually.
Be a big move
Large variation in illumination
Low illuminance
Be too bright or too reflective
Over the window
Dome covers are prone to contamination.
White walls are less dark.
Flicker fiercely
・When the image is switched from color to black and white in the near infrared
[Display]: Displays the auto focus frame on the setup window. The default setting is displayed in
the center area of the screen. Drag the mouse on the image and specify the area where you want
to adjust the focus. When you are finished, press [Register].
When the [Display] button is clicked, the [Reset] and [Register] buttons are displayed.
[Reset]: Returns the frame setting to the default position.
[Register]: Saves the set frame. Clicking to automatically adjust focus to the object in the
specified area
I do.
[Auto focus]
When [Execute] is clicked, the auto focus function is activated to automatically adjust the focus to
the object in the center of the window.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
208
region, the focus may shift due to the optical characteristics. If [Focusing at Day
& Night switching] is set to [Auto] or [Preset], the camera can focus automatically
(it does not support the lighting change after the focus operation is completed).
[Important]
・If the focus cannot be adjusted automatically when switching between color and
black and white images in the [Auto] setting, set it to [Preset] or [Fix] and adjust
the focus manually.
[Focusing at Day & Night switching]
Select the focus adjustment method when switching between color image and black-and-white
image from the following.
Details on our technical information website<Control No. C0315>Please refer to.
[Auto]:The focus is automatically adjusted when the color/black-and-white settings are changed
from the focus-adjusted image. When the original color/black/white status is changed, the focus
position is returned to the last one. If the image cannot be adjusted with a black-and-white image,
the image may be re-adjusted with a color image and then switched to a black-and-white image.
[Preset]:When switching between color image and black-and-white image, the preset is moved to
the specified focus position. In the preset position, the color image or black-and-white image
automatically stores the focus position set last.
[Fix]:After adjusting the focus automatically or manually, fix the position.
[Grid display]
You can switch on/off the grid view that can be used to adjust the position of the machine when
using Extension software. For adjusted sizes for each Extension software, our Technical
Information website<Control No.: C0320>Please refer to.
[Close] buttons
Close the Zoom/Focus dialog box.
4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
In the Video/Audio [Image quality] tabs to [Privacy zone] Advanced Settings>>Click the [Button].
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
If there are areas in the shooting location (image) that you do not want to display, do not display
those areas as privacy zones.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
209
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the number of privacy zones that can be set
for each model.
・[PTZ] The Privacy Zone function does not work during initial operation or
position refresh immediately after the power supply is turned on.
・[PTZ] Depending on the orientation of the camera (especially the tilt angle of
45° to 90°) or the magnification factor, you may see where you want to hide.
Be sure to check after setting.
・[PTZ] Reset the Privacy Zone when you change the method of fixing the camera.
The privacy zone function of each camera is described below.
PTZ camera
[Privacy zone]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
210
[Note:]
・The privacy zone should be set broadly for objects that you want to hide.
It is recommended to set the zone between 1 and 3 times the zoom magnification
to increase the zone accuracy on the wide angle side.
[Note:]
・If enabled, the privacy zone will not be displayed if you move to a magnification
lower than the set zoom magnification.
Select the display format of the privacy zone from the following.
[On]:Display in gray
[Off]:Not displayed.
[Zone select]
Click [▼] on the [Zone No] and select the number of zones you want to set.
The [*] mark to the right of the zone number indicates that a privacy zone has already been set.
When you drag the desired range with the mouse, it is set as the privacy zone.
Once the position has been determined, press [Set].
To delete a registered zone, specify the zone number and press [Delete].
To cancel setting or deletion, press [Cancel].
[Privacy zone:Min. Zoom]
Use [On] or [Off] to toggle the smallest zoom in zones.
[On]:The current zoom position is saved.
[Disable]:The zoom position is saved as X1 times. The privacy zone is always displayed regardless
of the zoom position.
[Zoom] buttons
:Adjust the zoom factor in the [Telescope] direction.
:Zoom (magnification) 1.0 times.
:Adjust the zoom factor in the [Wide angle] direction.
[Focus] buttons
[Auto]:Automatically adjust focus.
[Near]:Adjust the focus (focus) to [Near].
[Far]:Adjust the focus (focus) to [Far].
Control pad/button
Left-click the pads and buttons to adjust the horizontal and vertical position of the image (pan
tilt).
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
211
The faster the camera operates, the faster the outside of the pad is clicked.
You can also drag and adjust the mouse. Zoom and focus by right-clicking.
Clicking on the upper half of the pad in the upper and lower directions will zoom in the telephoto,
and clicking on the lower half will zoom in the wide angle. Clicking on the left half in the left and
right directions will bring the focus (focus) close to you, and clicking on the right half will bring it
far away. You can also adjust the zoom by using the mouse wheel.
[Brightness] buttons
It can be adjusted from 0 to 255. Click the [Light (+)] button to brighten the image. Click the
[Black (-)] button to darken the image. Press [Normal] to return to the default settings.
Move button
Select the preset position from the pull-down menu and click the [Move] button to move the
camera's orientation to the preset position registered beforehand. [H] next to the number
indicates the home position. Select [HomePosition] to move the orientation of the camera to the
home position.
→4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
→4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
If [Preset ID (0 – 9,A – Z)] is registered, the position name is displayed next to the number.
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the Privacy Zone Settings window.
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
212
[Note:]
・When [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual mode, the camera cannot be selected.
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set the privacy zone from each camera.
[Area]
This is set as the privacy zone by specifying four vertices on the image. Each zone can also be set
in overlap. The zones are set in order from Area 1.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
213
[Note:]
・The privacy zone should be wider than the hidden object.
・If [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual mode, you cannot specify any four
points across the cameras in the area.
[Important]
・If you configure a privacy zone and then change the [Image capture mode] and
[Basic] tab [Image rotation] on the [Image] tab, the privacy zone may be
misaligned. Be sure to check the privacy zone settings again.
・Setting the privacy zone and then setting the EX zoom may cause the privacy
zone to be misaligned. Be sure to check the privacy zone settings again.
・If the privacy zone is set when lens distortion compensation is enabled, it may be
misaligned. In such a case, return the lens distortion compensation to [0] and set
the privacy zone. Then, set the lens distortion compensation again.
[Status]
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether the privacy zone is displayed.
[On]:Displays the privacy zone.
[Off]:Privacy zone is not displayed.
[Delete] buttons
Click the button on the area to delete the button to delete the zone.
[Close] buttons
Close the Privacy Zone Settings window.
4.6.4.6 Set up VIQS
To Advanced Settings on the [Image quality] tabs of Video/Audio pages [VIQS]>>Click the
[Button].
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
What is VIQS?
Abbreviation for Variable Image Quality on Specified Area. This function enables you to change
the image quality in the specified area.
Image quality in the range specified in the shooting location (image) can be made high quality for
easy viewing. Image quality outside the specified range is low and image data size can be suppressed.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
214
[Note:]
・VIQS covers only H.265 (or H.264) images.
・Up to eight VIQS areas can be set.
・After [Stream] is set to [On], press [Execute] to view the images after VIQS is
set.
You can also view the H.265 (or H.264) image on a live image page.
・The VIQS function cannot be used in the following cases.
-When [Stream(1)] [Smart VIQS] is set to [On(High)] or [On(Low)]
When-[Smart P-picture control] is set to [On]
The VIQS function of each camera is described below.
PTZ camera
Select the position for which you want to set the VIQS area and press [Start] to open the VIQS
area setting window for the selected position.
You can specify the VIQS area on the displayed setting screen.
VIQS area setting
[Select a preset position]
Select the preset position number for which you want to configure the VIQS area, and then press
[Start] to configure the VIQS area.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
215
Select [except the preset positions] to set the VIQS area other than the preset position.
[Close] buttons
Click to close the VIQS Settings window.
[Area]
When the VIQS area is selected in the image, it is set from Area 1.
[Center] button
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
216
[Important]
・If you set the VIQS setting to [On] and then change the [Image capture mode]
and [Basic] tab [Image rotation] on the [Image] tab of the video and audio pages,
the VIQS area may be misaligned. Be sure to reconfirm the VIQS settings.
[Note:]
・Refer to the following procedure for setting the VIQS area.
→4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
・If the [Stream transmission] of the relevant stream is set to [Off], you cannot
press the [Execute] buttons for selecting the stream.
When clicked, the center is selected as the VIQS area and set to the [1(White)] of the [Area].
[Status]
Set the VIQS area with [On] and [Off].
[On]:Set the VIQS area.
[Off]:Do not configure the VIQS area.
[Delete] buttons
Click the area button to delete the area frame.
[Level]
Sets the level difference between the quality in the specified range and the quality outside the
specified range. The larger the level difference, the lower the image quality outside the specified
range and the smaller the image data size.
[0:Minimum]/1/2/3/4/[5:standard]/6/7/8/[9:maximum]
Stream selection
Use [On]/[Off] to specify whether the VIQS function is enabled for images delivered to streams.
The [Execute] buttons allow you to view images of individual streams.
Multi-directional camera
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
217
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set the VIQS area from each camera.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
218
[Note:]
・When [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual mode, the camera cannot be selected.
[Important]
・If you turn on the VIQS setting and then change the [Image capture mode] and
[Basic] tab [Image rotation] on the [Image] tab of the video and audio pages, the
VIQS area may be misaligned. Be sure to check the VIQS settings again.
[Note:]
・Refer to the following procedure for setting the VIQS area.
→4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
・If the [Stream transmission] of the relevant stream is set to [Off], you cannot
press the [Execute] buttons for selecting the stream.
[Area]
When the VIQS area is selected in the image, it is set from Area 1.
[Status]
Set the VIQS area with [On] and [Off].
[On]:Set the VIQS area.
[Off]:Do not configure the VIQS area.
[Delete]
Click the button of the area to delete to delete the area frame.
[Level]
Sets the level difference between the quality in the specified range and the quality outside the
specified range. The larger the level difference, the lower the image quality outside the specified
range and the smaller the image data size.
[0:Minimum]/1/2/3/4/[5:standard]/6/7/8/[9:maximum]
Stream selection
Use [On]/[Off] to specify whether the VIQS function is enabled for images delivered to streams.
The [Execute] buttons allow you to view images of individual streams.
4.6.4.7 Set up the VIQS area
Set the VIQS area as follows.
1 Drag the mouse on the image and specify the area. You can specify up to 8 areas.
The specified location is set to Area [1(White)], and a frame is displayed.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
219
Areas are set from the first to the first area number. The color next to the area number
indicates the corresponding color of the frame.
2 Sets the level difference between the quality in the specified range and the quality outside the
specified range. The larger the level difference, the lower the image quality outside the
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
220
[Important]
・If you do not press the [Set] buttons, the settings will not be confirmed.
・Visual image after VIQS setting can be confirmed by displaying the H.265 (or
H.264) image on the live image page or by pressing [Execute] on the [Stream].
・The current output bit rate varies depending on the subject. Check the actual
subject during operation.
・The larger the specified range, the larger the output bit rate. Check the current
output bit rate and determine the size of the area.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
・[MULTI] When [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual mode, the camera cannot
be selected.
specified range and the smaller the image data size.
3 On/Off selects whether to enable the VIQS function on the delivered image of each stream.
4 Press [Set].
The settings are reflected on the computer. To delete the setting area, click [Delete] in the
area to delete.
5 Press [Execute].
The streams with the [Execute] buttons are displayed. The current output bit rate can be
checked when another window opens for approximately 3 seconds.
4.6.4.8 Set the lens distortion compensation
To Advanced Settings on the [Image quality] tabs of Video/Audio pages [Lens distortion
compensation]>>Click the [Button].
→4.6.4 [Image quality] to set the image quality
You can use lens distortion correction to correct the distortion.
The correction amount can be adjusted.
The degree of distortion compensation depends on the zoom factor. Adjust the image angle with
the zoom setting and then set the lens distortion compensation.
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to adjust the lens distortion compensation from each camera.
[Lens distortion compensation]
You can switch the lens distortion compensation ON/OFF.
Move the slider bar in the [+] direction or [-] direction to adjust the image distortion.
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
221
[Note:]
・When EX optical zoom is used, lens distortion compensation does not work.
・When lens distortion compensation is set to ON, all cameras are set to ON.
Turning on lens distortion compensation may lower the frame rate.
[Note:]
・Images and sound are not synchronized. Therefore, there may be a slight
deviation between the image and sound.
・Depending on the network environment, audio may be interrupted.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
4.6.5 [Audio] for setting sound
Click on the [Audio] tabs of the video and audio pages. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the settings related to sound are made.
Voice input
[Mic input volume]
Set the volume of sound input to the computer. This setting is reflected in the volume of sound
(listening) on the computer and the volume at [Audio recording].
[Mic strength]/[Mic in progress]/[Microphone weak]:Set the volume when the sound is entered
into the camera by microphone.
[Line Strength]/[In Line]/[Line Weak]:Set the volume when the sound is inputted to the camera
line.
[AGC (audio)]
The earpiece sound is automatically amplified and adjusted to the appropriate volume. Select the
degree of amplification from High/Middle/Low. When set to [High], it is easier to hear a small
sound, but it may be heard as a noise. If you are concerned about noise, set it to [Middle] or
[Low]. This setting is linked to the [Audio recording] volume.
[Max bit rate]
Set the bit rate of sound compression.
[G.726]:16kbps/ 32kbps
[G.711] : 64 kbps (cannot be changed)
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
222
[Note:]
・The howling may occur depending on the operating conditions. In this case, do
not allow the sound output from the PC to enter the microphone of the PC.
・[Audio recording] cannot be used when [Audio transmission mode] is set to
[Interactive(Half-duplex)].
・When using live picture pages, use HTTPS to access live picture pages.
[Note:]
・The shorter the call interval, the shorter the delay time. Increasing the value
lengthens the delay time but reduces speech interruption. Change the settings
depending on your network environment.
・If [AAC-LC] is selected in [Audio input encoding format], [Mic input interval
(Camera to PC)] cannot be selected.
[AAC‑LC]:64kbps/ 96kbps/ 128kbps
Voice delivery
[Audio transmission mode]
Set the communication mode for sending/receiving voice data between the computer and PC from
the following.
[Off]:Audio data is not transmitted or received between the computer and the PC.
[Mic input]:The PC receives audio data from the computer. You can hear sound together with
images on a PC. Images and sound are not synchronized.
[Audio output]:The audio data from the PC is transmitted to the computer. Audio can be played
through a speaker connected to the computer.
[Interactive(Half-duplex)]:You can make both listening and outgoing calls. However, audio cannot
be sent/received simultaneously.
[Interactive(Full-duplex)]:You can both listen and talk at the same time.
[Mic input interval (Camera to PC)]
Select the voice reception interval from the following.
[20ms]/ [40ms]/ [80ms]/ [160ms]
[Audio output volume (PC to Camera)]
Sets the volume to which the sound from the PC is played from the computer.
[High]/[Middle]/[Low]
[Audio output interval (PC to Camera)]
Select the voice transmission interval from the following.
[160ms]/ [320ms]/ [640ms]/ [1280ms]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
223
[Note:]
・The smaller the call interval, the shorter the delay time. Increasing the value
lengthens the delay time but reduces speech interruption. Change the settings
depending on your network environment, the performance of your PC, and the
usage status of applications other than web browsers.
・When multiple users are accessing the computer, the sound may be temporarily
interrupted or the noise may be output. Increasing the transmission interval can
reduce speech interruptions and noise.
・Sound may not be output depending on your network environment and settings.
[Note:]
・The call stops after the set time after the start of the call. If you want to make
another call, click the call button.
[Note:]
・The Destination port number entered in [Audio output port (PC to Camera)] is
used only if [Transmission type] is set to [Unicast port (MANUAL)]. If [Stream
transmission] has selected [Off] or [Transmission type] [Unicast port (AUTO)] or
[Multicast], you do not need to enter the Destination port number.
[Note:]
・Only AAC-LC can be accessed from a Web browser.
・G.711 can be selected only when [Audio transmission mode] is [Mic input].
・G.726 is always applied to the compression method for voice transmission.
[Audio output duration]
You set the maximum time for one call.
[1min]/ [2min]/ [3min]/ [5min]/ [10min]/ [20min]/ [30min]/ [1h]
[Audio output port (PC to Camera)]
Enter the destination port number (the port number on the camera to send voice to the computer).
Configurable port number: 1024 to 50000 (even number only)
Live image pages
[Audio input encoding format]
Select the compression method of earpiece voice from G.726/G.711/AAC-LC.
[Audio volume control mode]
4 Advanced settings
4.6 [Image/Audio] for setting images and sound files
224
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
Select how to use the volume cursor of the earpiece button on the live picture page.
Adjust the PC volume:You change the volume of the PC that is opening the Live Picture page.
Manipulate camera audio input volume:You change the earpiece volume of the camera.
4.7 Set PTZ
The PTZ page is used to set the camera operation, preset position, and auto tracking.
The PTZ pages consist of the [Cam. Function], [Position], [Auto track setting], and [Auto track
alarm setting] tabs.
4.7.1 [Cam. Function] for setting the operation of cameras
Click on the [Cam. Function] tab of the PTZ page. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
This section sets the operation of the camera.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
225
[Note:]
If you want to move to the home position when the power is turned on, set
[HomePosition] to [Self return].
[Home position]
You can set the preset position as the home position.
When the home position is set, [H] is displayed next to the preset position number.
→4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
[Self return]
When the time set by [Self return time] has elapsed after manual operation, the camera can
automatically return to one of the following modes of operation.
[Off]:Do not perform self-return.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
226
[Note:]
If you want to perform the above operations when turning on the power, it is
convenient to use the self-turn function.
The Self-turn function works even when the Setup menu is displayed.
• [Patrol] can be set only when patrols are set.
→4.7.2.4 Set patrol (Patrol function setting screen)
The • [Preset sequence] can be set only when the preset sequence is set.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
[Home position]:After the set time has elapsed, the watch returns to the home position.
[Auto Pan]:When the set time elapses, the auto pan operation starts.
[Preset Sequence 1]:When the set time elapses, Sequence 1 operation starts.
[Preset Sequence 2]:Sequence 2 operation starts when the set time elapses.
[Preset Sequence 3]:Sequence 3 operation starts when the set time elapses.
[Patrol]:When the set time elapses, the patrol operation starts.
[Self return time]
After the manual operation is completed, select the time from the following to return to the
operation set by [Self return].
[10s]/ [20s]/ [30s]/ [1min]/ [2min]/ [3min]/ [5min]/ [10min]/ [20min]/ [30min]/ [60min]
[Upside-down]
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether to flip the images up or down.
[On]:The image is inverted upside down.
[Off]:The image is not flipped up or down.
[HD Extra optical zoom]
Select the setting of HD EX optical zoom from the following.
[On]:1-fold to 21-fold optics and more (up to 31-fold) HD EX optics zoom.
[Off]:HD EX optical zoom is not performed. It is within the optical zoom range.
What is HD EX optical zoom?
Of the effective pixels of the MOS sensor, approximately 920,000 pixels (equivalent to 1280 x 720
resolution) are cut off from the center and shot. Therefore, using a resolution of less than 1280 x
720 makes it possible to shoot with a higher telephoto effect.
[Digital zoom]
Select the digital zoom setting from the following.
[On]:Use the optical zoom to 1 to 21 times, the HD EX optical zoom to 31 times, and the digital
zoom to 336 times.
[Off]:Digital zoom is not performed.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
227
[Note:]
When [On] is set to Digital Zoom, it stops once just before the Digital Zoom
magnification changes during the zoom operation.
The preset position cannot be set with the digital zoom factor.
If [HD Extra optical zoom] is [Off], [Digital zoom] cannot be set to [On].
[Note:]
When set to • [Pan·Tilt degree/Zoom ratio display], the pan tilt
angles/magnifications are displayed in the [Camera title position] set on the Basic
Page [Basic] tab.
→4.7.2.6 Setting of pan/tilt range (pan/tilt range setting screen)
When set to • [Direction display], the orientation is displayed in the [Camera title
position] you set on the [Basic] tab of the basic page.
→4.7.2.5 Setting for direction/direction setting (direction/direction setting screen)
To select • [Direction display], set the reference northern direction with the
[Direction/Angle setting] [North point setting].
→4.7.2.5 Setting for direction/direction setting (direction/direction setting screen)
Operation mode Display
During startup INITIAL
During auto pan AUTO PAN
Automatic tracking (in progress) AUTO TRACKING
During patrol PATROL
During the preset sequence PRESET SEQ
[Camera position display]
Select the information displayed in the image during manual operation from the following.
[Off]:The information is not displayed in the image.
[Pan tilt angle/magnification display]:Displays pan angle/tilt angle/magnification.
[Directional view]:Displays the direction.
[Operation mode display]
Displays the operation mode when the camera is running automatically.
[On]:Displays the operating mode.
[Off]:The operation mode is not displayed.
[Pan/tilt-flip]
Select the pan/tilt flip setting from the following.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
228
[Note:]
On the TELE side, some parts are not visible even when the pan/tilt flip function is
activated.
In the main area of the live image page, clicking the desired position for the center
of the field angle moves the camera's orientation to the center of the clicked
position. In this case, the operation continues without stopping at the pan tilt end
point.
• During flip movement, the image being moved is displayed.
[Note:]
The screen may be partially darkened if it is directed above-20 degrees.
[On]:When the pan end point and the tilt end point (directly below) are reached during manual
operation, the pan can be automatically rotated at high speed to continue operation without
stopping at the pan end point and the tilt end point.
[Off]:The pan/tilt flip function does not work.
[Tilt Angle]
Select the angle limit of tilt operation from the following. (Horizontal = 0°)
10°/ 5°/ 3°/ 0°/ −3°/ −5°/ −10°/ −15°/ −20°/ −25°/ −30°
[Maximum optical zoom factor]
Select the maximum zoom factor for the optical zoom from the following.
x1/x2/x3/x4/x5/x6/x7/x8/x9/x10/x11/x12/x13/x14/x15/x16/x17/x19/x20/No limit
Maximum optical zoom speed
Select the maximum speed of the optical zoom.
[High]/[Mid]/[Low]
[Maximum panning/tilting speed]
Select the maximum speed for pan tilt operation.
[1°/s], [2°/s], [5°/s], [10°/s], [25°/s], [50°/s], [90°/s], [135°/s], [150°/s],
[300°/s], [Unlimited]
[Focus distance]
If you are viewing a subject through a glass or if you have another subject in the short distance, it
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
229
may be difficult to focus on the subject you want to view. If the camera is not focused properly,
you can limit the shortest shooting distance.
[Unlimited]/[1.5m]/ [3m]/ [5m]/ [10m]
4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
Click on the [Position] tab of the PTZ page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
To Advanced Settings for each item>>Clicking this button displays the advanced settings window
in a separate window and allows you to set the settings while viewing the images displayed on the
[Position] tab.
Here, you can set the image quality adjustment, preset position, preset sequence setting, auto
pan, patrol, direction/direction setting, and pan/tilt range setting.
[Preset position]
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
230
To Advanced Settings>>When the button is clicked, the preset position setting window is
displayed in a separate window.
→4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
[Preset sequence setting]
To Advanced Settings>>When the [button] is clicked, the preset sequence settings window is
displayed in a separate window.
→4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
[Auto pan]
To Advanced Settings>>Click the [Auto Pan] button to display the auto pan setting window in a
separate window.
→4.7.2.3 Set auto pan (Auto pan setting screen)
[Patrol]
To Advanced Settings>>When the [Patrol] button is clicked, the setting window for the patrol is
displayed in another window.
→4.7.2.4 Set patrol (Patrol function setting screen)
[Direction/Angle]
To Advanced Settings>>When the button is clicked, the setting window for direction/direction
setting is displayed in a separate window.
→4.7.2.5 Setting for direction/direction setting (direction/direction setting screen)
[Pan/tilt range setting]
To Advanced Settings>>Click the [Button] button to open a window for specifying the pan/tilt
range.
→4.7.2.6 Setting of pan/tilt range (pan/tilt range setting screen)
4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
In the [Position] tab of the PTZ-page to the Advanced Settings tab of [Preset position]>>Click the
[Button].
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
Here, you can register, change, or delete the preset position.
If you adjust the focus, brightness, zoom, etc., the images on the [Position] tabs will be reflected
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
231
[Important]
・Do not change other settings during preset position setting. The image may not
be displayed correctly.
・The preset position cannot be set with the magnification of the digital zoom.
・Up to 256 preset positions can be set.
at the same time.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
232
[Note:]
・Depending on the operating environment (+5 °C or less as a guideline), the
speed of the preset movement may be slightly slower.
[Important]
・If you have configured [Preset ID (0 – 9,A – Z)] and [Preset ID], be
sure to press [Register].
[Note:]
・When set to [On], the position name is displayed where you set the position in
[Camera title position] on the [Basic] tab.
[Note:]
・The position name entered is displayed next to the preset position number in the
pull-down. If [Preset ID] is set to [On], it can also be displayed on the images.
Preset position setting
[Preset ID]
Use [On] and [Off] to set whether the position name is displayed. You can set for each preset
position.
[On]:Displays the position name.
[Off]:The position name is not displayed.
[Preset ID (0 – 9,A – Z)]
Enter the name to be displayed on the image. You can set for each preset position.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 40 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (single-byte), A-Z (single-byte, uppercase, lowercase), double-byte,
single-byte symbol ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Auto focus]
Use [Auto] and [Off] to set whether auto focus is performed after the preset is moved. You can set
for each preset position.
[Auto]:Auto focus is performed after the preset is moved.
[Off]:Auto focus is not performed after moving the preset.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
233
[Note:]
・When presetting a subject whose depth does not change, a subject whose
contrast is low, or a subject with high brightness such as a spotlight, etc., set
[Off] and register the preset position after setting the focus.
[Note:]
・The preset position set to [Off] does not move to that position during the preset
sequence, but instead moves to the next preset position.
・Depending on the stop time setting, the watch may move to the next preset
position during auto focus operation.
・If the preset sequence function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be
consumed and the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For
consumables, refer to the Web Guide.
[Note:]
・Set [Super Dynamic] to [Off] when the following phenomena are observed
depending on the lighting condition.
-when flickering or color changes occur
-when noise is generated in the bright area of the screen
・If [Light control mode] is set to [Fix shutter], [Super Dynamic] cannot be set to
[On].
・When [Stabilizer] is set to [On], the superdynamic setting is [Off].
[Dwell time]
During the preset sequence operation, select the time to reflect the image of each preset position
(the time when the camera stops rotating) from the following.
[5s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [25s]/ [30s]
[Super Dynamic]
You can set [On] or [Off] to activate the super dynamic function. You can set for each preset
position.
This cannot be set when [Image capture mode] is [16:9 mode(60fps mode)] or [16:9 mode(50fps
mode)].
See [What is Super Dynamic] for details on super dynamic.
[On]:The Super Dynamic function is activated.
[Off]:Stops the superdynamic function.
[Level]
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
234
Adjust the superdynamic level.
When the slider bar is moved in the [+] direction, you can shoot a subject with a large difference in
light and darkness without flipping white or shading black.
Move the slider bar in the [-] direction to take a full picture of the middle brightness.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[BLC/ HLC]
Select from the following. This setting is not available if [Super Dynamic] is set to [On] or
[Intelligent Auto] is set to [On].
[Back Light Correction (BLC)]:Enables the backlight correction function.
[Intensity correction]:Enables the high light correction function. Illumination compensation
suppresses bright lighting of subjects such as car headlights during nighttime.
[Off]:Stops the backlight compensation function and the intense light correction function.
[BLC level]
Adjust the backlight correction level.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction improves the backlight correction effect.
Moving the slider bar in the [-] direction reduces the effect of backlight correction.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[HLC level]
Adjust the intensity correction level.
Moving the slider bar in the [+] direction improves the effect of intense light correction.
Moving the slider bar in the [-] direction reduces the effect of intense light correction.
Press [Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Mask area]
When the mask area is set, the set area can be masked and the light intensity can be adjusted. If
[Super Dynamic] is set to [On], it cannot be set.
For details on how to set the mask area, refer to the following.
→4.6.4.2 Set the mask area
[Zoom], [Focus], Control Pad/Button, [Brightness] Button
Please refer to the following instructions for operation.
→4.6.4.5 Setting the privacy zone (Privacy zone setting screen)
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
235
[Note:]
・When registering the preset position, the camera may move slightly.
・If [Image adjust] [Scene file] is set to other than [Scene file is not applied], [Super
Dynamic], [BLC/ HLC], and [Mask area] cannot be set.
[Set] buttons
Register the preset position.
[Delete] buttons
Deletes the preset position selected by the position number.
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the preset position setting window.
Register the preset position
1 Select the position number.
[Position No.] shows the selected position number.
→4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
If it is already registered, the camera moves to the preset position selected.
2 Move the camera direction in the direction you want to register.
3 If you want the position name to appear on the live image page, set [Preset ID] to [On] and
enter the position name.
4 Set Auto Focus or Stop Time.
5 Press [Register].
6 To set image quality for each position, set each item such as Super Dynamic. [Super
Dynamic], [BLC/ HLC], and [Mask area] are reflected immediately.
4.7.2.2 Set the preset sequence setting (preset sequence setting screen)
To [Preset sequence setting] Advanced Settings on the [Position] tabs of PTZ pages>>Click the
[Button].
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
Here, you can register, change, or delete the preset sequence.
Up to three preset sequences can be set.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
236
Preset sequence setting
Preset Sequence 1, Preset Sequence 2, Preset Sequence 3
The preset sequence can be set.
[Select all] buttons:Select all preset positions.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
237
[Note:]
・When the preset sequence is activated, the registered preset positions are
moved from a younger number to a higher order.
・After moving to the trailing preset position, the system returns to the youngest
number and moves the preset position back in sequence.
[Note:]
・If the auto pan function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be consumed
and the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For consumables, refer
to the Web Guide.
[Cancel all] buttons:You can release all selections.
1～256:Enables/disables the corresponding preset position.
[Set] buttons:Save the settings of the created preset sequence.
4.7.2.3 Set auto pan (Auto pan setting screen)
In the [Position] tab of the PTZ-page to the Advanced Settings tab of [Auto pan]>>Click the
[Button].
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
Here, you can set auto pan.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
238
[Note:]
・The pan, tilt, and zoom operations are also available on the images in the
[Position] tabs.
Setting the end point
[Start position]
Use the [Zoom], [Focus] and Control Pad/Buttons to move the camera to the desired position at
the left end of the auto pan, and then press the [Set] button. Zoom and focus are set at the same
time.
[End position]
Use the Control Pad/Button to move the camera to the desired position for the right end of the
auto pan, and then press the [Set] button.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
239
[Important]
・If you set [Auto pan], be sure to press [Set].
[Note:]
・Even when the magnification of the digital zoom is set, the turn of the pan
operation is performed at a position less than 34 times.
[Note:]
・If the patrol function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be consumed and
the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For consumables, refer to
the Web Guide.
Auto pan operation
[Dwell time]
Select the stop time at the start and end positions from the following.
[0s]/ [1s]/ [2s]/ [3s]/ [4s]/ [5s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [25s]/ [30s]
[Speed]
Select the pivot speed of the pan operation from the following.
[1°/s]、 [2°/s]、 [3°/s]、 [4°/s]、 [5°/s]、 [7°/s]、 [10°/s]、 [13°/s]、 [18°/s]、
[24°/s]
[Zoom], [Focus], Control Pad/Button, [Brightness], and Move presets buttons
Please refer to the following instructions for operation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the auto pan setting screen.
4.7.2.4 Set patrol (Patrol function setting screen)
In the [Position] tab of the PTZ-page to the Advanced Settings tab of [Patrol]>>Click the
[Button]. Here, information about patrols is set.
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
The patrol function stores the pan/tilt/zoom/focus and reproduces the stored operation.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
240
[Note:]
・When the number of memories is changed, the stored patrol operation is deleted.
Patrol setting
[Number of patrol pattern]
Select the number of memories in the patrol. The amount of time that can be stored varies
depending on the number of memories.
1:The operation for 2 minutes is stored in Patrol 1.
2:The operation for one minute is stored in Patrol 1 and Patrol 2.
4:The operation for 30 seconds is stored in Patrol 1, Patrol 2, Patrol 3, and Patrol 4.
[Learn patrol pattern]
Select the patrol number (1 to 4) you want to set by clicking [▼] on the [Patrol No.]. The [*]
mark to the right of the patrol No. indicates that the patrol operation has already been stored.
With Patrol No selected, clicking [Learn] starts storing the camera operation. The characters of
[LEARNING(***S)] are displayed during storage. ***S is the remaining time that can be stored.
When [Stop] is clicked, memory is stopped while the camera is in memory and reproducing is
stopped while the camera is in reproduction. When the remaining time is 0 seconds (0S), the
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
241
[Note:]
・The camera operations to be stored are as follows.
-Operation start position memory
Pan tilt zoom focus position
When operating the camera
Move Pan Tilt Zoom Focus/Preset Position
・The auto focus function does not operate during the patrol operation. At this
time, when zoom in from the WIDE side as a characteristic of the zoom lens, the
focus is blurred. To store the zoom operation, start from the TELE side to
prevent the focus from shifting.
operation stops automatically.
With Patrol No selected, clicking the [Execute] button reproduces the stored operation of the
camera.
[Zoom], [Focus], Control Pad/Button, [Brightness], and Move presets buttons
Please refer to the following instructions for operation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the Patrol Settings window.
4.7.2.5 Setting for direction/direction setting (direction/direction setting screen)
In the [Position] tab of the PTZ-page to the Advanced Settings tab of [Direction/Angle setting]>>
Click the [Button]. Here, you can set the direction/direction setting. When this page is displayed,
it moves to the punch position set to north.
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positions
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
242
Direction/Angle setting
If the [Camera position display] on the [Cam. Function] tab of the PTZ page is set to [Direction
display], the 8-directions are displayed in the preset position title display position.
[North point setting]
Set the orientation to be displayed as north (N) by adjusting the orientation of the pan and
pressing [Set].
[Display character setting]
Individual names can be set for each direction/direction.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
243
[Note:]
・Tilts are not set in the 0° direction.
・Changing the 0° direction of the pan does not change the position of the preset
position already set. The set auto pan turns within the same range as before the
change. Similarly, the same operation as before the change is performed for the
patrol setting.
[N]:Set the north direction name.
[NE]:Set the name in the northeast direction.
[E]:Set the name in the east direction.
[SE]:Set the name in the southeast direction.
[S]:Set the name in the southern direction.
[SW]:Set the name in the southwest direction.
[W]:Set the name in the west direction.
[NW]:Set the name in the northwestern direction.
[Panning 0° direction setting]
Set the direction of the pan to 0°. If you adjust the field angle with the control pad/button and
click the [Set] button, the direction of the pan you are presently pointing to will be 0°. Press
[Reset] to return to the default settings.
[Zoom], [Focus], Control Pad/Button, [Brightness], and Move presets buttons
Please refer to the following instructions for operation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the direction/direction setting window.
4.7.2.6 Setting of pan/tilt range (pan/tilt range setting screen)
In the [Position] tab of the PTZ-page to the Advanced Settings tab of [Pan/tilt range setting]>>
Click the [Button].
→4.7.2 [Position] for setting positionsHere, the range of pan tilt is set.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
244
[Note:]
・The [Left end] angle should be smaller than the [Right end] angle and the
[Bottom end] angle should be larger than the [Top end] angle.
・Set [Pan/tilt range setting] on a screen that is not zoomed in.
If you set the display size to 1.0 times (x1) on the zoomed display, a larger area
than when the display was set (enlarged display) is displayed.
Pan/tilt range setting
On/Off sets whether to enable the range that restricts the pan tilt operation.
Set [On] and use the control pads/buttons to adjust the field angle to set [Left end], [Right end],
[Top end] and [Bottom end].
[Left end]/[Right end]/[Top end]/[Bottom end]
Adjust the angle of view with the control pad/button and press the [Set] button to view the angle
at the set position.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
245
・Incorrect settings may cause you to view unexpected camera images. After
setting, be sure to check the image using the pan tilt operation.
・Configure [Pan/tilt range setting] prior to setting the preset position. If the
preset position is outside the range of [Pan/tilt range setting], the preset position
stops at the end of the range.
・When the pantilt range setting screen is displayed, the zoom factor is 1.0 times.
During [Pan/tilt range setting], [PT LIMIT SETTING] is displayed in the images.
-If you do not operate for 5 minutes, the [Pan/tilt range setting] [Set] will be
disabled. To continue the operation, display the [Pan/tilt range setting] window
again and set it.
[Note:]
・The [Left end] angle should be smaller than the [Right end] angle and the
[Bottom end] angle should be larger than the [Top end] angle.
If [Upside-down] is set to [On], the [Bottom end] angle must be less than the
[Top end] angle.
・Set [Pan/tilt range setting] on a screen that is not zoomed in.
If you set the display size to 1.0 times (x1) on the zoomed display, a larger area
than when the display was set (enlarged display) is displayed.
・Incorrect settings may cause you to view unexpected camera images. After
setting, be sure to check the image using the pan tilt operation.
・Configure [Pan/tilt range setting] prior to setting the preset position. If the
preset position is outside the range of [Pan/tilt range setting], the preset position
stops at the end of the range.
・When the pantilt range setting screen is displayed, the zoom factor is 1.0 times.
During [Pan/tilt range setting], [PT LIMIT SETTING] is displayed in the images.
-If you do not operate for 5 minutes, the [Pan/tilt range setting] [Set] will be
disabled. To continue the operation, display the [Pan/tilt range setting] window
again and set it.
4.7.3 Set auto-tracking (Auto-tracking screen)
Click on the [Auto track setting] tab of the PTZ page.
Here, you can register, change, or delete auto tracking settings.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
246
[Note:]
・Automatic tracking is not available in the following cases.
-When [Image capture mode] is [16:9 mode(60fps mode)], [16:9 mode(50fps
mode)], [4:3 mode(15fps mode)], or [4:3 mode(12.5fps mode)]
-When the [Light control mode] [Maximum shutter] of [Image adjust] is set to the
following
Maximum 2/30s/Maximum 4/30s/Maximum 6/30s/Maximum 10/30s/Maximum
16/30s
・If the automatic tracking function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be
consumed and the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For
consumables, refer to the Web Guide.
Automatic tracking is a function that automatically tracks and shoots an object when it is detected
in a predetermined auto pan, preset sequence/preset position, patrol, or area.
Basic settings
[Detection object]
The object to be detected can be selected. You can select multiple objects.
[Human]:Automatic tracking is performed when a person is detected.
[Vehicle]:Automatic tracking is performed when a car is detected.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
247
[Note:]
・The size is only a guide. Depending on the environmental conditions and tracking
conditions, the assumed size may not be achieved.
・Increasing the size of the object to be tracked reduces the tracking performance.
[Note:]
・The lower the sensitivity, the less false detection due to wooden shaking, but the
lower the tracking performance. On the other hand, higher sensitivity improves
tracking performance, but it also increases false detection. Set according to the
environment.
[Note:]
・After the maximum tracking time, the camera stops in that position. When the
auto mode operation is restored, the self-return time is counted and the auto
mode operation is restored after the tracking is stopped by setting the self-return.
[Bicycle]:Automatic tracking is performed when a motorcycle is detected.
[Object size]
Select the size at tracking from the following.
[Small (1/4 of the image)]:Zoom the tracking object to the monitor screen up to about 1/4
(vertical) size.
[Medium (1/2 of the image)]:Zoom the tracking object to the monitor screen up to about 1/2
(vertical) size.
[Large (3/4 of the image)]:Zoom the tracking object to the monitor screen up to approximately
3/4 (vertical) size.
[No size adjustment]:Zoom control is not performed during tracking.
[Sensitivity]
Select the sensitivity during tracking from the following.
[High]/[Middle]/[Low]
[Longest tracking time]
Select the time from below from the start of auto-tracking to forced termination.
[Off(Unlimited)]/[10s]/[20s]/[30s]/[40s]/[50s]/[1min]/[2min]/[3min]/[5min]/[10min]
[Auto track data in video stream]
Select whether to send the superimposed image data by adding auto-tracking information to the
image.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
248
[Off]:Automatic tracking information is not added to the image.
[On]:This feature adds automatic tracking information to images, but does not display target
frames for objects under automatic tracking in live pictures.
[On (with track video display)]:This feature adds auto-tracking information to images and displays
the target frame for objects under auto-tracking in live pictures.
Auto tracking start setting
[Auto pan]
Select whether or not to automatically track the user during auto panning.
[Enable]:Automatic tracking is started during auto panning.
[Disable]:Automatic tracking is not started during auto pan.
[Preset sequence/Preset position]
Choose whether to auto track in preset sequence or in preset position.
[Enable]:Automatic tracking is started during the preset sequence or in the preset position.
[Disable]:Automatic tracking is not started during preset sequence or preset position.
[Preset position selection]
[Select all] buttons:Select all preset positions.
[Cancel all] buttons:You can release all selections.
1～256:Toggle the corresponding preset position [On] or [Off].
[Set] buttons:Save the settings of the created preset sequence.
[Patrol]
Select whether or not to automatically track when a tracking target is detected during patrol.
[Enable]:Start automatic tracking during patrol.
[Disable]:Automatic tracking is not started during patrol.
Auto Track Activation Setting (Area)
[Area select]
When [Detection object] appears in the specified area, auto tracking can be started.
Eight areas can be set.
[Set] buttons:Set the auto tracking start area to the specified area No.
[Delete] buttons:Deletes the auto tracking area set to the specified area number.
[Cancel] buttons:Cancels the setting of the currently set auto tracking area.
[Zoom], [Focus], Control Pad/Button, [Brightness], and Move presets buttons
Please refer to the following instructions for operation.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
249
[Important]
・In the following cases, the target subject may not be tracked or may malfunction.
Low contrast between the subject and the background
If the dome is moist or dirty
Large variation in illumination
When there are many movements other than the subject
When the subject moves directly below the camera
If flickering is severe
-reflection of light through windows, reflection of road surfaces, reflection of
backlight into the dome, etc.
When a tracking object is hidden in the pole or behind the object.
-when multiple subjects intersect or crowd
When the subject moves too fast or too slowly
-if the subject is too small or too large
If the camera is swaying
If the weather is very bad
-when the image correction function is ON
・It is recommended to use the product in the following installation environment to
increase the detection accuracy.
--more than about 1/5 (vertical) of the size of the monitor screen
・We shall not be liable for any inconvenience, damage, or damage caused by the
automatic tracking function settings or the results.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
[Close] buttons
Click this button to close the Auto Tracking Settings window.
Procedure for setting automatic tracking linkage
When two or more cameras with automatic tracking function are used, the tracking of objects can
be coordinated between the cameras.
(Automatic Tracking Coordination Function)
As an example, as shown in the figure below, the procedure for setting the connection from
Camera 1 (IP address: 192.168.0.11) to Camera 2 (IP address: 192.168.0.12) when the tracking
target enters the alarm area No.1.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
250
1 Set the alarm area for the area for which automatic tracking is desired in Camera 1.
① The auto tracking setting screen is displayed.
② Select [On(In preset alarm area)] in [Auto track alarm] and press [Set].
③ In the Alarm area [Area select], select 1 from the [Area No.] pull-down.
④ While looking at the screen, perform pan tilt zoom to set the alarm area.
⑤ Press [Set].
2 Set the preset position to move when receiving the unique notification command in camera 2.
(Set the preset position so that the alarm area No.1 of Camera 1 set in step 1 enters the
screen.)
① The preset position setting screen is displayed.
→4.7.2.1 Set the preset position (preset position setting screen)
② Select the desired number from the [Preset] pull-down list.
③ While viewing the screen, set the preset position by using the pan tilt zoom.
④ Press [Register].
3 Set Camera 1 (IP address: 192.168.0.11) to notify the command.
① The Alarm Page [Notification] window is displayed.
→4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification
② Set [TCP alarm notification] to [On] and press [Set].
③ In the [Destination of notification] [Notify Destination 1] (which may be selected), check
the [Alarm] checkbox and insert 192.168.0.12 in the [Destination address].
④ Set [Auto track cooperation] to [On] and select Alarm area No. 1.
⑤ Press [Set].
4 Set Camera 2 (IP address: 192.168.0.12) to receive the command.
① The Alarm Page [Alarm] window is displayed.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
251
[Note:]
・Automatic tracking is not available in the following cases.
-When [Image capture mode] is [16:9 (60 fps mode)], [16:9 (50 fps mode)], [4:3
(15 fps mode)], [4:3 (12.5 fps mode)]
-When the [Light control mode] [Maximum shutter] of [Image adjust] is set to the
following
Maximum 2/30s/Maximum 4/30s/Maximum 6/30s/Maximum 10/30s/Maximum
16/30s
・If the automatic tracking function is used for a long time, the drive parts may be
consumed and the replacement cycle of consumables may be faster. For
consumables, refer to the Web Guide.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
② Set the [Alarm] [Command alarm] to [On] and press [Set].
③ Set the [Camera action on alarm] [Command alarm] to [Preset per sender] and press
[Preset per sender].
④ On the Preset by Source window, check Auto Tracking of [Source Address 1] (any Source
Address may be selected), enter the Source Address 192.168.0.11 (Camera 1), select the
preset position to move when receiving the command set in step 2, click [Set], and close
the pages.
→4.8.4.1 Set the preset position by source (screen for setting preset position by source)
⑤ Press [Set].
5 By starting the automatic tracking operation of camera 1, the automatic tracking linkage
function can be used.
4.7.4 Set Auto Track Alarm (Auto Track Alarm screen)
Click on the [Auto track alarm setting] tab of the PTZ page. Here, you can set the automatic
tracking alarm.
The auto tracking function automatically tracks and shoots the subject when movement is
detected in the pre-set alarm area.
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
252
[Auto track alarm]
Select the alarm during automatic tracking from the following.
[Off]:Alarm is not output.
[On (Immediate)]:During automatic tracking, the alarm will continue to be output. The output
interval is every 5 seconds.
[On (After alarm wait time)]:The alarm is output only once when automatic tracking continues for
a certain period of time.
[On (In preset alarm area)]:During automatic tracking, the alarm is output only once when a
4 Advanced settings
4.7 Set PTZ
253
[Note:]
・The alarm area cannot be set individually for each preset position. The
configured area is valid for all preset positions.
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
tracking object is in the set alarm area. Refer to [Alarm area] for the alarm settings.
[Alarm wait time]
If [Auto track alarm] is set to [On(After alarm wait time)], select the set time from the following.
[1s]/ [10s]/ [30s]/ [1min]/ [3min]/ [5min]
Alarm area
[Area select]
Click [▼] on the [Area No.] and select the area number (1 to 8) to be set. The [*] mark to the
right of the area No. indicates that the area is already stored. The alarm area is enabled when On
(when the alarm area enters) is selected for automatic tracking alarm.
[Area No. notification]
Clicking [TCP alarm notification setup] displays the [Notification] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
The alarm page is used to set the alarm operation using the external I/O terminal of the camera,
the alarm image, the area to detect the alarm, and the alarm notification. The Alarm page consists
of the [Alarm], [VMD area], [SCD area], [Audio detection], and [Notification] tabs.
4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Click [Alarm] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the Advanced
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
254
menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
This is used to set the operation when an alarm is detected. For the alarm image and output
terminal settings, refer to the following.
→4.8.4 [Alarm] to set alarm linkage operation
→4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
Alarm
[Terminal 1]
Set the operation of terminal 1.
[Off]:Not used
[Alarm input (TRM1)]:The alarm input is received. When Alarm is selected, a pull-down menu
([Close], [Open], [Close(Continue)], [Open(Continue)]) is displayed.
–[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected.
–[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected.
–[Close (Continue)]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Close], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
–[Open (continue)]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Open], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
[Black and white switching input]:The black-and-white selector input is received. (When the input
is [On], the input is switched to black and white)
[Automatic Time Adjustment]:Time setting by terminal input is accepted. When the signal is
input, set to 00 minutes 00 seconds if the time difference from the normal time (00 minutes per
hour) is 29 minutes or less. In the case of returning the time less than 5 seconds during SD
recording, the time is not changed. Selecting Auto Time Adjustment displays the pull-down menu
for short circuit and release selection.
–[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], the time is automatically adjusted.
–[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], the time is automatically adjusted.
[Terminal 2]
Set the operation of terminal 2.
[Off]:Not used
[Alarm input (TRM2)]:The alarm input is received. When Alarm is selected, a pull-down menu
([Close], [Open], [Close(Continue)], [Open(Continue)]) is displayed.
–[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
255
[Important]
・It takes approximately 100 ms or longer to detect an alarm input to a short circuit
(ON) or an alarm input to an open circuit (OFF) of the external I/O terminal. The
alarm input will not be detected until the time set by [Alarm deactivation time]
has elapsed.
[Note:]
・AUX is a camera terminal that can be operated (opened/closed) by the operator
from the live image page. For example, when you want to operate lighting in the
location where the camera is installed, you can operate it remotely by connecting
it to a lighting control device.
・For the input/output ratings of each terminal, refer to the installation manual of
the model.
–[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected.
–[Close (Continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected. When
the terminal status is [Close], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
–[Open (continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Open], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
[Alarm Output]:Alarm outputs according to the setting in [Output terminal].
→4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
[Terminal 3]
Set the operation of terminal 3.
[Off]:Not used
[Alarm input (TRM3)]:The alarm input is received. When Alarm is selected, a pull-down menu
([Close], [Open], [Close(Continue)], [Open(Continue)]) is displayed.
–[Close]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected.
–[Open]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected.
–[Close (Continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Close], an alarm is detected. When
the terminal status is [Close], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
–[Open (continued)]:When the terminal status changes to [Open], an alarm is detected. When the
terminal status is [Open], the alarm is detected periodically at intervals of no alarm detection
time.
[Aux output]:AUX output is performed. The [AUX] buttons appear on the live picture pages.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
256
[VMD alarm]
Clicking [VMD] displays the [VMD area] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm]
Clicking [SCD] displays the [SCD area] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas
[Auto track alarm]
Clicking [Auto track setting] displays the [Auto track alarm setting] tabs for the PTZ pages.
→4.7.4 Set Auto Track Alarm (Auto Track Alarm screen)
[Audio detection alarm]
Clicking [Audio detection] displays the [Audio detection] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.9 [Audio detection] for setting sound detection
[Command alarm]
Use [On] or [Off] to specify whether or not to accept the command alarm.
Command alarm is a function to receive unique alarm notification from other cameras. When set to
[On], the alarms can be operated in conjunction with several cameras.
[Reception port]
Set the port number to which the command alarm is received.
Settable range:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80、 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、 1883、
8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Alarm deactivation time]
Sets the time when the alarm is detected and the detection operation is not executed. For
example, this setting prevents sending too much mail to a mobile terminal or a tablet terminal
when it is set to send mail notification by an alarm.
5 ～ 600s
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
257
[Note:]
・Alarm detection time is managed for each alarm type. For example, the operation
detection alarm and disturbance detection alarm are detected even during the no
alarm detection time of the command alarm.
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
[Note:]
・When the alarm test function is executed, the computer detects the command
alarm.
This function can be used to record an SD Memory Card triggered by alarm
detection or to confirm notification to an external device. Use the external device
specified as the notification destination and the system log of this equipment to
check the related settings.
・The alarm test function cannot be generated more than once within the alarm
detection time.
[Alarm test]
Clicking [Execute] performs the alarm test function.
4.8.2 [Alarm] for setting the output terminal
Click [Alarm] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the Advanced
menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the output terminal is set.
Output terminal
For the output terminal function, the [Terminal 2] of the [Alarm] setting must be set to [Alarm
output].
[Terminal output upon alarm detection]
Sets on/off whether an alarm signal is output to the output terminal when an alarm is detected.
[SD memory card error]
The [On] or [Off] is used to determine whether to output signals to the output terminals when an
SD memory card alarm is detected.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
258
[Important]
・To use this function correctly, format the SD Memory Card on your computer
before using the SD Memory Card.
[Note:]
・Operation time: For 6 years, the power-on time after the SD card is inserted into
the camera, and for 2000 times, the upper limit of the number of business SD
Memory Card (MLC type) rewrites is used as a guide, and this does not guarantee
a durability period.
・The output terminal and SD Memory Card Alarm use the same output terminal.
・When either an alarm or SD Memory Card alarm is activated, a signal is output to
the output terminal.
・When an SD Memory Card Alarm is detected, the [Alarm Notice] on the live
image page is popped out. Click the [x] button of [Alarm notification] to clear the
[Alarm notification] display.
・The output signal output by the SD Memory Card alarm depends on the alarm
format setting.
In the case of latches: The output signal continues for the duration of the cause of
the SD Memory Card warning even after the alarm notification is cleared.
For pulses: The signal output of the output terminal continues while the cause of
the SD Memory Card warning persists even after the alarm notification is cleared.
However, when the time set in [Alarm output time] has elapsed, the signal output
of the output terminal stops.
SD Memory Card Alarm Detection Conditions: SD Memory Card error (write error, read error,
etc.), Operating time: 6 years, Overwrite count: 2,000 times
[On]:When the alarm condition is detected, a signal is output to the output terminal and [Alarm
notification] of the live picture is popupped.
[Off]:Stops detecting the alarm condition.
[Terminal state upon alarm detection]
Set the output terminal operation when an alarm is detected to either [Latch] or [Pulse].
[Latch]:When an alarm is detected, the alarm output terminal is set to [Terminal action upon
alarm detection] until [x] is clicked in [Alarm notification].
[Pulse]:When an alarm is detected, the terminal at the time of alarm outputting is set by [Terminal
action upon alarm detection] for the period set by [Pulse output width]. Click the [x] button of
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
259
[Note:]
・When set to [Open], the alarm will be output for approximately 20 seconds when
the power to the computer is turned on.
[Alarm notification] to return the output terminal to the normal state.
[Terminal action upon alarm detection]
Set the output status of the alarm output from the output terminal by [Open] or [Close].
[Open]:Set the alarm output terminal to Open (usually Close).
[Close]:The terminal at the time of alarm output is closed (normally open).
[Pulse output width]
Sets the time when the alarm is output from the output terminal when [Pulse] is selected in
[Terminal state upon alarm detection].
Settable range:1～120s
4.8.3 [Alarm] to change the aux name
Click [Alarm] on the Alarm page. (See the following for how to display and operate the Advanced
menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
You can change the [AUX], [Open], and [Close] names for live picture pages.
AUX title
[AUX (Up to 10 characters)]
Enter the [AUX] name for the live picture page.
Characters that cannot be entered:Half-pitch symbol " &
[Open (Up to 5 characters)]
Enter the [Open] name for the [AUX] buttons on the live picture pages.
Characters that cannot be entered:Half-pitch symbol " &
[Close (Up to 5 characters)]
Enter the [Close] name for the [AUX] buttons on the live picture pages.
Characters that cannot be entered:Half-pitch symbol " &
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
260
[Note:]
・The AUX name can be changed when [Terminal 3] in the [Alarm] setting is set to
[AUX output].
・AUX is a camera terminal that can be operated (Open/Close) by the operator
from the live picture page. For example, when you want to operate lighting in the
location where the camera is installed, you can operate it remotely by connecting
it to a lighting control device.
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[PTZ] [Terminal alarm 1], [Terminal alarm 2], [Terminal alarm 3], [VMD alarm],
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm], [Audio detection alarm], and [Command
alarm] can only be set for PTZ cameras.
4.8.4 [Alarm] to set alarm linkage operation
Click [Alarm] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the Advanced
menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
This section sets the function to operate in conjunction with the alarm.
[Terminal alarm 1]Select the action to be interlocked when terminal alarm 1 is detected from the
following. This can be set when [Terminal 1] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM1)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 1 is detected.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, the watch moves to the preset
position when terminal alarm 1 is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When terminal alarm 1 is detected, patrol starts. *When Patrol 1 is not registered, it is
not displayed.
[Terminal alarm 2]
Select the action to be interlocked when terminal alarm 2 is detected from the following. This can
be set when [Terminal 2] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM2)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 2 is detected.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, it moves to the position when
terminal alarm 2 is detected.
[Patrol 2]:When terminal alarm 2 is detected, patrol starts. *When Patrol 2 is not registered, it is
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
261
not displayed.
[Terminal alarm 3]
Select the action to interlock when terminal alarm 3 is detected from the following. This can be set
when [Terminal 3] of the alarm is set to [Alarm input(TRM3)].
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if terminal alarm 3 is detected.
1～256:Select the preset position registered beforehand to move to the position when terminal
alarm 3 is detected.
[Patrol 3]:When terminal alarm 3 is detected, patrol starts. *When Patrol 3 is not registered, it is
not displayed.
[VMD alarm]
Select the action to be linked to the alarm detected by the motion detector from the following.
[Off]:When an alarm is detected by the motion detector, interlock operation is not performed.
1～256:Selecting the preset position registered beforehand moves the watch to the position when
an alarm is detected by the motion detector.
[Patrol 1]:When an alarm is detected by the motion detector, a patrol is started. *When Patrol 1
is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Scene change detection (SCD) alarm]
Select the action to be interlocked when an alarm is detected by the undesired signal detection
from the following.
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if an alarm is detected by undesired signal detection.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, the watch moves to the preset
position when an alarm due to disturbance detection is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When an alarm is detected by the disturbance detection, a patrol is started. *When
Patrol 1 is not registered, it is not displayed.
[Audio detection alarm]
Select the action to be linked to the alarm detected by the sound detection from the following.
[Off]:The product does not perform interlocked operation even if an alarm is detected by sound
detection.
1～256:When the preset position registered in advance is selected, the watch moves to the preset
position when an alarm is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When an alarm is detected by sound detection, patrol is started. *When Patrol 1 is not
registered, it is not displayed.
[Command alarm]
Select the action to be linked to the alarm by the command alarm from the following. This can be
set when [Command alarm] is set to [On].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
262
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] Only Multi-directional cameras with integrated Multi-directional/
PTZ cameras can be set to [Action at the time of a command alarm].
[Off]:The product does not operate in conjunction with the command alarm.
1～256:Selecting the preset position registered in advance moves the camera to the position when
a command alarm is detected.
[Patrol 1]:When a command alarm is detected, a patrol is started. *When Patrol 1 is not
registered, it is not displayed.
Source-specific preset position:Register the address of the sender of the command alarm and the
preset position corresponding to that address, and move to that position when the alarm is
detected by the command alarm.
When [Preset per sender] is clicked, a separate window opens showing the settings for the
source-specific preset position.
→4.8.4.1 Set the preset position by source (screen for setting preset position by source)
Command Alarm Action-Source Address
The IP address of the PTZ camera for the Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera is displayed.
Operation at Command AlarmInterlocked operation
Select the action linked to the command alarm when received from the following.
[Off]:Interlock operation is not performed even if a command alarm is received.
[Alarm interlock]:Alarm operation is performed after the command alarm is received.
[Switching between black and white]:Switches between black and white after receiving the
command alarm.
[Automatic Time Adjustment]:Adjusts the time after the command alarm is received.
[Alarm E-mail notification]
When [E-mail notification setup] is clicked, the setting window for the e-mail when the alarm is
generated is displayed in a separate window.
→4.8.4.2 Mail sending when an alarm is generated
[Alarm image FTP/SFTP transmission]
When [FTP/SFTP setup] is clicked, a separate window is displayed for FTP/SFTP sending when
an alarm is generated.
→4.8.4.3 Set up FTP/SFTP transmission when an alarm is generated
[Alarm image recording(SD memory card)]
When [SD memory card setup] is clicked, the settings for recording to the SD Memory Card when
an alarm is generated are displayed in a separate window.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
263
→4.8.4.4 Sets recording data to SD Memory Card when alarm is generated.
[TCP alarm notification]
When [TCP alarm notification setup] is clicked, the setting window for sending unique alarm
notification when alarm is generated is displayed in a separate window.
→4.8.4.5 Sets unique alarm notification when an alarm is generated.
[HTTP alarm notification]
When [HTTP alarm notification setup] is clicked, the setting window for sending HTTP alarm
notification when alarm is generated is displayed in a separate window.
→4.8.4.6 Sets HTTP alarm notification when an alarm is generated.
[SNMP transmission upon alarm detection]
When [To SNMP setting] is clicked, the setting window for sending SNMP when an alarm is
generated is displayed in a separate window.
→4.8.4.7 Set SNMP transmission when an alarm is generated.
4.8.4.1 Set the preset position by source (screen for setting preset position by source)
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [Preset per sender] in [Command alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Here, the address of the source of the command alarm and the preset position corresponding to
that address are registered.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
264
[Sender's address 1] through [Sender's address 48]
Set the IP address of the sender of the command alarm and the preset position to move
corresponding to the IP address. You can set up to 48 notifications.
[Notification per Camera]
If the transmission source is a Multi-directional camera, select the camera number of the
transmission source. Otherwise, select [1].
[On]/[Off] (Alarm area no. interlock)
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether or not to link with [Alarm area No.].
[Alarm area No.]
When [Alarm Area No. Interlock] is set, select the sender alarm area No. from 1 to 8.
[On]/[Off] (Reception setting during live view)
On/Off is used to select whether to link with the clicking operation of the live image of the
Multi-directional camera.
[Close] buttons
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
265
[Note:]
・Only models with FTP/SFTP functions can be set.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
Click this button to close the Source-Specific Preset Position window.
4.8.4.2 Mail sending when an alarm is generated
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [E-mail notification setup] in [Camera action on
alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.10.2.1 Set mail sending
4.8.4.3 Set up FTP/SFTP transmission when an alarm is generated
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [FTP/SFTP setup] in [Camera action on alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.10.2.2 Configuring FTP/SFTP transmission function
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
266
4.8.4.4 Sets recording data to SD Memory Card when alarm is generated.
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [SD memory card setup] in [Camera action on alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
267
[Note:]
・[PTZ] Up to four areas can be set for each preset position (up to 256).
・[PTZ] You can also set the alarm operation when the camera is at a position other
than the preset position.
・[MULTI] Up to four areas can be set for each camera.
4.8.4.5 Sets unique alarm notification when an alarm is generated.
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [TCP alarm notification setup] in [Camera action on
alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.8.10.1 Set unique alarm notification
4.8.4.6 Sets HTTP alarm notification when an alarm is generated.
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [HTTP alarm notification setup] in [Camera action on
alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.8.10.2 Set the HTTP alarm notification
4.8.4.7 Set SNMP transmission when an alarm is generated.
On the [Alarm] tab of the Alarm page, press [To SNMP setting] in [Camera action on alarm].
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Refer to the following for the setting method.
→4.10.2.7 Set SNMP
4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection
Click [VMD area] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the area for detecting the movement of an object using the motion detector function is set.
An alarm is activated when the movement of an object in the set area is detected.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
268
[Important]
・When the motion detector function is used to detect the movement of an object,
[Alarm notification] is displayed for confirmation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
・[Alarm notification] is also displayed when the alarm input is received with the
terminal alarm or when the command alarm is received.
・Depending on the network environment, notification may be delayed.
・If the [Image capture mode] of the [Basic] tabs is changed after the operation
detection area is set, the operation detection area may be misaligned. Be sure to
check the setting of the motion detection area again.
・When [Intelligent Auto] is set to [On], the operation detection alarm may be
generated because the brightness of the entire image changes depending on the
subject's condition. In this case, set one of the following settings.
-Set [Illumination detection suppression] to [On] for motion detection.
-Adjust the slider bar of the [Detection sensitivity] in the motion detection area
to the [Low] direction.
Adjust the [Face priority level (Brightness)] slider bar of the intelligent auto to
[-].
・The motion detector function is not intended to prevent theft, fire, etc. We will
not be liable for any accident or damage.
[Note:]
・[PTZ]Only the PTZ camera can be set for position selection and information
addition setting screen.
Position Selection and Information Addition Setting Screen
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
269
Operation detection area setting
[Select a preset position]
Select the preset position number for which the motion detection area is to be set and press
[Start] to set the motion detection area.
Select [except the preset positions] to set the operation detection area other than the preset
position.
Addition of motion detection information
[Information addition]
Sets whether to send the superimposed image data by [On] or [Off] by adding motion detection
data to the image.
The operation detection information can be used by some of the search functions of the network
disk recorder manufactured by us.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
270
For details of the functions and settings, refer to the instruction manual of the connected device.
Operation detection area setting screen
PTZ camera
[Area]
When the motion detection area is selected in the image, it is set in order from Area 1.
[All areas] buttons
Clicking this button selects the entire area as the motion detection area and sets it to the
[1(White)] of [Area].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
271
[Important]
・If the lighting intensity is small, it may be impossible to suppress it.
・When the illumination detection suppression is set to [On] and the subject with
movement throughout the screen is detected, the operation detection may not be
performed.
[Status]
Enable/disable operation detection.
[On]:Operation detection is performed.
[Off]:Operation detection is not performed.
[Detection area]
Set the area of the slider bar to detect movement of the subject in the motion detection area. The
smaller the set value, the smaller the movement of the subject is detected. The current setting (1
to 10) is displayed to the right of the slider bar.
[Detection sensitivity]
Use the slider bar to set the sensitivity for detecting movement in the area. Individual settings can
be made for each area. The larger the set value, the easier it is to sense the movement.
The current setting (1 (Low) to 15 (High)) is displayed under the slider bar.
[Delete] buttons
Click the area button to delete the area frame.
[Light detection control]
Use the [On] and [Off] buttons to specify whether or not the operation is not detected due to
changes in the illumination.
[Area No. notification]
Clicking [TCP alarm notification setup] displays the [Notification] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
Addition of motion detection information
[Information addition]
Adds motion detection information to images and sets on/off whether to transmit superimposed
image data. The operation detection information can be used by some of the search functions of
the network disk recorder manufactured by us. For details of the functions and settings, refer to
the instruction manual of the connected device.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
272
Multi-directional camera
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set the area from each camera.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
273
[Important]
・If the lighting intensity is small, it may be impossible to suppress it.
・When the illumination detection suppression is set to [On] and the subject with
movement throughout the screen is detected, the operation detection may not be
performed.
[Area]
When the motion detection area is selected in the image, it is set in order from Area 1.
[Status]
Enable/disable operation detection.
[On]:Operation detection is performed.
[Off]:Operation detection is not performed.
[Detection area]
Set the area of the slider bar to detect movement of the subject in the motion detection area. The
smaller the set value, the smaller the movement of the subject is detected. The current setting (1
to 10) is displayed to the right of the slider bar.
[Detection sensitivity]
Use the slider bar to set the sensitivity for detecting movement in the area. Individual settings can
be made for each area. The larger the set value, the easier it is to sense the movement.
The current setting (1 (Low) to 15 (High)) is displayed under the slider bar.
[Delete] buttons
Click the area button to delete the area frame.
[Light detection control]
Use the [On] and [Off] buttons to specify whether or not the operation is not detected due to
changes in the illumination.
[Area No. notification]
Clicking [TCP alarm notification setup] displays the [Notification] tabs on the Alarm Page.
→4.8.1 [Alarm] to set alarm operation
VMD information addition
[Information addition]
Sets whether to send the superimposed image data by [On] or [Off] by adding motion detection
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
274
[Important]
・All alarms are not detected while the setting is being changed on the setting
screen. Close the setting screen after setting is completed.
data to the image. The operation detection information can be used by some of the search
functions of the network disk recorder manufactured by us. For details of the functions and
settings, refer to the instruction manual of the connected device.
4.8.6 [VMD area] to set the motion detection area
Set the motion detection area.
1 When you drag the mouse on the image and specify an area, the specified area is set to Area
[1(White)] and a frame is displayed.
Areas are set from the first to the first area number. The color next to the area number
indicates the corresponding color of the frame. In addition, the frame [Status] to be set for
the area becomes [On].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
275
2 Set the [Detection area] [Detection sensitivity] with the slider bar. See below for [Detection
area] [Detection sensitivity].
→4.8.5 [VMD area] for setting motion detection
The area displayed and the movement detection status at the detection sensitivity are
displayed in [Detection area]. Modify areas and [Detection area] [Detection sensitivity] as
required.
3 When you are finished, press [Set].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
276
[Important]
・If you do not press the [Set] buttons, the settings will not be confirmed.
[Important]
・In the following cases, the undesired signal detection function will not work for a
while.
After turning on the power
-after changing the undesired detection setting
-when the image angle of the machine changes
・When a disturbance is detected using the disturbance detection function, [Alarm
notification] is displayed for confirmation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
・[Alarm notification] is also displayed when an alarm input is received with a
terminal alarm or other alarm such as an operation detection alarm is generated.
・If you change the [Image capture mode] of the [Image] after you set up the
disturbance detection area, the disturbance detection area may be misaligned. Be
sure to reconfirm the settings of the disturbance detection area.
・In the following cases, disturbance detection may not be detected.
If only part of the screen is covered or transparent
-when the camera is oriented in a similar manner before and after the camera
4 To disable the motion detection area, change the [Status] of the area in question to [Off] and
click [Set]. The disabled box will be dotted.
When disabled, no alarm is generated even if there is a change in the area.
5 To delete an area for motion detection, click [Delete] in the area to delete to delete the area
frame.
6 When [Set] is clicked, the settings are reflected in the computer.
4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
This section sets the disturbance detection function.
The jamming detection function activates an alarm when the camera detects a change in the
subject by covering the camera with a cloth or a lid or changing the orientation of the camera
significantly. You can set up one area. When disturbance is detected in the set area, an alarm is
activated.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
277
-if a privacy zone is set
・If the [Detection Time] setting of the disturbance detection function is shorter
than the [Dwell time] setting of the [Black-and-white switching], the disturbance
detection alarm may be generated when the color image and black-and-white
image are switched. The [Detection Time] setting of the disturbance detection
function can be improved by making it longer than the [Dwell time] of [Black/
white switching].
・When the color of the image is close to monochrome, it is difficult to detect
disturbance. If undesired detection is difficult, increase the [Detection sensitivity]
setting of the undesired detection function or increase the area of the undesired
detection function.
・The disturbance detection function is not used to prevent theft, fire, etc. We will
not be liable for any accident or damage.
[Important]
・In the following cases, the undesired signal detection function will not work for a
while.
After turning on the power
-after changing the undesired detection setting
-when the image angle of the machine changes
・When a disturbance is detected using the disturbance detection function, [Alarm
notification] is displayed for confirmation.
→2.3.2 About live image pages
・[Alarm notification] is also displayed when an alarm input is received with a
terminal alarm or other alarm such as an operation detection alarm is generated.
・If you configure the disturbance detection area and then change the [Image
rotation] or [Image] tab [Image capture mode] on the [Basic] tab, the disturbance
detection area may shift. Be sure to reconfirm the settings of the disturbance
detection area.
・In the following cases, disturbance detection may not be detected.
If only part of the screen is covered or transparent
-when the camera is oriented in a similar manner before and after the camera
-if a privacy zone is set
・If the [Detection Time] setting of the disturbance detection function is shorter
than the [Dwell time] setting of the [Black-and-white switching], the disturbance
detection alarm may be generated when the color image and black-and-white
.
]
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
278
image are switched. The [Detection Time] setting of the disturbance detection
function can be improved by making it longer than the [Dwell time] of [Black/
white switching].
・When the color of the image is close to monochrome, it is difficult to detect
disturbance. If undesired detection is difficult, increase the [Detection sensitivity]
setting of the undesired detection function or increase the area of the undesired
detection function.
・The disturbance detection function is not used to prevent theft, fire, etc. We will
not be liable for any accident or damage.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
[Camera selection]
Select the camera to set the area from each camera.
[Area]
Set the disturbance detection area in the image.
[All areas]
Click this button to set the entire area as a disturbance detection area.
[Status]
Use the [On] and [Off] buttons to specify whether or not to perform undesired detection.
[On]: Detects disturbance.
[Off]: No disturbance detection is performed.
[Detection area]
Set the area for detecting movement of the subject in the disturbance detection area to [Small],
[Middle] and [Large].
[Detection sensitivity]
The sensitivities for detection of disturbance in the area are set from [Very Low], [Low], [Middle],
and [High].
[Detection Time]
Sets the time from when the subject changes to when the disturbance detection alarm is activated.
The alarm does not operate when the subject changes only within the set time.
[3s]/ [5s]/ [10s]/ [30s]/ [1min]
[Delete] buttons
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
279
[Note:]
・Additional disturbance detection information is not used by our network disk
recorders (as of April 2022).
[Important]
・All alarms are not detected while the setting is being changed on the setting
screen. Close the setting screen after setting is completed.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] [Camera selection] can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
Click to delete the area frame.
SCD information addition
[Information addition]
Set [On] and [Off] to send superimposed image data by adding undesired detection data to the
image.
4.8.8 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection areas
Set the disturbance detection area.
1 Select the camera from which the area is to be set by [Camera selection].
2 When you drag the mouse on the image and specify an area, the specified area is set to the
area (white) and a frame is displayed. In addition, [Status] becomes [On].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
280
[Important]
・If you do not press the [Set] buttons, the settings will not be confirmed.
3 Set [Detection area] [Detection sensitivity] [Discovery Time]. See the table below for
[Detection area] [Detection sensitivity].
→4.8.7 [SCD area] to set up undesired detection
Change the area or [Detection area] [Detection sensitivity] as required.
4 When you have finished setting, press [Set].
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
281
[Important]
・When the sound detection function is used to detect sound, [Alarm generation
notification] is displayed so that the sound detection is confirmed.
・[Alarm notification] is also displayed when the alarm input is received with the
terminal alarm or when the command alarm is received.
・Depending on the network environment, notification may be delayed.
・The sound detection function is not suitable for applications that require high
reliability at all times (systems designed to prevent problems). We will not be
liable for any accident or damage.
5 To disable the disturbance detection area, change [Status] to [Off] and press [Set]. Click this
button to display a dotted line with the disabled frame color. When disabled, no alarm is
generated by undesired disturbance detection.
6 To delete the undesired detection area, press [Delete]. Click to clear the area frame.
7 When [Set] is clicked, the settings are reflected in the computer.
4.8.9 [Audio detection] for setting sound detection
Click [Audio detection] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the sound detection setting is performed.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
282
[Note:]
・When installing cameras indoors, it is recommended that [Sense Level] be set to
[Low].
[Audio detection]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to perform sound detection.
[On]:Sound detection is performed.
[Off]:Sound detection is not performed.
[Detection sensitivity]
Select the sensitivity of detection from the [Low] [Middle] [High].
[AI analytics target]
Select the target for detecting AI tone identification.
• [Gunshot]: Detects gunshot, explosive, shock and bursting sounds.
• [Yell]: It detects human screams and crys.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
283
[Note:]
・In the following cases, the target sound may not be detected.
-if the duration of the cry/horn/glass break is shorter than 1 second
When the difference between the noise of interest and ambient noise is less than 6
dB
If the rain hits the camera microphone directly
・When multiple types of target sounds are generated at the same time, only one
type of alarm is notified.
・The message ID of the unique alarm notification for AI sound identification is as
follows.
Used for registering sound identification alarms with a recorder or our video
monitoring software.
BOOK: 70
--a broken glass: 71
-horn: 72
--shriek: 73
Other: 55
・When an alarm notification for AI sound identification is received by a recorder,
etc., the alarm cannot be received by a recorder etc. during the alarm mask
period.
• [Vehicle horn]: Detects the horn of the car.
• [Glass break]: Detects the cracking of windows.
[Other]: Detects other sounds than gunshot, screech, horn, or cracking of glasses.
4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification
Click [Notification] on the Alarm page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
This is used to set the unique alarm notification and HTTP alarm notification.
4.8.10.1 Set unique alarm notification
Unique alarm notification
[TCP alarm notification]
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
284
[Note:]
・Notification of unique alarms is made in the order from [Notify Party 1] (only when
checked in the [Alarm] or [Diag.] field).
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to perform unique alarm notification in the following
cases.
・When an alarm is generated (unique alarm notification destination: [Alarm] field)
・When notifying the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card (unique alarm notifying
destination: [Diag.] field)
・When there is insufficient space on the SD Memory Card (unique alarm notification destination:
[Diag.] field)
・When recognizing an SD Memory Card error (Original alarm notification destination: [Diag.]
field)
・When writing to SD Memory Card is failed (unique alarm notification destination: [Diag.] field)
・Upon expiration of the trial period of the function extension software (original alarm notification
destination: [Diag.] field)
[Additional alarm data]
Sets ON/OFF whether the detection area number of the operation detection alarm is notified by
the unique alarm.
[Destination port]
Set the receiving port number of the unique alarm notification destination.
Settable range:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Retry times]
Set the number of retries when the unique alarm notification cannot be performed.
Settable range:0～30
Destination of notification
PTZ camera
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
285
[Important]
・If you want to enter a hostname for [Destination address], you must configure the
DNS on the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
・Make sure that the notification destination is set correctly. If the notification
destination does not exist, a proprietary alarm notification delay or transmission
failure may occur.
[Address 1] ～ [Address 8]
Set the unique alarm notification destination with IP address or host name. You can set up to 8
notification destinations.
[Alarm] field:When the checkbox is checked, the alarm will be notified.
[Diag.] field:When checked, notification of the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card, lack of
free space of the SD Memory Card, SD Memory Card recognition error, SD Memory Card write
error, and expiration of the trial period of the function extension software are notified.
[Destination server address] field:Enter the IP address or host name of the notification destination.
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols: . _ ‑
To delete the specified notification destination, press [Delete] for the notification destination to
be deleted.
[Auto track cooperation]
ON/OFF is used to set whether or not automatic tracking linkage is set.
When [Auto track cooperation] is set to [On], alarm notification is executed only when [Alarm
Area No.] matches the [Alarm area] number set for auto-tracking alarm. Alarm notification other
than the automatic tracking alarm is not performed. When using the Auto Tracking Coordination
function, set the alarm area condition in Auto Tracking to [On].
[Alarm area No.]
Settable range:1～4
Multi-directional camera
[Address 1] ～ [Address 48]
Set the unique alarm notification destination with IP address or host name. You can set up to 48
notifications.
[Alarm] field:When the checkbox is checked, the alarm will be notified.
[Diag.] field:When checked, notification of the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card, lack of
free space of the SD Memory Card, SD Memory Card recognition error, SD Memory Card write
error, and expiration of the trial period of the function extension software are notified.
[Destination server address] field:Enter the IP address or host name of the notification destination.
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
286
[Note:]
・[MULTI] This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual
mode or Panorama mode.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] This item is not displayed when [Image capture mode] is in Quad/Dual
mode or Panorama mode.
[Important]
・If you want to enter a hostname for [Destination address], you must configure the
DNS on the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
・Make sure that the notification destination is set correctly. If the notification
destination does not exist, a proprietary alarm notification delay or transmission
failure may occur.
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols: . _ ‑
To delete the specified notification destination, press [Delete] for the notification destination to
be deleted.
[Notification per Camera]
ON/OFF is used to specify whether or not to execute the transmission setting by camera.
When [Notification per Camera] is set to [On], [Camera No.] is notified when [Camera No.]
matches the number of the camera that generated the operation detection alarm or when [Camera
No.] matches the camera number of the clicked live display.
[camera No.]
Settable range: 1 to 4
[Notification per VMD area]
ON/OFF is used to set whether the operation detection area-specific transmission is set.
When [Notification per VMD area] is set to [On], alarm notification is executed only when [Alarm
Area No.] matches the [Alarm area] number set for the operation detection alarm. Alarm
notification other than the operation detection alarm is not performed. When using the operation
detection area-specific transmission function, set the alarm area status for operation detection to
[On].
[Alarm area No.]
Settable range:1～8
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
287
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] Multi-directional camera with integrated Multi-directional/PTZ
can be set up to Notification Destination 4.
[Note:]
・Basic or Digest authentication is performed by an HTTP server authentication
request.
4.8.10.2 Set the HTTP alarm notification
HTTP alarm notification
[Address 1] ～ [Address 5]
Set the IP address or host name of the HTTP server that notifies the HTTP alarm. You can set up
to 5 notification destinations.
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols: . _ ‑
Example of entry:
Http://IP address: port number or http://host name: port number
Https://IP address: port number or https://host name: port number
[Alarm] field
When an alarm is generated, the HTTP alarm notification is executed.
[Delete] buttons
When this button is clicked, all notifications, user names, passwords, and notification data set for
the item are deleted.
[User name]
Enter the user name that accesses the HTTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 63 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ￥
[Password]
Enter the password to access the HTTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 63 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Notification data]
Set the notification content to be added after the HTTP server set to [Address 1] ～ [Address 5].
Input Characters:Half mark alphanumeric characters and marks
4 Advanced settings
4.8 [Alarm] to set the alarm
288
[Note:]
・If the HTTP alarm function is enabled, the authentication information (user name,
password) of the HTTP server may be leaked on the network when the alarm is
notified to the HTTP server.
・The number of characters to be notified (including [http://]) and [Notification
data] is limited to 256 characters.
・Be sure to enter the [Notification data] from the slash (/).
・If an HTTP alarm notification fails, it is listed in the system log.
・If [Notification data] is blank and [Set] is pressed, [/cgi-bin/comarm.cgi?
CMD=01] is also set.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] [PTZ interlocked operation] can be set only for Multi-directional
cameras with a Multi-directional/PTZ integrated camera.
Example:
If [/cgi-bin/comalarms.cgi?CMD=01] is set as the notification destination and [/cgi-bin/
comalarms.cgi?CMD=01] is set to the notification destination, the HTTP alarm notification with
http://192.168.0.100/cg i-bin/commalm.cgi?CMD=01 is executed.
[PTZ linkage operation]
This is the setting to perform the operation in cooperation with the PTZ camera. The HTTPS URL
of the PTZ camera is automatically displayed.
[Alarm] field
When checked, the PTZ camera works in conjunction with the camera.
[User name]
The Multi-directional camera administrator user name is automatically displayed.
[Password]
The Multi-directional camera administrator password is automatically displayed.
[Notification data]
It is displayed as blank.
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
On the user management page, authentication registration is performed to restrict users and PCs
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
289
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・If you fail user authentication (authentication error) eight or more times in 30
seconds from a PC with the same IP address, you will not be able to access the
machine for a while.
(IP addresses) that can be accessed from a PC, mobile terminal, or tablet terminal.
User-managed pages consist of the [User auth.], [Host auth.], [IEEE 802.1X], and [Data
encryption] tabs.
4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
On the Users Administration page, press the [User auth.] tab. Refer to the following how to
display and operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, authentication settings are made to restrict users who can access the computer from a PC,
mobile terminal, or tablet terminal. Up to 24 users can be registered.
[User auth.]
Use [On] and [Off] to set whether to authenticate users.
[Guest User]
Select whether to set unregistered users. Selecting [Use] enables you to configure both available
and unavailable features for non-user-authenticated users.
[Authentication]
Set the authentication method to use for user authentication.
Digest or Basic:Use digest or basic authentication.
Digest:Use digest authentication.
Basic:Use basic authentication.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
290
[Note:]
・To ensure security, [Digest] is recommended for [Authentication]. If you use
[Digest or Basic] or [Basic], [User name] and [Password] may leak.
・If you change the [Authentication] setting, close the web browser and re-access
it.
[Note:]
・Enter the registered user name and press [Register] to overwrite the user
information.
[Note:]
・Enter case-sensitive data.
・Use at least three of the following passwords: uppercase alphabetic characters,
lowercase alphabetic characters, numbers, and symbols.
・Configure the password so that it does not contain the user name.
[User name registration]
At the time of new registration, a new username is registered in [User name]. By clicking [▼] on
the [User name registration], you can check the registered users. Registered users are displayed
in [Registered Username [Access level]]. (e.g., admin [1])
Clicking Change on the right-hand side displays the selected user [User name] and allows the user
to change the password. You can delete the selected users by clicking [Delete].
[User name (1 to 32 characters)]
Provide User Name
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ￥
[Password]/[Password (8 to 32 characters)]
Type a password.
Number of characters that can be entered:8 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Access level]
Set the user access level from the following.
1. [Administrator]You can perform all operations on this unit.
2. [Camera control]:Set the access level to camera control. By operating the function selected in
[Access Level] I'll do.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
291
Live image
selection
Right to select the image to be displayed in live
picture
Listen to Setting authority of earpiece voice (heard on PC)
Speak to Setting authority for voice transmission (speaking
from PC)
Image update
interval
Right to set the interval for updating the JPEG image
Snapshot Snapshot operation privileges
Recording and
playback (Log
display)
Log display operation privileges
Manual
recording/
deletion
SD Memory Card saving/deletion privilege
Preset Operation privileges for the preset position
movement
Pan/tilt
operation
Pan/tilt operation authority
Zoom
operation
Zoom operation authority
Focus
operation
Focus operation privileges
3. [Live view]:Set the access level to live image display. Operating the function selected in
[Access Level] You can.
[Access Level]
Select a function that can be used according to the user's access level (camera control, live image
display, unregistered user).
・If [User auth.] is set to [Off] and [Guest User] is set to [Not use]:
[Access Level] items cannot be set. In addition, all buttons are displayed in the live picture, but
authentication is required for the [Set] button.
・If [User auth.] is set to [Off] and [Guest User] is set to [Use]:
You can set the [Guest User] items.
・If [User auth.] is set to [On]:
[Guest User] items cannot be set.
Configure these features:
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
292
Automatic
mode
Auto mode operation privileges
Brightness Authority to set brightness
AUX Aux setting authority
Preset
position
setting
Operation authority of preset position setting
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・Register the IP addresses of the PCs, and then set [Host auth.] to [On].
・User authentication is required when user authentication is [On], regardless of
how hosted authentication is configured.
[Note:]
・If you enter IP Address/Mask Length for the subnet, you can restrict the PC that
can be accessed for each subnet. For example, if you enter [192.168.0.1/24] and
select [2. Camera control] as the access level, PCs [192.168.0.1] through
[192.168.0.254] can access the computer at the [2. Camera control] access level.
]
4.9.2 [Host auth.] to configure host-authentication
On the Users Administration page, press the [Host auth.] tab. Refer to the following how to
display and operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the host authentication setting that restricts the PC (IP address) to which the computer can
be accessed is performed.
[Host auth.]
On/Off is used to specify whether or not to perform host authentication.
[IP address]
Enter the IP address of the PC to allow access to the computer. You cannot enter a host name as
an IP address.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
293
・Enter the registered IP address and press [Register] to overwrite the host
information.
・If the error message [Set Address] is displayed, the IP address of the PC may not
be set correctly. Check the IP address of the PC.
・If you receive an error message [Register the [IP address] of the PC used for
setting and then set [Host auth.] to [On]], the IP address of the PC may not be
set correctly. Reaffirm the IP address setting of the PC.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The priority stream can be selected only for Multi-directional cameras.
[Access level]
Select the host access level from the following.
1. Administrator/2. Camera control/3. Live only
Please refer to the following for the access level.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
[Host check]
Click [▼] on the [Host check] to check the IP addresses of registered hosts.
Hosts are displayed as Registered IP Addresses [Access level]. (e.g. 192.168.0.21 [1])
You can delete the selected hosts (IP addresses) by clicking [Delete].
4.9.3 [System] to set preference streams
On the Users Administration page, press the [System] tab.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, you can configure a priority stream that delivers images without reducing image quality or
image update speed, even if multiple users have access to it at the same time.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
294
[Note:]
・If [Activation] is set to [On], the number of accessible users might be limited.
[Note:]
・[MULTI2U] Only [Destination IP address(1)] can be set.
Priority stream
[Activation]
On/Off determines whether to use priority stream delivery.
[Destination IP address(1)]
Enter the IP address of the first destination.
[Destination IP address(2)]
Enter the IP address of the second destination.
[Stream type]
Select either [Stream(1)] or [Stream(2)].
[Stream (1)]:The stream (1) image is delivered.
[Stream (2)]:The stream (2) image is delivered.
4.9.4 [IEEE 802.1X] to configure IEEE 802.1X
On the Users Admin page, press [IEEE 802.1X]. Refer to the following how to display and operate
the Advanced menu.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
295
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, settings are made for IEEE 802.1X.
This function can be used to build a secure network environment using the authentication LAN
switch. For authentication LAN switches, contact your network administrator. The procedure
varies depending on the [EAP method]. Follow the procedure below. If [IEEE 802.1X] is [On],
start the setting with [IEEE 802.1X] set to [Off].
[IEEE 802.1X]
Configure on/off whether to perform port authentication by IEEE 802.1X.
[User name]
Enter the user name that accesses the authentication LAN switch or the user name registered
with the server.
Enter any username if it is not registered on the server.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Full-pitch and half-pitch alphanumeric characters " & : ; ￥
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
296
■CA Certificate Specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Data format PEM format or DER
format
Extension pem or der
Maximum number of
certificates included in
the PEM format
1 piece
Maximum certificate size About 10 kB
[Note:]
・Verify that the CA certificate has not expired. If you use an expired certificate,
you may not be able to connect to the authentication LAN switch.
■Specification of Client Certificate with Private Key or Private Key
Item Specifications Remarks
Data format PEM format or PFX
format
Extension pem or pfx
[Password] [Retype password]
Enter the password to access the authentication LAN switch.
Number of characters that can be entered:4 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Full-pitch and half-pitch alphanumeric characters " &
[CA Certificate] ‑ [Certificate install]
Install the root CA certificate. Do not include intermediate CA certificates.
Only when [IEEE 802.1X] is [Off] can you install it.
[CA Certificate] ‑ [Information]
Not installed:Have no certificates installed
[CA certificate host name]:Displayed when installed
[Expired]:Certificate expired
The [Execute] buttons enable you to view more information about CA certificates.
You can delete a CA certificate by using the [Delete] buttons.
[Private key or Client Certificate including private key]-[Installation]
Install a client certificate that contains a private key or private key.
Only when [IEEE 802.1X] is [Off] can you install it.
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
297
■Specification of Client Certificate with Private Key or Private Key
(continued)
Key length [bit] 1024/ 1536/ 2048/
3072/ 4096
Maximum number of
certificates included in the
PEM format
6 pieces
Maximum certificate size
(including intermediate CA
certificates)
About 10 kB
■ Client Certificate Specifications
Item Specifications Remarks
Data format PEM format Extension pem
Maximum number of
certificates included in the
PEM format
6 pieces
Maximum certificate size
(including intermediate CA
certificates)
About 10 kB
・[Private key or Client Certificate including private key]-[Password(0 to 30 characters)]
Enter the password if the private key is encrypted or if the password is set on a PFX client
certificate. If it is not encrypted, leave it blank.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 30 characters
・[Private key or Client Certificate including private key]-[Install status of private key]
Not installed:If not installed
Installed:If installed
The [Delete] buttons allow you to delete private keys.
・[Client Certificate] ‑ [Installation]
Install the client certificate.
If it is signed by an intermediate CA, install it with the intermediate CA certificate on the client
certificate.
Only when [IEEE 802.1X] is [Off] can you install it.
[Client Certificate] ‑ [Information]
Not installed:Have no certificates installed
[Host name of the certificate]:Displayed when installed
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
298
[Note:]
・Make sure the client certificate has not expired. If you use an expired certificate,
you may not be able to connect to the authentication LAN switch.
[Expired]:Certificate expired
The [Execute] buttons enable you to view more information about client certificates.
You can delete client certificates by using the [Delete] buttons.
[EAP method]
Select the authentication method from [EAP-MD5], [EAP-PEAP], and [EAP-TLS].
EAP‑MD5/EAP‑PEAP
1 Select [On] in [IEEE 802.1X].
2 Select [EAP-MD5] or [EAP-PEAP] in [EAP method].
3 Enter [User name] and [Password]/[Retype password] and press [Set].
EAP‑TLS
1 In the [CA Certificate] [Certificate install], click the Select Files button, select the CA
certificate, and then click the [Execute] button.
[Information] displays the host name (Common Name) you specified when creating certificates.
2 Click the File button on the Client Certificate that contains the private key or private key
and select the client certificate that contains the private key or private key.
3 Enter [Password] if the private key is encrypted or if the password is set to a PFX-based
client certificate. If it is not encrypted, leave it blank.
4 You install by clicking [Execute].
[Installed] is displayed on the [Install status of private key].
For Client Certificates containing private keys, the [Client Certificate] [Information] also
displays [Installed].
5 If you installed a private key in step 2, click the Select Files button on the [Client
Certificate], select the client certificate, and then click the [Execute] button.
[Information] displays the host name (Common Name) you specified when creating certificates.
6 Select [On] in [IEEE 802.1X] and select [EAP-TLS] in [EAP method].
7 Enter the user name registered with the server in [User name] and press [Set].
Enter any username if it is not registered on the server.
You do not need to enter [Password]/[Retype password].
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
299
[Note:]
・To delete individual certificates, set [IEEE 802.1X] to [Off].
・Confirm that the CA and client certificates have not expired. The port
authentication feature may not be available if it is expired.
[Important]
・If the camera cannot be accessed for some reason after the camera is set to [On]
by [IEEE 802.1X], connect the camera to an unauthenticated switch or port.
IEEE802.1X will be disabled and the camera will be accessible.
・If the client certificate contains an intermediate CA certificate, the client
certificate must be first followed by the order of the intermediate CA certificate.
Example of [CA Certificate Confirmation] window
[Client Certificate Confirmation Screen] example
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
300
・When a certificate exceeding 10 kB is installed, no error is displayed during
installation, but error may occur during connection.
[Important]
・The default password is the [Serial no.] displayed on the [Upgrade] screen of the
[Maintenance] tab. Be sure to change the password when using data encryption.
・When setting data encryption to [On], it is recommended that the total bit rate
of the streams be set to 16 Mbps or less.
・When data encryption is set to [On], images cannot be viewed by browsers. To
view the encrypted video, use our compatible equipment.
・Data-encrypted MP4 files and JPEG images cannot be viewed on the browser
playback page. Download to the PC and check with the decoding tool. For
decoding tools, our technical information website<Control No. C0310>Please
.
4.9.5 [Data encryption] for setting up data encryption
On the Users Admin page, press [Data encryption]. Refer to the following how to display and
operate the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the data encryption settings are made.
The data encryption settings for each camera are described below.
PTZ camera
Click + on the left side of the setting screen to expand the item and display the detailed setting.
Click-> on the left of each expanded item to return to the previous window.
[Data encryption (Batch change)]Use [On]/[Off] to enable/disable encryption.
[On]:Enable data encryption. Encrypt all streams, all JPEG, and audio [AAC-LC].
[Off]:Disables data encryption.
[Stream], [JPEG]
[On] and [Off] individually configure whether to enable data encryption for each stream and each
JPEG.
[Encryption password], [Retype encryption password]
Set the data encryption password.
Number of characters that can be entered:4 to 16 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
301
refer to.
[Note:]
・If [Data encryption (Batch change)] is [On], the audio [AAC-LC] is encrypted
([G.726] [G.711] is not encrypted). To encrypt both video and audio, set [Data
encryption (Batch change)] to [On] and set the audio [Audio input encoding
format] to [AAC-LC].
・For encrypted MP4 files and JPEG images, the video can be viewed using a
decoding tool.
Displaying pull-down menus when data encryption is enabled
For streams with data encryption enabled in both the [Live view] pull-down menu and the
in-screen pull-down menu<Encrypted>The message is displayed.
[Live view] pull-down menu on the live screen
[Live view] pull-down menu in the setting window
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
302
[Important]
・JPEG cannot encrypt data.
・The default password is the [Serial no.] displayed on the [Upgrade] screen of the
[Maintenance] tab. Be sure to change the password when using data encryption.
・When setting data encryption to [On], it is recommended that the total bit rate
Multi-directional camera
Set the data encryption for each stream separately.
[Stream]
Enable/disable data encryption for each stream separately.
[Encryption password], [Retype encryption password]
Set the data encryption password.
Number of characters that can be entered:4～16
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
303
of the streams be set to 64 Mbps or less.
・The data-encrypted MP4 file cannot be viewed on the browser playback page.
Download to the PC and check with the decoding tool. For decoding tools, our
technical information website<Control No. C0310>Please refer to.
→2.8 Play back images on the SD Memory Card
[Note:]
・When the [Data encryption] of all streams is set to [On], the audio [AAC-LC] is
encrypted ([G.726] [G.711] is not encrypted). If [AAC-LC] is selected in [Audio
input encoding format], the sound will not be played while JPEG is displayed in
live picture.
・For encrypted MP4 files, the video can be viewed using the decryption tool.
Displaying pull-down menus when data encryption is enabled
For streams with data encryption enabled in the [Live view] pull-down menu<Encrypted>The
message is displayed. Also, in the pull-down menu in the setting screen, streams with valid data
encryption are displayed in <>.
[Live view] pull-down menu on the live screen
[Live view] pull-down menu in the setting window
4 Advanced settings
4.9 [User mng.] to set authentication
304
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
Network pages configure network settings.
Network pages consist of the [Network] tab and the [Advanced] tab.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
305
[Note:]
・Contact your network administrator for the address settings for each server.
・To connect a camera to a router and access the camera via the Internet, you
must configure a separate HTTP port number for each network camera, and use
the router's port forwarding features to translate addresses. For details, refer to
your router's instruction manual.
・Port forwarding functions are used to convert global IP addresses to private IP
addresses, such as Static IP Mascalade and Network Address Translation (NAT).
This feature is configured on the router.
4.10.1 Networking [Network]
On the Network Page, press the [Network] tab. Refer to the following how to display and operate
the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
The following information is required to configure the network.
Check with your network administrator or Internet service provider.
・IP address
・Subnet Mask
・Default Gateway (with Gateway Server Router)
・HTTP port
・Primary server address for DNS, secondary server address (when DNS is used)
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
306
[Note:]
・If the IP address cannot be retrieved from the DHCP server in AutoIP, search for
the IP address that is not used in the same network between 169.254.1.0 and
169.254.254.255 and set the IP address.
・[MULTI_PTZ] In DHCP/Auto setting (Omakase), if the DHCP server is not
found, set the IP address of the PTZ camera to 192.168.0.10 and the IP address o
f
the Multi-directional camera to 192.168.0.11.
[Note:]
・Multiple IP addresses are not available even when the DHCP function is used.
Contact your network administrator for the DHCP server configuration.
IPv4 network
[Network Settings]
Select how to set the IP address.
[Fixed IP]:Enter the IP address into the [IP address(IPv4)] to set the IP address.
[DHCP]:Set the IP address using the DHCP function. If you cannot obtain an IP address from the
DHCP server, set the IP address to 192.168.0.10. Subsequently, if you obtain an IP address from
a DHCP server, you change it to the IP address.
[Auto(AutoIP)]:Set the IP address using the DHCP function. If the DHCP server is not found, the
IP address is automatically configured.
[Auto(Advanced)]:Using the DHCP function, refer to the network address information and set the
unused IP address to the camera as the fixed IP address. The camera automatically determines the
set IP address within the range of the subnet mask. If the DHCP server is not found, set the IP
address to 192.168.0.10.
[IP address(IPv4)]
When the DHCP function is not used, enter the IP address of the computer. Do not overlap with
the IP address set on the PC or other network camera.
[Subnet mask]
When the DHCP function is not used, enter the subnet mask of the computer.
[Default gateway]
If you do not use the DHCP function, enter the default gateway for your computer.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
307
[Note:]
・Multiple IP addresses are not available for the default gateway, even if you use the
DHCP facility. Contact your network administrator for the DHCP server
configuration.
[Important]
・When IPv6 is accessed, the stream image cannot be displayed on the live screen.
If you want to display the stream image on the live screen, please access it via
IPv4.
[Note:]
・When connecting over a router with a manually configured IP address, enable the
automatic configuration feature for IPv6 addresses using IPv6-compatible routers.
Configure an IPv6 address that contains prefix information provided by
IPv6-compatible routers. For details, refer to your router's instruction manual.
[DNS]
Specify whether the DNS server addresses are automatically acquired ([Auto]) or manually
entered ([Manual]).
When set to [Manual], you need to configure the DNS server IP addresses.
If you use the DHCP function, you can automatically obtain the DNS server address by setting it
to [Auto].
Contact your system administrator for the setting.
[Primary server address], [Secondary server address]
If you use [DNS] with [Manual], enter the IP address of the DNS server.
Contact your system administrator for the IP address of the DNS server.
IPv6 network
[Manual]
Configure [On] and [Off] to manually configure IPv6 addresses.
[On]:Manually enter the IPv6 address.
[Off]:IPv6 address cannot be entered manually.
[IP address(IPv6)]
If [Manual] is set to [On], IPv6 addresses must be entered manually.
Enter to avoid duplication with other devices.
[Default gateway]
Enter the default gateway for the IPv6 network when the IPv6 network [Manual] is [On].
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
308
[Note:]
・Some ports may not be accessed by some browsers. If access is lost, use HTTPS
or the i-PRO Setup Tool (iCT) to change the port number.
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
[DHCPv6]
You can configure [On]/[Off] to use the IPv6 DHCP feature.
Configure the DHCP server so that the PC and other network cameras that do not use the DHCP
function do not have the same IP address. Contact your network administrator for server
configuration.
[Primary DNS server address], [Secondary DNS server address]
Enter the IPv6 address of the DNS server. Contact your system administrator for the IPv6 address
of the DNS server.
Common
[HTTP port]
Assign individual port numbers.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80、 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Line speed]
Select the data communication speed from the following. Normally, it is recommended to use the
default [Auto].
[Auto]:The communication speed is set automatically.
[100 M‑Full]:100 Mbps full duplex
[100 M‑Half]:100 Mbps half duplex
[10 M‑Full]:10 Mbps full duplex
[10 M‑Half]:10 Mbps half duplex
[Max RTP packet size]
Set whether to limit the size of RTP packets sent from the camera when viewing camera images
using RTP. Normally, it is recommended to use the [1,500 bytes] option.
If the packet size of the communication line is limited, select [Restricted (1280 bytes)]. Contact
the network administrator for the maximum packet size of the communication line.
[HTTP max segment size(MSS)]
Set whether to limit the maximum segment size (MSS) sent from the camera when viewing the
camera image using HTTP. Usually, it is recommended to use the default settings.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
309
[Note:]
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・If [64 kbps] is selected, set the [Audio transmission mode] on the [Audio] tab to
[Off].
→4.6.5 [Audio] for setting sound
・If [Bandwidth control(bit rate)] is set low, the snapshot button may not work
depending on the operating environment. If so, select [JPEG] on the live page and
run the snapshot with the smallest resolution delivered.
・[MULTI] When playing back images stored on the SD Memory Card, the
[Bandwidth control(bit rate)] must be set to [Unlimited] or above [51200 kbps].
If the maximum segment size (MSS) of the communication line to be used is limited, select [1024
Byte]/[Restricted (1280 Byte)]. Contact your network administrator for the maximum segment
size (MSS) of the communication line.
[Bandwidth control(bit rate)]
Select the amount of data delivered from the following.
WV-X86531-Z2_MULTI、 WV-X86530-Z2_MULTI、 WV-S85702-F3L、 WV-S85402-V2L
[Unlimited]/ 4096kbps/ 6144kbps/ 8192kbps/ 10240kbps/ 12288kbps/ 15360kbps/ 20480kbps/
25600kbps/ 30720kbps/ 35840kbps/ 40960kbps/ 51200kbps/ 61440kbps/ 81920kbps/
102400kbps/ 153600kbps
WV-X86531-Z2_PTZ、 WV-X86530-Z2_PTZ
[Unlimited]/ 64kbps/ 128kbps/ 256kbps/ 384kbps/ 512kbps/ 768kbps/ 1024kbps/ 2048kbps/
4096kbps/ 6144kbps/ 8192kbps/ 10240kbps/ 15360kbps/ 20480kbps/ 25600kbps/ 30720kbps/
35840kbps/ 40960kbps/ 51200kbps
WV-U85402-V2L
[Unlimited]/ 128kbps/ 256kbps/ 384kbps/ 512kbps/ 768kbps/ 1024kbps/ 2048kbps/
4096kbps/ 6144kbps/ 8192kbps/ 10240kbps/ 15360kbps/ 20480kbps/ 25600kbps/
30720kbps/ 35840kbps/ 40960kbps/ 51200kbps/ 61440kbps
[Easy IP Setup accommodate period]
Set the time to enable Network Settings from IP-based Simple Configuration Software to either
[20min] or [Unlimited] after the computer starts.
[20 minutes]:The camera setting operation using the IP easy setting software is enabled only for
20 minutes after starting the machine.
[Unlimited]:The camera setting operation in the IP easy setting software is always enabled.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
310
[Note:]
・Camera display with the IP easy setting software is always enabled and the camera
screen can be opened.
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[FTP access to camera]
Select [Allow] or [Forbid] to determine whether to allow or forbid the FTP access to camera.
[Allow]:Allow to access FTP to the camera.
[Forbid]:Forbid to access FTP to the camera.
[ONVIF®]
Use [On]/[Off] to set whether to use the ONVIF function.
[Enable]:You can use the ONVIF function.
[Disabled]:The ONVIF function cannot be used.
4.10.2 [Advanced] for advanced networking settings
On the Network Page, press the [Advanced] tab. Refer to the following how to display and operate
the Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, the SMTP (mail), FTP/SFTP, NTP, UPnP, HTTPS, DDNS, SNMP, QoS, SRTP, and MQTT
functions are set.
Click the link to each item to navigate to each setting page.
4.10.2.1 Set mail sending
[E-mail notification]
On/Off is used to specify whether to send mail in the following cases.
When an alarm is activated (e-mail to [Alarm] field)
When notifying the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card (mail notifying destination: [Diag.]
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
311
[Important]
・To enter a hostname for [SMTP server address] [POP server address], you must
configure the DNS on the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
field)
When the free space of the SD Memory Card is insufficient (mail to send message to: [Diag.] field)
SD Memory Card recognition errors (mail notification destination: [Diag.] field)
When writing to SD Memory Card is failed (unique alarm notification destination: [Diag.] field)
[Alarm image attachment]
On/Off sets whether or not to attach images when sending mail by alarm detection.
[Image capture size]
Select the resolution of the image to be attached to the alarm mail from the following.
JPEG(1)/ JPEG(2)
[SMTP server address]
Enter the IP address or host name of the SMTP server to send e-mail.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . _ ‑
[SMTP port]
Enter the port number to send mail.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80、 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、 1883、
8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[POP server address]
If you selected [POP before SMTP] in [Type], enter the IP address or hostname of the POP
server.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . _ ‑
Authentication-Type
Select the authentication method for sending mail from the list below.
None:Without authentication
POP before SMTP:Prior to sending e-mail, authenticate the POP server that receives the e-mail.
SMTP:Authenticate the SMTP server.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
312
[Note:]
・If you do not know how to authenticate e-mail, contact your network administrator.
[Note:]
・Some SMTP servers may not support SSL.
・The SMTP over SSL method is supported. STARTTLS is not supported.
・If set to [On], you might need to set the SMTP port number to 465. Check with
your provider for details.
Authentication-User Name
Enter the username that you want to access the server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ¥
Authentication-Password
Enter the password to access the server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 128 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Sender's E-mail address]
Enter the sender's mail address.
The entered mail address is displayed in the From field of the received mail.
Number of characters that can be entered:3 to 128 characters
Input Characters:Half-pitch alphanumeric and half-pitch symbols @ . _ ‑
[SSL]
When sending [Alarm Notification] or [Diag.] mail notification in SSL-encrypted format, set it to
[On]. When set to [On], the authentication method is set to [SMTP]. Configure the [User name]
and [Password] for authentication.
[Address 1] through [Address 4]
Set the mail address of the notification destination. You can set up to 4 notification destinations.
Number of characters that can be entered:3 to 128 characters
Input Characters:Half-pitch alphanumeric and half-pitch symbols @ . _ ‑
To delete a set e-mail address, press [Delete] for the e-mail address to delete.
[Terminal 1]:Mail is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 1.
[Terminal 2]:Mail is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 2.
[Terminal 3]:Mail is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 3.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
313
[Note:]
・Message recipient The diagnostic mail notified when the [Diag.] field is checked
does not reflect the [E-mail subject] and [E-mail body] settings set below.
[VMD]:Mail is notified when operation is detected.
[SCD]:Notifies by e-mail when undesired detection occurs.
[Command Alarm]:Mail notification is executed when a command alarm is entered.
[Audio detection]:Mail is notified when sound is detected.
[Diag.]:
-SD Memory Card Remaining capacity notification
-SD Memory Card with insufficient free space
-SD Memory Card recognition error
[Auto track]:Mail is notified when an automatic tracking alarm is generated.
[E-mail subject(Alarm)]
Enter the subject of the alarm mail.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 50 characters
Use the camera title:The camera title is displayed in the mail subject line.
Cause of alarm:Add an alarm factor to the email subject.
[E-mail subject(Diag.)]
Enter the subject of the diagnosis mail.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 50 characters
Use the camera title:The camera title is displayed in the mail subject line.
[E-mail body(Alarm)]
Enter the body of the alarm message.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 200 characters
Cause of alarm:The alarm cause %p% is added to the message body. The %p% is sent in place of the
cause of the alarm.
For operation detection alarm: "VMD"
For undesired detection alarm: "SCD"
For auto-tracking alarm: "AT"
For intrusion alarm by AI-VMD: "INT"
For residence alarm by AI-VMD: "LOI"
For direction alarm by AI-VMD: "DIR"
For line cross alarm by AI-VMD: CLD
For the terminal alarm: The terminal names set in [Terminal 1], [Terminal 2], and [Terminal 3] of
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
314
[Note:]
・[MULTI] In the case of an operation detection alarm and disturbance detection
alarm, information to identify the camera is given by the detected camera.
For the operation detection alarm of camera 1: "VMD(CH1)"
For the operation detection alarm of camera 2: "VMD(CH2)"
For the operation detection alarm of camera 3: "VMD(CH3)"
For the operation detection alarm of camera 4: "VMD(CH4)"
For undesired detection alarm of camera 1: "SCD (CH1)"
For undesired detection alarm of camera 2: "SCD(CH2)"
For the disturbance detection alarm of camera 3: "SCD(CH3)"
For the disturbance detection alarm of camera 4: "SCD(CH4)"
[Note:]
・If the SD Memory Card has no free space, [SD Memory Card is FULL] or [SD
Memory Card cannot be recognized] is sent.
・By describing the substitute characters in the message text, the cause type and
the time of alarm can be automatically assigned.
Alternate character alarm factor: %p%, occurrence time: %t%
(Example of Use)
When the operation detection alarm is generated at 19:13:24 after setting the
following character string in the mail body.
Set mail text: %p%alarm occurred at %t%.
the [Terminal name]. (For example, if the name of terminal 1 is [Terminal 1], "Terminal 1")
For command alarm: "CMD"
In the case of the sound detection alarm (AI sound identification target: gunshot): "Audio
detection gunshot"
In the case of the sound detection alarm (AI sound identification target: screaming): "Audio
detection yell"
In the case of the sound detection alarm (AI sound identification target: horn): "Audio detection
Vehicle Horn"
In the case of the sound detection alarm (AI sound identification target: cracking of glass): "Audio
detection Glass break"
In the case of sound detection alarm (AI sound identification target: Others): "Audio detection"
Occurrence time:The occurrence time %t% is added to the message text. The %t% is replaced by
the time the alarm occurred (hour: minute: second).
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
315
Message text: ["VMD" alarm was generated at 19:13:24].
If the body is blank, the email languages that are sent are determined by the
[Menu language] of the [Basic].
Specifying [Japanese] sends e-mail in Japanese or in other languages.
[Terminal 1 (Up to 10 characters)]
Enter the name of Terminal 1 used for alarm factors in the mail body.
Characters that cannot be entered:Single-byte characters " &
[Terminal 2 (Up to 10 characters)]
Enter the name of terminal 2 used for alarm factors in the mail body.
Characters that cannot be entered:Single-byte characters " &
[Terminal 3 (Up to 10 characters)]
Enter the name of terminal 3 used for alarm cause in the mail body.
Characters that cannot be entered:Single-byte characters " &
Mail notification example
Mail format when checkbox for camera title is specified in mail subject and check box for alarm
factor/occurrence time is specified in mail body
① The alarm time is assigned.
② The camera title is used for the e-mail subject.
③ The name specified by terminal names 1 to 3, which are alarm factors, is given.
4.10.2.2 Configuring FTP/SFTP transmission function
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) and SFTP (SSH File Transfer Protocol) are file transfer protocols
used to send images to servers.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
316
SFTP can safely send images to the server using an SSH (Secure Shell) encrypted data stream.
The following two transmission functions are available.
・Image sent when alarm is generated
・Transmit images periodically
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
317
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
318
[Important]
・If FTP is selected in the protocol setting, FTP server authentication information
(user name, password) may be leaked on the network when sending images to the
FTP server. Use of SFTP is recommended.
[Transmission protocol]
Configure the protocol with the destination server by selecting it from FTP/SFTP.
SFTP:Use SFTP as the protocol for communicating with the server.
FTP:Use FTP as the protocol to communicate with the server.
Alarm setting
[Alarm image transmission]
When an alarm is detected, [On] and [Off] are used to set whether to send images to the server.
[On]:When an alarm is generated, the image is sent to the server.
[Off]:Images are not sent to the server when an alarm is generated.
[Directory name]
Enter the name of the directory where you want to save the image file.
For example, if you want to specify the ALARM directory under the server root directory, enter
[/ALARM].
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 256 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & ;
[File name]
Enter the file name to send the image to the server. The following file names are actually saved.
File name:File name entered + Date and time (year, month, day, minute, second) + Sequence
number
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & * / : ; < > ? ¥ ¦
If [Alarm image transmission] is [On], the alarm type can be selected from the following.
[Terminal 1]:When an alarm is generated at terminal 1, the image is sent to the server.
[Terminal 2]:The image is sent to the server when an alarm is generated at terminal 2.
[Terminal 3]:The image is sent to the server when an alarm is generated at terminal 3.
[VMD]:The image is sent to the server when the operation is detected.
[SCD]:The image is sent to the server when undesired detection occurs.
[Auto track]:The image is sent to the server when auto-tracking occurs.
[Audio detection]:When sound detection occurs, the image is sent to the server.
Command alarm:When a command alarm is input, the image is sent to the server.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
319
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・If [Transmission protocol] is set to SFTP, [FTP transmission retry] cannot be
set.
[Note:]
・When JPEG (1) is set to the resolution of the image to be sent, the pre-alarm
cannot be set if the resolution of JPEG (1) is larger than [1920x1080].
・When the image quality control at alarm is set to [On], only the post alarm is
recorded and the image quality at alarm is set. This does not apply to pre-alarm
recording.
[FTP transmission retry]
Select [On]/[Off] to retransmit if FTP transmission fails.
[On]:If forwarding fails, retransmission is performed until the forwarding is successful.
[Off]:If the transfer fails, the image is discarded and the next image is sent.
[Pre alarm]
Transmission interval
Select the image update interval before alarm from the following.
If [Image capture mode] is set to 60 fps mode, 30 fps mode, or 15 fps mode:
0.1fps/ 0.2fps/ 0.33fps/ 0.5fps/ 1fps
If [Image capture mode] is set to 50 fps mode/25 fps mode/12.5 fps mode:
0.08fps/ 0.17fps/ 0.28fps/ 0.42fps/ 1fps
Maximum number of images
Select the number of images to send from the following.
[0 pic]/[1 pic]/[2 pics]/[3 pics]/[4 pics]/[5 pics]/[6 *]/[7 *]/[8 *]/[9 *]/[10 *]/[20 *]/[30
*]/[40 *]/[50 *]
Recording duration
The set [Transmission interval] and [Maximum number of images] indicate the recording time of
the images prior to the alarm.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
320
・If you set the number of images with [*] in the [Pre alarm] [Maximum number of
images], you may not be able to send the number of images specified depending on
the resolution and image quality. The table below shows the maximum number of
images that can be sent in the pre-alarm.
Image quality
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Resolut
ion
1280x960 5 6 7 8 10 10 10 20 30 40
1280x720 7 8 10 10 10 20 20 30 40 50
VGA 10 20 20 30 30 40 50 50 40 50
640x360 20 30 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
QVGA 40 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
320x180 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
[Post alarm]
Transmission interval
Select the transmission interval to send the alarm image from the following.
If [Image capture mode] is set to 60 fps/30 fps/15 fps mode:
0.1fps/ 0.2fps/ 0.33fps/ 0.5fps/ 1fps
If [Image capture mode] is set to 50 fps mode/25 fps mode/12.5 fps mode:
0.08fps/ 0.17fps/ 0.28fps/ 0.42fps/ 1fps
Number of images
Select the number of images to send from the following.
[1 pic]/[2 pics]/[3 pics]/[4 pics]/[5 pics]/[6 pics]/[7 pics]/[8 pics]/[9 pics]/[10 pics]/[20
pics]/[30 pics]/[50 pics]/[100 pics]/[200 pics]/[300 pics]/[500 pics]/[1000 pics]/[1500
pics]/[2000 pics]/[3000 pics]
Recording duration
The [Transmission interval] you set shows how long it takes to save the set [Number of images].
[Image capture size]
Select the resolution of the image to be sent when an alarm is generated from the following.
JPEG(1)/JPEG(2)
Periodic transmission setting
[FTP periodic image transmission]
Use the [On] and [Off] buttons to specify whether or not to perform periodic transmissions.
If it is set to [On], set up the server.
[On]:Periodic image transmission is performed.
[Off]:Images are not sent regularly.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
321
[Important]
・If you use periodic transmission, you need to schedule FTP/SFTP periodic
transmission on the [Schedule] tab of the Schedule page.
→4.4.3.9 Schedule: Setting FTP/SFTP Periodic Transmission (FTP/SFTP
Periodic Transmission Setting Screen)
[Note:]
・If [Name w/time&date] is selected, during Daylight Saving Time, "s" is added to
the file name after [File name entered + Transmission date and time (year/month/
day/minute/second) + 00].
[Directory name]
Enter the name of the directory where you want to save the image file to be sent.
For example, if you want to specify the img directory under the root directory of the server, enter
[/img].
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 256 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & ;
[File name]
Enter the image file name to be sent and select the file name format from the following.
File name + Date and time:[File name + Transmission date and time (year, month, day, minute,
second) + 00] is used as the file name.
File name is fixed:Use the entered file name as it is. When set to [Fix], the transmitted files are
always overwritten.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & ; : / * < > ? ¥ ¦
[Transmission interval]
Select the transmit interval from the following.
[1s]/ [2s]/ [3s]/ [4s]/ [5s]/ [6s]/ [10s]/ [15s]/ [20s]/ [30s]/ [1min]/ [2min]/ [3min]/ [4min]/
[5min]/ [6min]/ [10min]/ [15min]/ [20min]/ [30min]/ [1h]/ [1.5h]/ [2h]/ [3h]/ [4h]/ [6h]/
[12h]/ [24h]
[Image capture size]
Select the resolution of the image file to send from the following.
JPEG(1)/JPEG(2)
SFTP server configuration
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
322
[Note:]
・If [Transmission protocol] is set to FTP, you cannot configure the SFTP server.
[Important]
・If you want to enter a hostname for [SFTP server address], you must configure
the DNS on the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
[SFTP server address]
Enter the IP address or host name of the SFTP server that sends the image.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols: . _ ‑
[Port number]
Enter the control port number of the SFTP server.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80、 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Host key hash]
Enter the hash value for the public key of the SFTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:43 to 44 characters
Input Characters:Half-pitch alphanumeric and half-pitch symbols + / =
[User name]
Enter the user name (login name) to access the SFTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ¥
[Password]
Enter the password to access the SFTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
323
[Note:]
・If [Transmission protocol] is set to SFTP, you cannot configure the FTP server.
[Important]
・If you want to enter a hostname for [FTP server address], you must configure the
DNS on the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
FTP server settings
[FTP server address]
Enter the IP address or host name of the FTP server that sends the image.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . _ -
[User name]
Enter the user name (login name) to access the FTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ¥
[Password]
Enter the password to access the FTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
[Control port]
Enter the control port number of the FTP server.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Recording priority]
Select FTP communication mode from Passive mode/Active mode.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
324
[Important]
・If you need to set the time more accurately in system operation, use the NTP
server.
[Important]
・To obtain [NTP server address] from a DHCP server, you must set [Network
Settings] to DHCP, AutoIP, or Omakase on the [Network] tab of the network
page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
Normally, select [Passive]. If you cannot connect with [Passive], switch to [Active].
[Passive]:Sets FTP communication mode to passive mode.
[Active]:Set FTP communication mode to active mode.
4.10.2.3 Set up an NTP server
This section configures the NTP server, including the address and port number of the NTP server.
[Time adjustment]
Select the time adjustment method from the following. The time adjusted in the selected manner is
used as the standard time of the machine.
[Manual]:The time set in the [Basic] tab on the base page is used as the standard time of the
computer.
[Synchronize to NTP Server]:The time automatically adjusted in synchronization with the NTP
server is used as the standard time of the machine.
[NTP server address setting]
If you selected [Synchronization with NTP server] in [Time adjustment], select how to get the
NTP server address.
[Auto]:Get the NTP server address from the DHCP server.
[Manual]:Enter the NTP server address into the [NTP server address] to configure the NTP
server address.
[NTP server address]
If you selected [Manual] in [NTP server address setting], enter the IP address or hostname of the
NTP server.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . _ -
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
325
[Important]
・To enter a hostname for [NTP server address], you must configure the DNS on
the [Network] tab of the network page.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
[Note:]
・When the NTP test is successful, the [The NTP time correction completed
successfully.] is displayed.
・If the NTP test fails, the [The NTP time correction failed.] is displayed.
・If [Time adjustment] is set to [Manual], the [Execute] buttons for NTP tests will
be grayed out.
・If [Time adjustment] is set to [Synchronization with NTP server] and the NTP
server address is not set, the [Execute] buttons for the NTP tests are grayed out.
[NTP port]
Enter the port number of the NTP server.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Time adjustment interval]
Select the interval (in 1-24 hour increments) at which the time is to be acquired from the NTP
server.
[NTP test]
Select [Synchronization with NTP server] for [Time adjustment], set up the NTP server, and then
press [Execute]. You can communicate with the NTP server, perform time synchronization, and
check the NTP operation.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
326
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] When UPnP is set to ON and access via the Internet is set to
[Multi-directional + PTZ] by [Live view], only the image of the accessed camera is
displayed.
[Note:]
・Automatic port forwarding may change the port number. If this is changed, the
port number of the camera registered on the PC or recorder must be changed.
・The UPnP feature can be used to connect a camera to an IPv4 network. IPv6 is
not supported.
・To verify that auto-port forwarding has been configured correctly, click on the
[Status] tab on the Maintenance page and make sure that the [UPnP] status is
[On].
→4.12.3 [Status] for checking the status
If [On] is not displayed, please read [Cannot access cameras from internet] in
"Trouble!?"
→5.2 Trouble!?
・If the live screen or configuration screen is not displayed correctly, such as when
replacing the routers to be used, set [UPnP(Auto port forwarding)] to [Off] once
and then set it to [On] again.
4.10.2.4 Set UPnP
This machine supports UPnP (Universal Plug and Play). The UPnP function enables you to set the
following settings automatically.
-configure the port forwarding function for routers. However, a UPnP-enabled router is required.
This setting is useful for accessing the camera from the Internet or from a mobile or tablet
terminal.
-Create a shortcut to the camera in the [Network] folder of the PC and update the shortcut
automatically even if the camera has changed IP addresses.
[Auto port forwarding]
Configure on/off whether to use the router's port forwarding function.
To use the Automatic Port Forwarding feature, the router you use must be UPnP-enabled and
UPnP enabled.
[Camera short cut]
Use the [On] and [Off] buttons to specify whether to make shortcuts to the cameras in the
[Network] folder of your computer.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
327
[Note:]
・You must add a Windows component to view shortcuts to the cameras in the
Windows [Network] folder. Enable UPnP by referring to the following.
Start > [Set] > Network and Internet > Ethernet > Network and Sharing Center >
Enable Network Discovery in Change Shared Advanced Settings > Click Save
Change.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] When the HTTPS connection is accessed, only the camera
accessed is protected.
[Note:]
・To connect to HTTPS when HTTP is selected, first configure the HTTPS
connection. The HTTPS connection is enabled even if the setting is changed to
HTTP.
・When accessing the camera with HTTPS, the display speed of the screen and the
frame rate of the movie may decrease.
・When accessing the camera with HTTPS, it may take a long time before the
image is displayed.
,
Select [On] to shortcut the cameras.
To use the camera shortcut function, enable the UPnP function on the PC beforehand.
4.10.2.5 Set up HTTPS
By using the HTTPS function, you can encrypt the access to the camera and increase the security
of communication.
For details on how to configure HTTPS, see below.
→4.10.3 Setting up HTTPS
[HTTPS−Connection]
Set the connection method to the machine.
HTTP:HTTP and HTTPS connections are enabled.
HTTPS:Only the HTTPS connection is enabled.
Select the TLS to be used when HTTPS is selected.
TLS1.1:Enable/disable.
TLS1.2、 TLS1.3:It is always valid and cannot be set to invalid.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
328
・When you access the camera with HTTPS, the image may be distorted or the
sound may be interrupted.
・If you set the connectivity to [HTTPS], the maximum delivery is limited to 32Mbps.
・It is recommended that TLS 1.1 be disabled for security reasons.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
[HTTPS-Select Certificate]
Select the certificate to use in HTTPS.
[Pre-install]:Select the pre-installation certificate.
CA:Select a CA certificate. This is displayed only if the CA certificate is installed.
[HTTPS-HTTPS port]
Set the port number to use for HTTPS.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Pre-installation Certificate-Root Certificate Acquisition]
Clicking [Execute] downloads the route certificate for the pre-installation certificate. By installing
the root certificate on your PC, you can verify the signature of the pre-installation certificate.
[CA certificate-CRT key generate]
Creates a CRT key (SSL encryption key) for use in an HTTPS connection using a CA certificate.
CRT key generation is performed in [CRT key generation dialog] displayed when [Execute] is
clicked.
[CA Certificate-Generate Certificate Signing Request]
This generates a signature request (CSR Certificate Signing Request) to apply to a Certificate
Authority when using a security certificate issued by a CA (Certificate Authority) as a security
certificate to be used in HTTPS.
Create a signature request (CSR) by clicking on the [Execute] button. This is displayed in the
[Create Signature Request (CSR) dialog].
[CA certificate-CA certificate install]
Install the CA certificate (security certificate) issued by the certification authority and display
information about the installed CA certificate (security certificate).
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
329
[Important]
・When deleting a valid CA certificate (security certificate), make sure that you
have a backup of the CA certificate (security certificate) on your PC or recording
media. To reinstall, a CA certificate (security certificate) is required.
[Note:]
・If the connection method setting is changed, the connection must be accessed
again after a while using [http://Camera IP address] or [https://Camera IP
address].
・When accessing the camera with HTTPS, the display speed of the screen and the
frame rate of the movie may decrease.
・When accessing the camera with HTTPS, it may take a long time before the
image is displayed.
・When you access the camera with HTTPS, the image may be distorted or the
sound may be interrupted.
・If you set the connectivity to [HTTPS], the maximum delivery is limited to 32Mbps.
When [Select File] is clicked, the [Open Dialog] is displayed. Select the CA certificate (security
certificate) file issued by the authentication authority. Click [Execute] to install the CA certificate
(security certificate).
If a CA certificate (security certificate) is installed, the file name of the installed CA certificate
(security certificate) is displayed.
[CA certificate-information]
The information of the CA certificate (security certificate) is displayed.
When [Execute] is clicked, the registered contents of the installed CA certificate (security
certificate) are displayed in the [CA Certificate Confirmation Dialog]. If a CA certificate (security
certificate) is not installed, the content of the generated signature request (CSR) is displayed.
Clicking [Delete] deletes the installed CA certificate (security certificate).
4.10.2.6 Set up DDNS
To access the computer via the Internet, you must configure the DDNS function.
See below for instructions on how to configure DDNS.
→4.10.4 How to configure DDNS
[Area]
Select the region where the camera is installed.
[Japan]/[Global]
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
330
[Note:]
・Select [Japan] when using cameras in Japan. The [Viewnetcam.com] services
displayed when [Global] is selected are not accessible from within Japan.
[Note:]
・If you use DNS Update [Dynamic DNS Update (RFC2136)], contact your network
administrator to select DHCP or DHCP linkage.
[Service]
Select whether or not to use the DDNS service to be used.
[Off]:Do not use DDNS.
[Viewed Net]:Use [Viewnetcam.com] services.
[Dynamic DNS Update]:[DHCP-NON]Dynamic DNS Update (RFC 2136 compliant) is used
without DHCP linkage.
[Dynamic DNS Update]:[DHCP]Dynamic DNS Update (RFC 2136 compliant) is used for DHCP
linkage.
4.10.2.7 Set SNMP
Here, the setting for the SNMP function is performed. Connecting using the SNMP Manager
enables you to check the status of your computer. Contact your network administrator if you want
to use the SNMP feature.
SNMP agent setting
[SNMP version]
Select the SNMP version to be used.
[SNMPv1/v2]:SNMPv1/v2 is enabled.
[SNMPv3]:SNMPv3 is enabled.
[SNMPv1/v2/v3]:SNMPv1/v2/v3 is enabled.
SNMPv1/v2 − [Community]
Enter the community name to be monitored.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte
Initial setting:Blank space
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
331
[Important]
• When using the SNMP feature on SNMPv1/v2, be sure to enter a community
name. If the community name is blank, you cannot use the SNMP feature. Do not
set a community name that can be easily guessed. (e.g., public)
[Note:]
You can restrict the IP address of the SNMP manager to allow requests per subnet
by entering the IP address/Mask length of the subnet.
For example, if you enter [192.168.0.1/24], SNMP manager requests from
[192.168.0.1] to [192.168.0.254] are allowed.
SNMPv1/v2 − [Manager address]
When the SNMP version is v1 and v2, enter the IP address of the SNMP manager that allows
requests. If blank, allow requests from all IP addresses.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . /
[SNMPv3] − [User name (1 to 32 characters)]
Set the SNMPv3 username.
Number of characters that can be entered:Blank or 1 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ¥
[SNMPv3]−[Authentication]
Select the SNMPv3 authentication method from MD5/SHA1.
[SNMPv3] − [Encryption method]
Select the SNMPv3 encryption method from DES/AES.
[SNMPv3] − [Password (8 to 16 characters)]
Set the SNMPv3 password.
Number of characters that can be entered:
-if the authentication method is MD5: blank or 8-16 characters
-if the authentication method is SHA1: blank or 8-20 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
SNMPv2-MIB system setting
[System name]
Enter the device name to manage the machine using the SNMP function.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
332
[Location]
Enter the location where the machine was installed.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
[Contact]
Enter the administrator's mail address or phone number.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 255 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte
[SNMP trap settings]
Sets ON/OFF of SNMP trap notification.
[Destination of Trap] − [Address]
SNMP Enter the destination address for the trap notification.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : .
[SNMPv2c] − [Community]
Enter the community name of the SNMP trap notification destination.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte
Trap setting
[SNMP Generic trap] − [coldStart] − [Enable/Disable]
If the check box is checked, the trap (SNMPv2-MIB::coldStart) is notified when the camera starts.
[SNMP Generic trap] − [coldStart] − [Trap string]
If you want to extend the trap when the computer starts, you can set the character string.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[SNMP Generic trap] − [linkUp] − [Enable/Disable]
When the checkbox is checked, the trap (SNMPv2-MIB::linkup) is notified when the machine is
linked up.
[SNMP Generic trap] −[LinkUp]− [Trap string]
To extend the trap when the computer is linked up and notify, set the character string.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[SNMP Generic trap] − [authenticationFailure] − [Enable/Disable]
If the check box is checked, a trap (SNMPv2-MIB: authentication failure) is notified when an
SNMP authentication error occurs.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
333
[SNMP Generic trap] − [authenticationFailure] − [Trap string]
If you want to extend the trap when an SNMP authentication error occurs, you can set the string.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm]-[Terminal 1]-[Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 1.
[Alarm]-[Terminal 1]-[Trap string]
Set the character string to be used for notifying [Terminal 1] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm]-[terminal 2]-[Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 2.
[Alarm]-Terminal 2-[Trap string]
Set the character string to be used for notifying [Terminal 2] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm]-Terminal 3-[Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 3.
[Alarm]-Terminal 3-[Trap string]
Set the character string to be used for notifying [Terminal 3] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm] − [VMD] − [Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when the operation is detected.
[Alarm] − [VMD] − [Trap string]
Specify the strings to be used to notify [VMD] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0 to 9 (half-pitch), A to Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase), half-pitch symbol
! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm] − [Auto track] − [Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when automatic tracking occurs.
[Alarm] − [Auto track] − [Trap string]
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
334
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[PTZ] [Auto track] can be set only for PTZ-cameras.
Specify the strings to be used to notify [Auto track] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm] − [Audio detection] − [Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when sound detection occurs.
[Alarm] − [Audio detection] − [Trap string]
Specify the strings to be used to notify [Audio detection] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
[Alarm] − [Command alarm] − [Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified when a command alarm occurs.
[Alarm] − [Command alarm] − [Trap string]
Specify the strings to be used to notify [Command alarm] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
SD Memory Card-[Diag.]-[Enable/Disable]
When the check box is checked, the trap is notified in the following cases.
When notifying the remaining capacity of the SD Memory Card
-when the free space on the SD memory card is insufficient
-SD Memory Card recognition error
SD Memory Card-[Diag.]-[Trap string]
Specify the strings to be used to notify [Diag.] traps.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Input Characters:0-9 (half-pitch), A-Z (half-pitch, uppercase, lowercase) and half-pitch symbol !
" # $ % & ' ( ) * + , ‑ . / : ; = ?
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
335
[Note:]
・If you are concerned about the delay of the image to be displayed, set it to Off.
4.10.2.8 Set QoS
This section configures the settings for the Diffserv function and the shaping of streams.
Diffserv
The Diffserv feature sets the priority of image/voice data forwarded from the router and other
commands.
The priority you set on your computer must be matched to the DSCP value set on the router.
Contact your network administrator if you want to use the Diffserv function.
[Image DSCP(0-63)]
Enter the packet priority order for the video data.
Configurable values:0～63
[Audio DSCP(0-63)]
Enter the packet priority order for audio distribution.
Configurable values:0～63
TCP alarm notification DSCP (0-63)
Enter the packet priority order for the unique alarm notification.
Configurable values:0～63
Shaping of streams
[Shaping of stream]
Use the [On] [Off] to control whether H.265 (or H264) images are not bursted.
It may be effective when network devices divert image data from the camera, etc., but the
displayed image may be delayed.
[Off]:Disables the shaping function of the stream.
[On]:Enables the shaping function of the stream.
4.10.2.9 Configure SRTP
Here, the settings for the SRTP function are performed.
[SRTP]
Use [On] or [Off] to set whether to use the SRTP function.
[On]:Use the SRTP function.
[Off]:The SRTP function is not used.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
336
[Note:]
・You can also deliver RTP if SRTP is set to [On].
・For client information that can be connected to the camera using the SRTP
function, our technical information website<Control No. C0318>Please refer to.
[Note:]
・[MULTI] The port numbers 32768 to 49151 cannot be set.
4.10.2.10 Set MQTT
This section configures the MQTT (Message Queuing Telemetry Transport) function. When an
alarm is generated, the MQTT server can be notified of an event caused by the alarm.
[MQTT settings]
Use [On]/[Off] to specify whether the MQTT function is enabled or not.
Connect to the configured server if it is set to [On] or [On] when the cameras are started.
When the set alarm occurs, the setting is notified to the server.
[On]:Use the MQTT function.
[Off]:MQTT function is not used.
Server
[Address]
Enter the IP address or host name of the MQTT server to be notified when an alarm is generated.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols : . _ -
[Port number]
Enter the MQTT server port number.
Configurable port number:1～65535
The following port numbers cannot be set because they are used by this computer.
20、 21、 22、 23、 25、 42、 53、 67、 68、 69、 80 110、 123、 161、 162、 443、 554、 995、
1883、 8883、 10669、 10670、 59000～61000
[Protocol]
Select the protocol to be used for connection with the MQTT server from MQTT over
SSL/MQTT over TCP.
MQTT over SSL:Encrypt communication with the MQTT server with SSL.
MQTT over TCP:Do not encrypt communication with the MQTT server.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
337
[Note:]
If the [Server certificate verification] is [On], install the root CA certificate.
[User name]
Enter the user name to access the MQTT server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " & : ; ¥
[Password]
Enter the password to access the MQTT server.
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters
Characters that cannot be entered:Double-byte and single-byte symbols " &
Root CA certificate
[Installation]
Install the root CA certificate issued by the certification authority.
When [Select File] is clicked, the [Open File Dialog] is displayed. Select the root CA certificate
file issued by the authentication authority. Click [Execute] to install the root CA certificate.
The data format of the root CA certificate can be PEM or DER.
[Information]
The root CA certificate information is displayed.
[Off]:Root CA certificate is not installed.
Root CA Certificate Host Name:Displayed when installed.
You can view the root CA certificate in detail by clicking [Execute].
Clicking [Delete] deletes the installed root CA certificate.
[Server certificate verification]
Select [MQTT over SSL] for [Protocol] and, if [Server certificate verification] is [On], verify the
server certificate using the root CA certificate registered when connecting to SSL.
Notification setting
[Alarm]
Check the alarm event to notify the MQTT server.
[Terminal 1]:The MQTT server is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 1.
[Terminal 2]:The MQTT server is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 2.
[Terminal 3]The MQTT server is notified when an alarm is generated at terminal 3.
[VMD]:The MQTT server is notified when an operation detection occurs.
[Audio detection]:Notifies the MQTT server when sound detection occurs.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
338
[Command alarm]:Notifies the MQTT server when a command alarm is entered.
[Topic]
Specify the name of the MQTT topic to be sent. The topics are hierarchically separated by /.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:Single-byte alphanumeric and single-byte symbols
Prohibited Characters:One-byte symbol ¥
[Payload]
Set the MQTT message payload.
Number of characters that can be entered:1 to 128 characters
Input Characters:Single-byte alphanumeric and single-byte symbols
Prohibited Characters:One-byte symbol ¥
[QoS]
Select the level of QoS from 0, 1, or 2. 0<1<Communication quality is high with 2.
0:QoS0 delivers up to one message. Messages are not guaranteed to reach the server.
1:In QoS1, messages are delivered at least once. Messages are guaranteed to reach the
destination, but may be duplicated.
2:QoS2 delivers the message exactly once. Messages are guaranteed to arrive only once without
excess or deficiency.
[Retain]
Check this box to have the last notified message saved on the MQTT server.
4.10.2.11 Configure LLDP
This section configures the LLDP (Link Layer Discovery Protocol) function. Interoperation can be
realized by transmitting and receiving the device information of the camera with LLDP-compatible
devices.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
339
[LLDP]
You can configure [On] and [Off] to enable the LLDP function and Fabric Attach.
[Enable]:Use the LLDP function.
[Disabled]:The LLDP function is not used.
When set to [On], LLDP is sent with TLVs checked in the following tables.
For the model supporting *PoE+ power supply, LLDP including TLV with checks in the following
table is sent for PoE+ power supply even if set to [Off].
Fabric Attach authentication key
Enter the key to be used for Fabric Attach authentication. It is valid only when [LLDP] is [On].
Number of characters that can be entered:0 to 32 characters (blank if not Fabric Attach
authentication)
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric characters
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
340
[Note:]
・Press [Set] to restart the computer. After restarting, the product cannot be
operated for about two minutes as it was when the power was turned on.
・Information on devices that can be connected via Fabric Attach can be found on
our technical information website.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] When the HTTPS connection is accessed, only the camera
accessed is protected.
[Important]
・You must configure port forwarding for routers before using the DDNS service.
・About [Dynamic DNS (DDNS)] Update (RFC 2136)
We do not guarantee the operation of any DDNS services other than the
[Viewnetcam.com] service. Therefore, you are not liable for any failure or damage
caused by the use of DDNS services other than the [Viewnetcam.com] service.
For selection and configuration of DDNS services other than [Viewnetcam.com]
services, please contact the service provider.
・Check the [Viewnetcam.com] service website for browsers supported by the
[Viewnetcam.com] service.
4.10.3 Setting up HTTPS
Here, you set up HTTPS to encrypt camera access and enhance communication security.
HTTPS can be configured using pre-installed certificates on the camera body or using CA (CA)
certificates obtained between the customer and the certification authority.
HTTPS setting method (pre-installation) is shown on the support video page of the support site.<
Control No. P0002>Please refer to. To configure HTTPS (CA certificate),<Control No. P0003>
Please refer to.
4.10.4 How to configure DDNS
When using the DDNS function on your computer, you can use one of the following DDNS
services:
[Viewnetcam.com] services
Dynamic DNS Update (RFC 2136)
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
341
[Note:]
・The [Viewnetcam.com] service (fee-based) is the DDNS service we recommend.
For more information about the [Viewnetcam.com] service, refer to the
[Viewnetcam.com] Service website (http://www.viewnetcam.com/).
About DDNS Services (IPv4/IPv6)
You can view camera images via the Internet by using the DDNS service.
The DDNS service is a service that matches a domain name with a dynamically changing global
address. You can configure the [Viewnetcam.com] service (charged for IPv6, but both IPv4 and
IPv6 connections are required) or dynamic DNS Update (RFC2136 compliant) for DDNS services.
Since many providers provide services that change their global addresses rather than being fixed,
the camera may not be able to access the previous global addresses after a period of time. To
access cameras with non-fixed global addresses from the Internet, you must have one of the
following services:
DDNS services (e.g., [Viewnetcam.com] services)
This service can be accessed with a fixed registered domain name (e.g., ***
**.
miemasu.net) even if
the global address changes. You must also subscribe to domain name services when using IPv6
connections.
For more information about [Viewnetcam.com] Services, see the [Viewnetcam.com] website.
Fixed IP address service (e.g. service of subscription provider)
This service does not change the global address (fixed).
DDNS Service Mechanism (for [Viewnetcam.com] Service)
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
342
[Note:]
・Contact your provider to determine whether your IP address is fixed.
・Depending on the provider, local addresses may be assigned. In that case, the
DDNS service is not available. Please contact the provider you subscribe to.
① The contracted provider assigns a global address to the router (or camera). The global
address assigned at this time is not a fixed but a changing address.
②If you subscribe to [Viewnetcam.com] services, the cameras are assigned a unique [Domain
Name] (e.g., *****.miemasu.net). The camera manages the camera's domain name and the
global address of the router (or camera) by automatically notifying the [Viewnetcam.com]
service server of the router's (or camera's) global address (the [Viewnetcam.com] service
server).
③ The [Viewnetcam.com] service server registers the global addresses and domain names of
routers (or cameras) with the DNS server.
④ When accessing a camera via the Internet, the DNS server determines the global address of
the registered router (or camera) by entering the URL containing the domain name into the
Web browser.
⑤ You can access routers (or cameras) with an indexed global address to monitor the image.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
343
4.10.4.1 With [Viewnetcam.com] services
1 On the [Advanced] tab of the Network Page, select [DDNS], and then select [Japan] from the
[Area] tab.
2 Select [Viewnetcam.com] and press [Set].
3 Clicking on the URLs displayed on the [Link to MIEMASUNET registration] opens a new
window for registering [Viewnetcam.com] Services.
4 Register [Viewnetcam.com] Services according to the window. If the [Viewnetcam.com]
services registration window is not displayed, check that the PC is connected to the Internet
and press the Update browser button.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
344
[Note:]
・The URLs of the registered cameras are displayed on the [Personal(Camera)
URL] when registration to the [Viewnetcam.com] services has been completed.
This address is used when accessing the camera via the Internet. It is recommended
that you register this URL as your favorite browser function. The camera's URLs
can also be viewed in the [Status] [Personal(Camera) URL] on the Camera
Maintenance page.
・The URLs of the cameras can be used after they are registered with the
[Viewnetcam.com] services. (It may take up to 30 minutes for the URL of the
registered camera to become valid.)
However, depending on the router, this URL cannot be accessed from a PC
connected to the same network (LAN) as the camera.
・If [Link to MIEMASUNET registration] is not displayed, make sure that you have
registered to [Viewnetcam.com] and that your PC is connected to the Internet,
and then press the Update browser button.
・If [User registered] is displayed in the [Viewnetcam.com] [Status] on the [Status]
tab of the Maintenance page, restart the camera after registering the
[Viewnetcam.com] service.
After restarting, make sure that the URLs registered in the [Viewnetcam.com]
[Personal(Camera) URL] are displayed in the [Status] tab on the Maintenance
page.
・The [Viewnetcam.com] service provides services other than dynamic DNS
services. For more information, refer to the [Viewnetcam.com] services website
(http://www.viewnetcam.com/).
5 Re-display the cameras and ensure that the [Personal(Camera) URL] shows the domains
(xxxx.miemasu.net:xxx) registered with the [Viewnetcam.com] services.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
345
[Note:]
・If you see anything other than [Service contract is already registered.] in the
[Viewnetcam.com] [Status] on the [Status] tab of the Maintenance page, restart
the camera and re-access the screen.
Confirm the [Viewnetcam.com] services be registered
1 Click [Status] in the Maintenance page.
2 Ensure that [Service contract is already registered.] is displayed in the [Status] of the
[Viewnetcam.com] in the [Status] tabs on the Maintenance page.
Configure port forwarding without using UPnP
If you use a router that does not support UPnP, you must manually configure the port forwarding
feature for the router.
1 On the Network Page, press the [Network] tab.
2 In the [Network Settings], select [Static].
3 Check the IP address and port number displayed here, and make corrections if necessary.
(This is required when configuring port forwarding for routers.)
4 Press [Set].
5 Configure the port forwarding by referring to your router's instruction manual.
・Use the IP address and port number you checked in step 3 to configure.
・Port forwarding functions may be described as address translation, static IP mascalade,
virtual server, virtual server, or port mapping, depending on the router.
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
346
[Note:]
・Be sure to set [Auto port forwarding] to [Off] when configuring port forwarding
manually for routers.
[Note:]
・Contact your network administrator for the host name that is available.
[Note:]
・Contact your network administrator for the host name that is available.
4.10.4.2 Using Dynamic DNS Update (without DHCP)
[Host name]
Enter the host name to use for the dynamic DNS Update service.
Number of characters that can be entered:3 to 250 characters (host name). Enter in (domain
name) format
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols . ‑
[Access interval]
Select an interval to verify the IP address and host name for the dynamic DNS Update service
server from the following.
[10min]/ [20min]/ [30min]/ [40min]/ [50min]/ [1h]/ [6h]/ [24h]
4.10.4.3 Using Dynamic DNS Update
[Host name]
Enter the host name to use for the dynamic DNS Update service.
Number of characters that can be entered:3 to 250 characters (host name). Enter in (domain
name) format
Input Characters:One-byte alphanumeric and one-byte symbols . ‑
4 Advanced settings
4.10 Networking configuration [Network]
347
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
・[PTZ] Only PTZ cameras can be set for position refresh, automatic tracking start
permission, auto pan, patrol, and preset sequence.
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
1 From the [Operation mode], select Scheduling operation.
The default setting is [Off].
[Off]:Schedule operation is not executed.
[Alarm permission(Terminal alarm 1,2,3)]:Allows the alarm input of the terminal while the
schedule is being set.
[Alarm permission(Terminal alarm 1)]:The alarm input of terminal 1 is enabled while the
schedule is set.
[Alarm permission(Terminal alarm 2)]:Allows alarm input of terminal 2 while schedule is set.
[Alarm permission(Terminal alarm 3)]:Allows alarm input of terminal 3 while schedule is set.
[VMD permission]:Operation detection is enabled while the schedule is set.
[SCD permission]:Permits disturbance detection while scheduled.
[Audio detection permission]:During scheduling, sound detection is enabled.
[Access permission]:Images are prohibited from being viewed by users with [2. Camera
control] or [3. Live view] access levels set in the [User auth.] tabs, except when scheduled.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
[SD memory recording]:When the scheduled time is reached, SD recording set by [Recording
stream] is executed. It is valid only when [Recording format] is streamed.
[All detect permission]:If [DDNS] is set to [Viewnetcam.com], only Schedule 8 can be
selected. All alarm inputs are allowed while the schedule is set. [Sun] and [24h] are
automatically set from [Mon] and cannot be changed.
[Image quality 1]:Scene1 (Scene File 1): When the scheduled time is reached, the image
quality is set to [Scene File 1]. When the scheduled time is over, the [Scene file is not
applied] image quality is set.
[Image quality 2]:Scene2 (Scene File 2): When the scheduled time is reached, the image
quality is set to [Scene File 2]. When the scheduled time is over, the [Scene file is not
applied] image quality is set.
[Image quality 3]:Scene3 (Scene File 3): When the scheduled time is reached, the image
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
348
quality is set to [Scene File 3]. When the scheduled time is over, the [Scene file is not
applied] image quality is set.
[Image quality 4]:Scene4 (Scene File 4): When the scheduled time is reached, the image
quality is set to [Scene File 4]. When the scheduled time is over, the [Scene file is not
applied] image quality is set.
[FTP/SFTP periodic image transmission]:When the scheduled time is reached, FTP/SFTP
periodic transmission is executed.
[E-mail permission]:Mail notification is executed when an alarm is generated while the
schedule is set.
[Reboot]:When the scheduled time is reached, the camera restarts. Only available in
Schedule 8.
[Position refresh]:The position is refreshed when the scheduled time is reached.
1～256:When the scheduled time is reached, the preset position is moved from the preset
position registered beforehand to the selected position.
[Auto track permission]:Allows the auto-tracking setting set on the [Auto track setting] tab
while scheduling.
[Auto pan]:When the scheduled time is reached, the auto pan operation set in the [Position]
tab starts.
[Patrol 1]:When the scheduled time is reached, Patrol 1, which is set in the [Position] tab,
starts. It is valid only when [Patrol 1] is set.
[Patrol 2]:When the scheduled time is reached, Patrol 2 set in the [Position] tab starts. It is
valid only when [Patrol 2] is set.
[Patrol 3]:When the scheduled time is reached, Patrol 3, which is set in the [Position] tab,
starts. It is valid only when [Patrol 3] is set.
[Patrol 4]:When the scheduled time is reached, Patrol 4, which is set in the [Position] tab,
starts. It is valid only when [Patrol 4] is set.
[Preset sequence 1]:When the scheduled time is reached, preset Sequence 1 set in the
[Position] tab starts. It is valid only when [Preset sequence 1] is set.
[Preset sequence 2]:When the scheduled time is reached, preset Sequence 2 set in the
[Position] tab starts. It is valid only when [Preset sequence 2] is set.
[Preset sequence 3]:When the scheduled time is reached, the preset sequence 3 set in the
[Position] tab starts operation. It is valid only when [Preset sequence 3] is set.
The Schedule page sets up schedules for the following items:
・Alarm input permission (Terminals 1, 2 and 3)
・Alarm input permission (terminal 1)
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
349
[Note:]
・When using [Access permission], set [User auth.] to [On] on the [User auth.] tab
and [Host auth.] to [Off] on the [Host auth.] tab.
→4.9.1 [User auth.] to configure user-authentication
→4.9.2 [Host auth.] to configure host-authentication
・If you want to use [SD memory recording], set [Recording format] in the [SD
memory card] tabs to streams and set [Save trigger] to [Schedule].
[Note:]
・[PTZ] When you configure the [Auto pan] [Patrol] [Preset sequence], make sure
that the times do not overlap.
・Alarm input permission (terminal 2)
・Alarm input permission (terminal 3)
・Operation detection permission
・Permission to detect disturbance
・Sound detection permission
・Image disclosure permission
・SD recording
・Scene file
・Regular transmission of FTP/SFTP
・Permission to send mail
・Position refresh
・Preset position (1 to 256)
・Auto tracking start permission
・Auto pan
・Patrol
・Preset sequence
・All alarms detection permission (when visible net is set and schedule 8 only)
・Restart the camera (Schedule 8 only)
Schedule pages consist of [Schedule] tabs only. Up to 8 schedules can be set.
2 Checks the Day of the week boxes in which you want to schedule in [Schedule].
3 To specify the time, click [▼] to set the time. Select [24h] when no time zone is set.
4 When [Set] is clicked after the setting is finished, the settings are displayed at the bottom of
the window.
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
350
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
351
[Note:]
・The colors displayed on Schedules 1 to 8 represent the colors of the lines
displayed in the Schedule field at the bottom of the screen.
・If position refresh and image quality set time are set at the same time, the image
quality is reflected after position refresh is completed.
・When the operation modes of Schedules 1 to 8 are set to [Off], the following
items are permissible.
Alarm input permission (terminals 1, 2 and 3)
Alarm input permission (terminal 1)
Alarm input permission (terminal 2)
Alarm input permission (terminal 3)
Operation detection permission
Obstruction Detection Permission
-Sound detection permission
-Image disclosure permission
-All alarm detection permission (when visible net is set and schedule 8 only)
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
352
4.11.1 How to set the schedule
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
353
1In [Schedule], tick the Day of the week boxes in which you want to schedule.
The day of the week is enabled.
2To specify the time, click [▼] to specify the time.
If you do not specify a time zone, tick [24h].
3When you are finished, press [Set].
The contents set at the bottom of the screen are displayed.
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
354
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
355
4.11.2 How to Delete Schedule
1Uncheck the Day of the week box in which you want to delete the schedule.
2When you are finished, press [Set].
The schedule for the selected day of the week is deleted.
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
356
4 Advanced settings
4.11 [Schedule] for scheduling
357
[Note:]
・The items that can be set differ depending on the function of the model.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
The Maintenance page checks the system log, software upgrades, checks the status, and
initializes the computer.
The Maintenance page consists of the [System log], [Upgrade], [Status], [Default reset], and
[Data] tabs.
4.12.1 [System log] to check the system logs
Click [System log] in the Maintenance page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
If [SD memory card] is set to [Use] and an SD Memory Card is installed on your computer, up to
4000 system logs can be saved in the SD Memory Card.
→4.5.2 [SD memory card] for setting SD Memory Cards
If [SD memory card] is set to [Not use], up to 100 system logs can be saved in the computer's
internal memory.
If the maximum number of system logs that can be saved is exceeded, the log is overwritten from
the old log.
100 system logs are displayed and the logs are saved even if the camera is turned off.
[<<Latest 100 items
Click to display the list of the latest 100 system logs.
Next 100 items>>]
Click to display the following 100 items in the displayed system log list.
[Page number display]
The currently open page is displayed in the form [Page/Total Page].
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
358
[Note:]
・If [Time display format] is set to [24h], the logging date and time will be displayed
in 24-hour format.
[Note:]
・[MULTI_PTZ] [MAC address], [Firmware version], and [IP address(IPv6)] of the
PTZ camera and Multi-directional camera are displayed.
[<<Previous 100 items
Click to display 100 items in front of the displayed system log.
[No]
The serial number in the system log is displayed.
[Time & date]
The date and time when the log occurred is displayed.
[Description]
The contents of the system log are displayed.
For details on the contents of each system log, refer to the following.
→5.1 System Log Display
4.12.2 [Upgrade] to upgrade the software
Click [Upgrade] in the Maintenance page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, you can review the software version and update the software to the latest version.
Contact your dealer for software for upgrading.
[Model no.], [MAC address], [Serial no.], [Firmware version], [IP address(IPv6)], [Time past from
the date of manufacture]
Individual information on the computer is displayed.
1Contact your dealer and download the latest software to the hard disk of your PC.
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
359
[Important]
・Do not use space or double-byte characters in the save directory.
[Note:]
・The latest version of the software is available on our technical information website.
https://i-pro.com/global/en/surveillance/training-support/support
[Note:]
・Note that the set data cannot be restored after initialization.
[Important]
・After upgrading, be sure to check the version on this page.
・After upgrading, be sure to delete the temporary Internet file.
→5.2 Trouble!?
・Use a PC on the same subnet as the machine to upgrade the version.
・When using the version upgrade software, be sure to check the precautions at
the dealer where you purchased the software and follow the instructions.
・Use our specified img file for the software to be used to upgrade the version.
Be sure to use [Model name _xxxxx.img] (model name is lowercase and [WV-] is
not required) as the file name of the software to be used for version upgrading.
*[xxxxxx] contains the software version.
・Do not turn off the computer during version upgrading.
・Do not perform any operation during version upgrading until the version upgrade
is completed.
・The following data will not be initialized even if [Initialize setup data after version
upgrade is completed] is selected.
2Click [Select File] to specify the software that was downloaded.
3Click the radio button to select whether to initialize the data after the version upgrade has been
completed.
4Press [Execute].
The confirmation screen for executing the version upgrade is displayed.
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
360
IPv4 DNS primary server address, secondary server address, IPv6 primary server
address, DNS secondary server address, DHCP On/Off, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, HTTP port, HTTPS port, HTTP/HTTPS connection method,
CRT key, CA certificate, UPnP setting, communication rate, delivery rate control
(bit rate), time setting, IEEE802.1X setting, function extension software, and
function extension software setting
・Display plug-in software must be licensed for each PC. Contact your dealer for a
license.
[Note:]
・The status is displayed on our technical information website.<Control No.:
C0111>Please refer to.
4.12.3 [Status] for checking the status
Click [Status] in the Maintenance page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, you can check the status of the machine.
[Viewnetcam.com]
[Server]
The URLs for the [Viewnetcam.com] services server are displayed.
[Status]
This box indicates the registered status of [Viewnetcam.com] services.
[Personal(Camera) URL]
The URLs of cameras registered for the [Viewnetcam.com] services are displayed.
UPnP
Port number (HTTP), port number (HTTPS)
The port number configured for port forwarding in UPnP is displayed.
[Status]
The state of the port forwarding is displayed.
[Router global address]
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
361
[Note:]
・If you set [Viewnetcam.com] in [DDNS] on the [Advanced] tab of the Network
Page, the Network status is displayed.
[Note:]
・[PTZ] Only the PTZ camera is displayed as operation information.
The global address of the router is displayed.
Self check
The hardware self-diagnosis results are displayed.
Hardware information
[Number of times of pan/tilt operation]
The number of PAN and TILT operations and the last replacement time are displayed.
Press the [Execute] button of the [Reset at the time of replacement] button to change the
operation count to zero and the last replacement time is updated.
[Number of times of zoom/focus operation]
The number of ZOOM and FOCUS operations and the last replacement time are displayed.
Press the [Execute] button of the [Reset at the time of replacement] button to change the
operation count to zero and the last replacement time is updated.
[Status]
The number of starts, energizing time, temperature sensor information, heater information, etc.
are displayed.
USB interface
[Status]
If you recognize that the Wi-Fi USB adapter for installation is connected to the USB port, the
Wi-Fi USB adapter part number information is displayed. If it is not recognized, [Not use] is
displayed.
[Disable]
To disable the Wi-Fi USB adapter for installation, press [Execute].
If you want to recognize the Wi-Fi USB adapter again, use the INITIAL SET button.
Initialize (refer to the WEB Guide for instructions on how to initialize using the INITIAL SET
button).
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
362
[Note:]
・Only the models that the USB adapter can connect to are displayed.
・Refer to the catalog specifications for the functions installed in each model.
[Note:]
・The number of times of overwriting is an estimate calculated in the computer and
may differ from the actual number of times of overwriting.
・If you use [SD memory card password lock] and the passwords of SD cards do not
match, the above information will not be displayed.
Classific
ation
Form of label Details of contents
SD
Memory
<SD>Format The SD Memory Card was successfully
formatted.
SD Memory Card
[Model no.]
Displays the model number of the SD memory card. If the product number data acquisition fails,
[Read error] is displayed. When the SD Memory Card is not used, [Not use] is displayed.
Otherwise, [Unknown] is displayed.
[Serial no.]
Displays the SD Memory Card serial number. If the serial number is not obtained, [Unknown] is
displayed.
[Remaining capacity]
Displays the remaining capacity and total capacity of the SD Memory Card. The [SD memory
card] tab-SD Memory Card info [Remaining capacity] on the Basic Page and the displayed content
are the same.
[Total use time]
Displays the energizing time of the machine with the SD Memory Card inserted. If it fails to
acquire the operating hours, [Unknown] is displayed. The operating time is updated once an hour.
[Number of overwrite times]
Displays the total capacity of the SD Memory Card, the number of files written to the SD Memory
Card by the camera, and the number of times of overwriting calculated from the file size. If the
overwrite count fails, [Unknown] is displayed.
[No.] [Time & date] [Description] of logs
Displays the SD Memory Card log.
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
363
Card
<SD>Format error An error occurred in the SD Memory Card
format.
<SD>Recognition error The SD Memory Card cannot be recognized
correctly.
<SD>Write error An error occurred during write processing of
the SD memory card.
<SD>Read error An error occurred during read processing of the
SD Memory Card.
<SD>Deletion error An error occurred during deletion processing of
the SD Memory Card.
<SD>Files system error An error occurred in the file system of the SD
Memory Card.
<SD>Other errors Other errors have occurred on the SD Memory
Card.
<SD>The SD Memory Card recording
continuity is wrong. Check the
recording bit rate setting on the SD
Memory Card.
Data is missing during write processing on the
SD Memory Card.
<SD>An error occurs in the SD
Memory Card. Check the SD Memory
Card status.
Data is continuously missing during write
processing on the SD Memory Card. Confirm
that the SD Memory Card is correctly
recognized. If not, restart the computer or
unplug the SD Memory Card and insert it again.
[Important]
・To use this function correctly, format the SD Memory Card on your computer
before using the SD Memory Card.
・The correct information may not be displayed on the SD Memory Card used on a
computer other than this unit.
・Up to 30 SD Memory Card logs can be saved in the internal memory of this
computer. If the maximum number of system logs that can be saved is exceeded,
the log is overwritten from the old log.
4.12.4 [Default reset] to initialize and restart the computer
Click [Default reset] in the Maintenance page. Refer to the following how to display and operate
the Advanced menu.
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
364
[Important]
・If you install the camera, the camera may be turned by mistake. When registering
a preset after installation, it is recommended to perform position refresh.
[Note:]
・Please refer to the following for the network settings. Refer to the WEB Guide for
the formatting method.
→4.10.1 Networking [Network]
・When you select Alarm or Mail Notification function, if the SD Memory Card is
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, initialize the computer's setup data and restart the computer.
[Reset to the default(Except the network settings)]
When [Execute] is clicked, the computer settings are reset to default settings. However, the
network-related settings are not initialized.
When the initialization operation is performed, the product cannot be operated for approximately
3 minutes.
[Load the default HTML files (setup menu).]
[Execute] returns HTML files to their defaults.
When the initialization operation is performed, the product cannot be operated for approximately
3 minutes.
[Reset to the default and load the default HTML files.]
Press [Execute] to reset the computer settings and HTML files to their default settings. However,
the network-related settings are not initialized.
When the initialization operation is performed, the product cannot be operated for approximately
3 minutes.
[Reboot]
Press [Execute] to restart the computer. After restarting, the product cannot be operated for
about two minutes as it was when the power was turned on.
[Position refresh]
Refresh the machine position. The position can be corrected if the camera is misaligned with the
home position or preset position while the camera is in use or if the camera is misdirected while
the camera is powered on.
When position refresh is performed, operation cannot be performed for approximately 2 minutes.
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
365
not installed after restarting, you can notify the set [Destination E-mail address]
or [Destination of notification].
→4.10.2.1 Set mail sending
→4.8.10 [Notification] to set alarm notification
[Important]
・It takes a long time to create a backup file when backing up configuration data
and logs.
・If the backup operation takes more than 10 minutes, a communication timeout
may occur. At this time, the backup data may not have been obtained completely,
so please complete it within 10 minutes. You can also check whether the correct
data was obtained by restoring the acquired data. (excluding log data)
4.12.5 [Data] to back up/restore configuration logs
Click [Data] in the Maintenance page. Refer to the following how to display and operate the
Advanced menu.
→4.2.1 How to display
→4.2.2 How to operate
Here, you can back up/restore your computer's setup data, scene files, and save your log.
Backup
[Setup data]
You can back up the computer's settings to your computer by clicking [Execute].
[Scene file]
By clicking on [Execute], you can back up the scene file settings for your computer.
[Logs]
You can back up your computer's logs by clicking [Execute].
Restore
[Setup data]
Press the [Select File] button to select the file of the set data to be restored.
Click the radio button to select whether to restore the network settings at restore time.
When [Execute] is clicked, restores start. After the restore is completed, the system restarts. Do
4 Advanced settings
4.12 [Maintenance] to maintain the machine
366
[Important]
・If it takes more than five minutes to restore the setting data, the restore may
have failed due to the disconnection of the communication.
Restore the system again.
[Note:]
・HTTPS-related settings are not reflected in the restore operation of the
configuration data.
・The settings related to the function extension software are not reflected in the
restore operation of the setting data.
not operate the screen until the restore is completed.
Be sure to use [Model name.dat] (model name is lowercase and [WV-] is not required) as the file
name of the setting data to be used for restore.
[Scene file]
Press the [Select File] button to select the file of the scene file setting data to be restored.
When [Execute] is clicked, restores start. Do not operate the screen until the restore is complete.
Be sure to use [Model name.txt] (model name is lowercase and [WV-] is not required) as the file
name of the scene file data to be used for restore.
4.13 Viewing Our Support Website [Support]
The Support page contains our support information.
The support information is as follows.
Support information for security products can be found on our support website.
Note: If you are not connected to the Internet, it cannot be displayed.
・For use in Japan
https://i-pro.com/jp/ja/support_portal
・For use outside Japan
https://i-pro.com/global/en/surveillance/training-support/support
The [i-PRO Setup Tool (iCT)] provides total support from i-PRO product setup to maintenance,
enabling customers to streamline their operations.
The following URLs can be downloaded free of charge. (Control No. C0133)
Note: If you are not connected to the Internet, it cannot be displayed.
・For use in Japan
4 Advanced settings
4.13 Viewing Our Support Website [Support]
367
https://i-pro.com/jp/ja/support_portal/technical_information
・For use outside Japan
https://i-pro.com/global/en/surveillance/training-support/support/technical-information
Click [Refer here for OSS used with this product] to display the OSS license used.
4 Advanced settings
4.13 Viewing Our Support Website [Support]
368
Classification Form of label Details of error
POP3 server error Authentication
error
・The username and password may be incorrect. Check
the mail settings again.
Without finding a
POP3 server
・The IP address of the server may be incorrect. Reaffirm
the server's IP address setting.
・The POP3 server may be down. Contact your network
administrator.
SMTP server error
SMTP
authentication
error
・The username and password may be incorrect. Check
the mail settings again.
Failure to resolve
mail server
address from DNS
・The DNS server might be specified incorrectly. Check
the DNS settings again.
・The DNS server might be down. Contact your network
administrator.
Without finding
the SMTP server
・The IP address of the server may be incorrect. Reaffirm
the server's IP address setting.
・The SMTP server might be down. Contact your network
administrator.
Internal error Other errors ・There is a problem with the mail function. Check the
mail settings again.
Classification Form of label Details of error
Access test error Access test failed ・The router might not be configured for port forwarding.
Enable the UPnP configuration by referring to your
router's instruction manual.
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
SMTP error indication
Visual Net Error Indication
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
369
Visual server error
Net server
address cannot be
resolved from
DNS.
・The DNS server might be specified incorrectly. Check
the DNS settings again.
・The DNS server might be down. Please refer to the
[Viewnetcam.com] website for information on failures.
Connection failure No server
response
・The server may appear to be down. Please refer to the
[Viewnetcam.com] website for information on failures.
Transfer error
Internal error Other errors ・It looks like you have a problem with the Net function.
Reaffirm the setting of the Net.
Classification Form of label Details of error
DDNS server error
Cannot resolve
DDNS server
address from DNS
・The DNS server might be specified incorrectly. Check
the DNS settings again.
・The DNS server might be down. Contact your network
administrator.
Connection failure No server
response
・The DDNS server might be down. Contact the server
administrator.
Host registration
with homonyms
・Hosts with the same name are registered on the DDNS
server. Reaffirm the DDNS Update setting.
Internal error Other errors ・A problem with the DDNS Update function has
occurred. Reaffirm the DDNS Update setting.
Classification Form of label Details of error
Connection failure No server
response
・The IP address of the server may be incorrect. Reaffirm
the server's IP address setting.
・The NTP server may be down. Contact the server
administrator.
Internal error Other errors ・Problems with the NTP function are occurring. Reaffirm
the NTP settings.
Time synchronization
success with NTP
Auto time
correction
・Successful time adjustment.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Dynamic DNS Update Error Display
NTP error indication
HTTPS logging
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
370
HTTPS Generated
signature request
・The creation of the signature request was completed.
CA certificate
installed
・The CA certificate installation is completed.
CA certificate
deleted
・The CA certificate has been deleted.
Previous CRT
keys applied
・Previous CRT keys were applied as CRT keys.
CRT key
generated
・CRT key generation completed.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
MQTT Connection failure ・Failure to connect to the server, fail to validate the
certificate, or disconnect (except for disconnection from
the camera due to configuration changes)
Notification error ・If Publish to the server fails
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Login User name or IP
address
・Displays the user name of the user logged in to the
computer when user authentication is configured.
・Displays the IP address of the user logged in to the
computer when host authentication is configured.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Login failure User name ・Displays the user name of the user who failed to log in to
the computer when user authentication is configured.
・If the user is not registered, the (unregistered user) is
displayed.
・The log for [Login failed] may remain during normal
operation, but this is not an error in the camera.
・If a large number of consecutive logs are retained,
unauthorized access may be obtained. Contact your
network administrator.
MQTT error indication
Display for login
Error indication for login errors
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
371
Classification Form of label Details of error
Original alarm
notification
destination error
Without notifying ・The IP address of the notification destination may be
incorrect. Confirm the setting of the IP address of the
notification destination.
・The notification destination may be down. Contact your
network administrator.
Notification
address cannot be
resolved from
DNS.
・The DNS server might be specified incorrectly. Check
the DNS settings again.
・The DNS server might be down. Contact your network
administrator.
Classification Form of label Details of error
HTTP alarm
notification
destination error
Without notifying ・The IP address of the notification destination may be
incorrect. Confirm the setting of the IP address of the
notification destination.
・The notification destination may be down. Contact your
network administrator.
Notification
address cannot be
resolved from
DNS.
・The DNS server might be specified incorrectly. Check
the DNS settings again.
・The DNS server might be down. Contact your network
administrator.
Authentication
error
・The username and password may be incorrect. Check
whether the HTTP alarm is set correctly.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
SD card Generated
signature request
・The creation of the signature request was completed.
CA certificate
installed
・The CA certificate installation is completed.
CA certificate
deleted
・The CA certificate has been deleted.
Error indication for unique alarm notification
Error indication for HTTP alarm notification
Display of SD Memory Card Security
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
372
Previous CRT
keys applied
・Previous CRT keys were applied as CRT keys.
CRT key
generated
・CRT key generation completed.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Upgrading the
firmware
Successful version
upgrade
・The firmware version is successfully upgraded and the
firmware version (before/after) is logged.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Upgrading the
firmware
Version upgrading
failed (timeout:
insufficient
communication
bandwidth)
・Farm-up failed due to timeout due to insufficient
communication bandwidth. Confirm the communication
environment and perform the procedure again.
Failed version
upgrading (file
error: Incorrect
firmware file
selection)
・Farm-up failed because the wrong file was uploaded.
Select the firmware of the computer and perform the test
again.
Version upgrading
failure
(Communication
error: File
corrupted)
・Firmup failed due to file corruption during firmware
transfer. Confirm the communication environment and
perform the procedure again.
Version upgrade
failure (Other
error)
・Error occurred during firmware version upgrade. Wait
for a while before starting the procedure again.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Displaying firmware upgrades
Error indication for firmware version upgrade
Error indication for installation status
5 Other
5.1 System Log Display
373
Installation status Installation status
error
・Error in installation was detected. Reaffirm the
installation condition of the machine and turn on the
power again.
Classification Form of label Details of contents
Server error Can't find a server ・The FTP/SFTP server might be down. Contact the
server administrator.
・The IP address of the FTP/SFTP server may be
incorrect. Reaffirm the server's IP address setting.
Failure to resolve
FTP server
address from DNS
Connection failure Username
password error
・The FTP/SFTP server may be configured incorrectly.
Reaffirm the settings.
・Setting of each display may be incorrect. Reaffirm the
settings.
Failed to change
directory
Host key collation
error
Without access
privileges
Image
transmission failed
Transfer error
Error in Passive
mode
Logout failure
Internal error Other errors ・There is a problem with the FTP/SFTP function. Check
the FTP/SFTP settings again.
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
FTP/SFTP error indication
5.2 Trouble!?
Check the symptoms on this table before asking for repair.
Contact the dealer from whom you purchased the watch if you do not recover from any of these
problems or if you have symptoms other than those listed in this table.
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
374
Cannot be
accessed from a
Web browser
・Are cables of category 5e or higher connected to
the network connector?
Operation Manual
Installation
・Check that the link lamp (LINK) is illuminated. If
it is not illuminated, the connection to the LAN is
not normal or the network to which the
connection is made is not operating normally.
Check the cable for faulty contact and wiring.
Operation Manual
Installation
・Check that the power to the machine is ON and
that the power to the machine is ON.
Operation Manual
Installation
・Are valid IP addresses set for your computer? 4.10.1 Networking
[Network]
・Are incorrect IP addresses accessed? Confirm
the connection using the following method. In the
Windows command prompt>If Reply is returned
from your computer under ping [IP address set for
your computer], it is operating normally. If Reply
is not returned, check the connection using the
PC connected to the same network as the camera
as shown below. If the firewall setting of the PC is
enabled, temporarily cancel the firewall setting
before setting the camera.
Start the IP Easy Configuration Software, check
the camera IP address, and access the IP address.
If the network configuration (IP address, subnet
mask, default gateway) is incorrect, restart the
camera and change the network configuration
using the IP easy configuration software within 20
minutes.
In an environment without a • DHCP server,
restarting the computer with the Initialization
button sets the IP address to [192.168.0.10(*)].
Then access the computer to reset the IP address
(which initializes all settings).
The IP address of the (*) Multi-directional/PTZ
--
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
375
integrated camera is 192.168.0.10 for the PTZ
camera and 192.168.0.11 for the Multi-directional
camera.
・HTTP port numbers other than 20, 21, 22, 23,
25, 42, 53, 67, 68, 68, 69, 80, 110, 123, 161,
162, 443, 554, 995, 1883, 883, 10669, 10670,
59000-61000 should be used for HTTP port
numbers.
4.10.1 Networking
[Network]
・Is the set IP address overlapping with other
devices? Is the set address and the destination
network subnet conflicting? (If the computer and
the PC are connected in the same subnet)? Is the
set IP address of the computer and PC set to the
same subnet? Also, if [Use Proxy Server] is not
set on the PC, or if you are accessing the
computer within the same subnet, it is
recommended that the [Remove from proxy]
address be set. If the computer is connected to a
different subnet, is the default gateway set for the
computer correct?
--
・Are you accessing the computer with a name that
is different from the one registered in
[Viewnetcam.com] (nickname)? Access the
computer with the registered name.
4.10.4.1 With
[Viewnetcam.com]
services
・If HTTPS is used, access [http:///] while the
HTTPS function is in use. You must also enter the
port number. From the support video page of the
support site<Control No. P0002>、 <Control No.
P0003>Please refer to.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Camera cannot be
accessed from the
Internet
・Are the network settings for the computer
correct? Configure the default gateway or DNS
server address correctly. When using the DDNS
service, make sure that it is set correctly.
4.10.1 Networking
[Network]
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
376
・In networking, do you configure [Default
gateway]? Or do you configure it correctly? In
IPv4, [Set]-[Network]-[IPv4 network], set
[Default gateway] correctly.
・Does the router have a port forwarding
configuration? If your router does not have UPnP
capability, you must configure the port forwarding
configuration to allow access to the computer
from the Internet. Refer to your router's
Instruction Manual for how to configure.
・Is the UPnP function disabled on the router?
Refer to the router's instruction manual and
enable the UPnP function.
・Does the router have packet filtering or other
settings that prohibit access from the Internet?
Enable your router to access from the Internet.
Refer to your router's instruction manual for how
to configure this function.
4.10.2.4 Set UPnP
・Do you have access to the IP address (local
address) for use on the local network? Check the
IPv4 network settings, IPv6 network settings, and
DDNS settings, and access the global address (or
URL registered with the DDNS service) as the IP
address of the computer for use on the Internet
with the computer's port number.
4.10.1 Networking
[Network]
4.10.4 How to
configure DDNS
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Unaccessible with
[Viewnetcam.com]
services URLs
・Is the global address of the machine (or router)
informed to the [Viewnetcam.com] service
server? Check the registered cameras on the
[Viewnetcam.com] service website. If not, please
go to the computer and [Set]-[Network]-
[Advanced] to complete the [Viewnetcam.com]
services registrations. Also, check the
[Viewnetcam.com] status and system logs for the
[Set]-[Maintenance]-[Status] of the computer.
4.10.4.1 With
[Viewnetcam.com]
services
4.12.1 [System log] to
check the system logs
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
377
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Display the
authentication
screen
continuously
・If the user name or password has been changed
while the computer is being accessed and the user
name or password being logged in has been
changed in another web browser, the authentication
screen is displayed each time the screen is
switched. Close the Web browser and access the
computer again.
・If you have changed the [Authentication method]
setting, close the web browser and re-access it.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Take longer to
display
・Are you accessing in HTTPS mode? In HTTPS
mode, the display will be slow depending on the
specifications of your PC for decoding processing.
Refer to the web guide of your model for the
recommended specifications of the PC.
--
・Do you have access to your computer on the
same local network via a proxy? Configure the PC
so that it does not go through a proxy.
--
・Are multiple users referring to the camera image
at the same time? If multiple users refer to the
camera image at the same time, the screen
display may take longer or the camera image
updating speed may be slower.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
378
Camera cannot be
accessed from
mobile or tablet
terminal
In the case of mobile devices:
・URL is wrong. Or, is [/cam] not entered at the
end of the URL? Ensure that the URL is entered
correctly. When accessing the computer from a
portable terminal, enter [/cam] at the end of the
URL to be used when accessing the computer
from the PC.
For tablet terminals:
・Check that the URL is correct and that the URL
is entered correctly.
--
・Is the SSL encryption method of the HTTPS of
the mobile terminal or tablet terminal different
from that of this device? Set the [Connection] of
the HTTPS of this device to [HTTP] and
re-access it.
--
・If HTTPS is used, access [http:///] while the
HTTPS function is in use. You must also enter the
port number. From the support video page of the
support site<Control No. P0002>、 <Control No.
P0003>Please refer to.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
When registering
with [Viewnetcam.
com] services, an
error is displayed
(e.g. [Error
occurred. Cookie
cannot be used or
expired. Cookie
available browser,
reconnect by
setting.]).
・Is the security setting of the web browser set to
not accept cookies? Check the settings of your
web browser.
--
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
379
Fail to register
[Viewnetcam.com]
services
・Is there a possibility that the registered e-mail
address is incorrect? If the e-mail containing the
links to the [Viewnetcam.com] services website is
not sent, the registered e-mail address may be
incorrect? Refer to the [Viewnetcam.com]
services website to register the e-mail address
correctly.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
No Picture ・Please refer to the instruction manual for your
mobile terminal/tablet terminal for information
about the limitation of image data size that can be
displayed on the mobile terminal/tablet terminal.
--
Blur the image ・Check that the focus is adjusted correctly. Operation Manual
Installation
The camera is not
focused
immediately after
the power is
turned on.
・Focus and zoom are adjusted after starting the
camera, and the camera is out of focus for a
certain period of time.
--
The image is not
updated
・Depending on the web browser or version, images
may not be updated or other problems may occur.
Operation Manual
Installation
・Images may stop being displayed due to network
congestion or concentration of access to the
machine. Request the acquisition of images by
pressing the [F5] key on the PC keyboard.
--
The camera image
is not displayed
(dark).
・Is the [Brightness] set to darken? Click [Normal]
for brightness.
2.3.2 About live image
pages
Look whitish ・Is the [Brightness] set to brighten? Click
[Normal] brightness.
When the [Adaptive black stretch] slider bar is
moved in the [-] direction, the image is darkened.
2.3.2 About live image
pages
4.6.4.1 To adjust the
image quality (image
quality adjustment
screen)
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
380
Flicker the image ・If flickering is a concern, set [Light control
mode] to [Indoor scene].
4.6.4.1 To adjust the
image quality (image
quality adjustment
screen)
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Image not saved
on SD Memory
Card
Failure to write to
or read from SD
Memory Card
・Check that the SD Memory Card is mounted
correctly and correctly.
--
・Is the SD Memory Card formatted? --
・[--------------MB] is displayed on the
[Remaining capacity] of the [SD memory card]
tab. Please format the SD Memory Card.
4.5.2 [SD memory
card] for setting SD
Memory Cards
・[Remaining capacity] of the [SD memory card]
tabs########MB/########MB is not displayed?
Check the password lock setting.
4.5.2 [SD memory
card] for setting SD
Memory Cards
・If the mail notification or unique alarm [Diag.]
function is used, has the recognition error of the
SD Memory Card been received?
・In the [Maintenance]-[Status]-[SD memory
card] logs<SD>Is the recognition error displayed?
Format the SD Memory Card.
4.5.2 [SD memory
card] for setting SD
Memory Cards
4.8.10 [Notification] to
set alarm notification
4.10.2.1 Set mail
sending
・Is the SD Memory Card faulty? The SD Memory
Card has a limited number of rewrites. Replace
the SD Memory Card with a new one if it is
rewritten frequently because it may last a long
time.
--
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Inability to
communicate voice
・Check that the microphone and speakers are
connected correctly and correctly.
・Transmission voice can only be used when
connected with HTTPS.
Operator's Manual
Installation, page 19
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
381
Without audio
from our network
disk recorder or
PC software
package
・Some of our network disk recorders and PC
software packages do not support [G.711]. Set
the earpiece speech compression method to
[G.726 (32 kbps)] or [AAC-LC].
4.6.5 [Audio] for
setting sound
The image on the
live image page is
not displayed.
・Press the [F5] key on the PC keyboard or press
the [Live] button.
2.3 Viewing images
from a PC
The shortcut icon
for the camera is
not displayed on
the [Network].
・Does the UPnP Windows component have been
added? Add the UPnP Windows component to
your PC?
4.10.2.4 Set UPnP
Phenomenon Causes and countermeasures Reference
Image not updated
or displayed
successfully
・The port of this equipment may have been
filtered by the firewall function of the virus check
software. Change the HTTP port number of your
computer to a port number that is not filtered.
--
The lamps are not
lit.
・In the Advanced menu [Basic], is the lamp
display setting set to [Off]? Set the lamp display
setting to [On].
4.5.1 [Basic] to
perform basic settings
The H.265 (or
H.264) image does
not appear
smoothly.
・The following may be improved.
Check the [Required PC Environment] in the web
guide.
Web Guide
Clicking the Back
button on the
Web browser will
not display the
correct screen.
・Press the [F5] key on the PC keyboard to update
the screen.
--
[Access is
concentrated. Run
later.] is displayed
on the live picture
page.
・Change the [Bit Rate* per Client] setting of the
stream to a lower value.
・Change the [Initial display stream] setting to the
lower [Max bit rate (per client) *] streams.
4.6.3 [Image] for
setting up streams
4.6.2 [Image] for
setting JPEG images
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
382
A dialog message,
error message, or
other character in
the message will
break, or a
portion of the
message will not
be displayed.
・This may be canceled by changing the settings of
the PC. Right-click the PC screen and change
the display by clicking [Display Settings] →
[Change the size of text, apps, and other items].
--
5 Other
5.2 Trouble!?
383
5.3 Directory structure of SD Memory Card
5.3.1 Directory configuration of the PTZ camera
5 Other
5.3 Directory structure of SD Memory Card
384
5.3.2 Directory Configuration of Multi-directional Camera
5 Other
5.3 Directory structure of SD Memory Card
385
